A Simplified Grammar 'Beading Book of the Panjabi Language
237
Transcript of A Simplified Grammar 'Beading Book of the Panjabi Language
2 4 6 7QJ
HERTFORD
PRINTED BY STEPHEN A USTIN A ND SONS.
INTRODUCTION .
Ta ts little treatise is'
intended to facilitate the study of a language
hitherto hardly sumcientlyva lued ,— the verna cular tongue of the
great ma jority of the inhabitants of the Panjab . A lthough long
groaning under the rule ofMuhammadan conquerors, the peopleof the PanJa b even then clung to their own language in preference
to adopting the Urdu of their ma sters : and at the present time
Urdu, although studied and taught in nearly every school to the
almost utter neglect of the Panjabi', is nevertheless rega rded by
the mass of the people as be ing quite as much a foreign tongue a s
Norman-French was in England in days gone by. While Urdu is
genera lly spok en in public by the educa ted classes, yet in their
own homes a ll— Muhammadans, Sik hs and Hindus alik e (though
with considerable difference of vocabulary)— spea k PanjRBI and
Panjabi only. A ny one who wishes to ga in the confidence and win
the affections of the villagers especia lly— and the PanJa b is a
.country of villages— must be able to address them in their dear
mother-tongue . If we ex cept the Granth,— written in poetry, and
in a dia lect more nearly resembling Braj Bh'
asha'
than modern
Panj abI,— and thevariousJanamSak his ormythical Lives of GuruNana k , the language has produced few book s of any great literary
value . This to a‘
great e x tent a ccounts for the light esteemin
which it has generally been held by Eumpeans. Still, as we havetried to show, it is of no little importance , and it ha s by nomeans
been utterly neglebted by those engaged in th e great. wnxk Q\
ex tending we k ingdom of Christ in the Yman ‘h e menses.“
PANI ZE'
I'
GRAMMAR.
of the American Mission in LfidIana and Lahore have especially
interested themselves in the language , and it is to them’that we
owe the only really useful grammar (that of Dr. Carey wa s a
merely tenta tive effort) and the only dictionary of the language
y hich have yet appeared . To these — the “Panjabi Grammar ”
of that venera ble Missionary, the Rev. John Newton of Lahore ,and the Panjab'
i Dictionary edited bythe Rev. L . Janvier of
the same Society, I amvery deeply indebted .
“Both thesevaluable
work s, however, are perhaps
‘
utterly unk nown in England, and
they are almost out of print in the Panj‘
ab itself. It seemed tome therefore that it would be by no means a work of superero
gatica to endeavour in a humble way to a id students in atta ining
a k nowledge of Panjab'
i by compiling a Simplified Grammar and
Reading Book , which might serve to remove some of the difficultiesand supply the student with a stock of useful words .
Besides the book s above mentioned and the always useful
Hindustani Dictionary of Platts, I had when in the Panj'
ab the
advantage of residing formore than a year in Amritsar itself,— the
sacred city of the Sik hs— and of reading the language under the
instruction of one of the Granthis of the Golden Temple . This
ha s enabled me to ex pla in a few points of Grammar which havenot, I believe , been previously treated of, and also to give themeanings of certa in words not found in the Panjab
‘
i Dictiona ry
above referred to. Otherwise I lay no claim to originality, which
would be out of place in a work lik e the present.
In the Gramma r use ha s been made of Roman letters for the '
purpose of simplifica tion, but a t the same time an ex act systemof
transliteration has been adopted , so that there is no loss in ao
curacy to counterbalance the ga in in time which results fromdividing the dimculties of our task in order the better to overcome Lthemin succession. A few useful hints have been borrowed from1
,
mm w rlrs were ublished. the Grammar at Lam“‘
m‘
lSSl , and thec tmnary a t be same p ace in 1854 .
INTRODUCTTON .
the systemof generalization employed by the late Professor Palmer
in his Simplified Grammar of the Hindustani Language .
”
The Reading Ex tracts— the first and the last ex cepted— are
ta k en fromthe Sik hk hd de Raj di Withi i ,”the book appointed
for Government E x aminations in Panjabt. It will be found that
they gradually increase in difficulty, the second story from the
Janem-si k hl being in0
a much more colloquial style and in a
different dialect frommost of the others. The advantage of a care
fullyvaried selection of this k ind id at once apparent.
It is unnecessary to say much about the pronunciation of the
language , but itmay be noticed that (1 ) It isvery lightly sounded
and is often entirely inaudible (my. be , k iha, rih'
a, are pronounced
e , k 1a , ria) . A t other times iii-serves to lengthen the sound of the
pmeeding vowel (my. bible or wihla, pronounced bela orvela) .So also inverbs, especially when the present tense of hona, to be ,
’
is used as an aux iliary (my. while ak hde han is so written and
road , in spea k ing the two words are amalgama ted and become
i k hdin) . (2 ) B and Wvery often interchange both in speak ing
and writing ; and the as, though here transliterated W in accord
ance with almost universal custom(in Urdu and Hindi“
at least) ,is in realitymuch more nearly 7 .
In words of Sansk rit ongin the following are some of the more
important changes that occur in their introduction into Panjabt.
oW is ofte n changed to B, andvice ven d : rt’
becomes ir (k ripa P.
k irpa) : sh and s alik e become s (desa = P. des) k sh becomes k h
(k shatriya P. k hattri ) : r and y united to another consonant
become assimila ted with it (my. S . punya =P. punn : S. dhanya
=P. dhann : S. P. sati, Mod . P. satt : S . k ari1a = P.
k ann and H. U. k i n : S. k arma = P. k arm, k ammand H . U. h im) .0 Words which in Urdu and Hindi have r, in P. genera lly ta k e (1instead (my. bare=
.
P. wada : U. H . chhorna P. chhadna), though
rh yomrafly rema ins unaltered . Those words w‘
nlxen h ave. \emg,vowels in E .
’
and U. and are of Sansk rit stock h ave Emu nuns“
PANJZBI omn ua .
P., and generally double the consonant following (but this is
frequently ex pla ined a s in the case of h im and k i n above). The
s sounds ofUrdfi (Persian and Arabic) words becomes j (a y. baz‘
ar
P. bajar : Wazir=P. Waj ir) — this applies to j .5us Is : thea.sounds and sh (up , U“
, Us, u
p ) become a f becomes pk :
becomes 9 : C‘ becomes Ida Jbecomes final -ah (8 becomes
-d :(becomes h : is omitted . Besides this, the Panj a bt is dis
tinguished for its preference for the letter nk which is used in it
inmany ca ses when II . has n.
i
Other peculiarities are less worth
deta iled notice .
I have spared no pains to include in the Vocabulary every wordused in the Reading Lessons, and hope I have omitted none . If,
however, any have through oversight been left out, they will
probably be found to be very common U. and H . terms, the
meaning of which is generally k nown to all who are lik ely to use
this little book .
Should thiswork assist any one in acquiring such a k nowledge of
Panjab‘
i a s will enable him to preach the Gospel to the people of
that country, the compiler’s chief object in preparing it will have
been atta ined .
W. Sr. C. T.
Bon n .
October, 1887.
ELEMENTS or PANJAB'
I'
GRAMMAR.
The Panj abt Language, lik e the Hindi with which it is closelyalli ed , is derived from the h ab it, once the vernacular of the
Panjab and of a large part of Hindustan proper. A s the Prak rit
itself was only a popularised corruption or simplification of the
Sansk rit, nearly every genuine Panj”
abi word of the present day
can be traced without much difficulty to thatvenerable tongue ,which conta ins many of the oldest forms of that Aryan speech
which is common tomost of the inhabitants of Europe , Persia , andIndia . A lthough but little cultivated, owing to the presence of
Muhammadan conquerors who used in preference the Persian, and
more recently the Urdu, language for literary purposes, the
Panjabi tongue is well worthy of attention, even from a philo
logica l or li terary point ofview. Moreover, in the central Punjab
at least, it is the mother-tongue of the people, and the only
language thoroughly understood by the greatma jority of them.
A s those who study this tongue have generally ga ined a fa ir
k nowledge of Urdu first, it will not be necessary to domore than
show in what the Panjabrdiffers from that dialect, a s far a s its
grammatical relations are concerned . We sha ll therefore frequentlyava il ourselves of the Urdu language in ord er as far a s possible to
render thp comparatively easy ta sk of mastering the grammen ei
the Panj i bt tgngue still more easy by showing th e remak e“‘bfP and amilan
‘
ty which ex ists between them, owing toth e ta ck .
PANJABI A LPHABET.
The letters, as in l
are written from I
The Numerical 1
are :
‘I Q38 ll 6‘l
“
C !
l 2 3 4 6 6 7 8
A dlai}: writter
the line between two
doubles the latter of t
Initialvowels
Nola — Thisalphabcsists of the DevanagSansk rit letters in a s]
modified form. The e
lents given in thisTa ]the letters used in I
Urdu(as far as possil
represent the same s
The aspirates, bl
are not pronounced e
asUrdu, butwith a pr
sound, while r_1g is a
which does not we
Urdu, but is similarfirst fly in singing} i
nounced si-nging.
’
prevent confusion, I
used 11 to represent tbr
talnwhich doesnot or
Urdu, and above a
to denote the final nan
PANJA BI GRAMMAR.
of the American Mission in Li'rdraua and Lahore have especially
interested themselves in the language , and it is to them'that we
owe the only rea lly useful 1 grammar (tha t of Dr. Carey was a
merely tentative effort) and the only dictionary of the language
y hich have yet appeared . To these — the “Panj'
abi Gramma r
of tha t venerable Missionary, the Rev. John Newton of Lahore ,and the Panjabi Dictionary
”edited b} the Rev. L . Janvier of
the same Society, I amvery deeply indebted .
lBoth thesevaluable
work s,however, are perhaps
‘
utterly unk nown in England, and
they are almost out of print in the Punjab itself. It seemed to
me therefore that it would be by no means a work of superero
gation to endeavour in a humble way to a id students in atta ining
a k nowledge of Panjabi by compiling a Simplified Grammar and
Reading Book , which might serve to remove some of the difiiculties
and supply the student with a stock of useful words.
Besides the book s above mentioned and the always useful
Hindustani Dictionary of Platte, I had when in the Panjab the
advantage of residing formore than a year in Amritsar itself,— the
sacred city of the Sik hs— and of reading the language under the
instruction of one of the Granthi s of the Golden Temple . This
has enabled me to ex pla in a few points of Grammar which havenot, I believe , been previously tre ated of, and also to give themeanings of certa in words not found in the Panjabi Dictiona rya bove referred to. Otherwise I lay no cla im to originality, which
would be out of place in a work lik e the present.
In the Grammar use ha s been made of Roman letters for the '
purpose of simplification, but a t the same time an ex act systemof
transliteration has been adopted, so tha t there is no loss in ac
curacy to counterbalance the ga in in time which results fromdividing the difficulties of our task in order the better to overcomethemin succession. A few useful hints have been borrowed from1 fi lm W rk s were ublished. the Grammar at Lhdi’ana in and the
8 5 bem e p ace in 1854 .
i
INTRODUCTION .
the systemof generalizati on employed by the late Professor Palmer
in his Simplified Grammar of the Hindiistaui Language .
”
The Be ading Ex tracts— the first and the last ex cepted— are
ta k en fromthe Sik hk hade Raj di Withia ,”the book appointed
for Government E x aminations in Panjabi . It will be found that
they gradually increa se in difi culty, the second story from the
Janumsak hi being in a much more colloquial style and in a
difierent dialect frommost of the others. The advantage of a care
fullyvaried selection of this k ind is‘at once apparent.
It is unnecessary to say much about the pronunciation of the
language, but itmay be noticed that (l ) h isvery lightly sounded
and is often entirely inaudible (a y. he , k iha, riha, are pronounced
0, h a, ria) . A t other times ite serves to lengthen the sound of the
preceding vowel (my. hibla or wihla, pronounced bola orvela) .So also inverbs, especially when the present tense of hona, to be ,
’
is used as an aux iliary (my. while ak hde ban is so written and
read , in speci fy the two words are amalgamated and become
ak hdin) . (2 ) B and Wvery often interchange both in spea k ing
and writing ; and the 3, though here transliterated W in accord
ance with almost universal custom(in Urd ii and Hindi at least) ,is in rea lity much more nearly 7 .
In words of Sansk rit ongin the following are some of the more
important changes that occur in their introduction into Panjabi .
oW is often changed to B, andvicevsrsd : rz'
becomes ir (k ripa= P.
k it-pa) : sh and s alik e become s (desa ==P. des) k sh becomes k h
(k shatriya P. k hattri ) : r and y united to another consonant
become assimilated with it (my. S. puirya= P. punn : S. dhanya
==P. dhann : S. satya= Old P. sati, Mod . P. sa tt : S . k ariIa = P.
k ann and H. U. k an : S. k a rma = P. k arm, k ammand H. U. k am) .
Words which in Urda and Hindi have r, in P. genera lly ta k e (1
instead beta wada : U. H. chhorna P. chhadna), though
1h genera lly rema ins unaltered . Those words which h ave \en%vowels inH.
’
and U. and a re of Sansk rit stock h ave heart enee'
xn
PANJZE'
I'
GRAMMAR.
P., and generally double the consonant following (but this is
frequently ex pla ined a s in the case of k amand k an above). The
s sounds ofUrda (Persian and Arabic) words becomes j (sy. bazar
P. bajar : Wazir= P. Waj ir) — this applies to ) «5U5ls : thea.sounds and sh (up , U“
: Us, u
p ) become a f becomes gh z
becomes 9 : C becomes Ida : Jbecomes final -ah (8 becomes-ci :
(becomes 11 :
tie omitted . Besides this, the Panj abi is dis
tinguished for its preference for the letter nnwhich is used in it
inmany cases when H . has n. Other peculiarities are less worth
deta iled notice .
I have spared no pains to include in the Vocabulary every wordused in the Reading Lessons, and hope I have omitted none . If,
however, any have through oversight been left out, they will
probably be found to be very common U. and H . terms, the
meaning of which is generally k nown to all who are lik ely to use
this little book .
Should thiswork assist any one in acquiring such a k nowledge of
Panjabi a s will enable himto preach the Gospel to the people of
that country, the compiler’s chief object in preparing it will have
been atta ined .
W. Sr. C. T.
Bonn" ,
October, 1887.
ELEMENTS or PANJAB'
I'
GRAMMAR.
The Pan] abi Language , lik e the Hindi with which it is closelyallied , is derived from the Prak rt
'
t, once the vernacular of the
Punjab and of a large part of Hindustan proper. A s the Prak rz'
t
itself was only a popularised corruption or simplification of the
Sansk rit, nearly every genuine Panjabi word of the present day
can be traced without much difiiculty to thatvenerable tongue ,which conta ins many of the oldest forms of that Aryan speech
which is common tomost of the inhabitants of Europe , Persia , andIndia . A lthough but little cultivated, owing to the presence of
Muhammadan conquerors who used in preference the Persian, and
more recently the Urdii , language for literary purposes, the
Panj i bl tongue is well worthy of attention, even from a philo
logica l or li terary point ofview. Moreover, in the central Panj‘
ab
at lea st, it is the mother-tongue of the people, and the only
language thoroughly understood by the greatmajori ty of them.
A s those who study this tongue have generally ga ined a fair
k nowledge of Urdu first. it will not be necessary to domore than
show in what the Panjabi differs from that dialect, a s far a s its
grammatical rela tions are concerned . We sha ll therefore frequentlyava il ourselves of the Urdu language in order as far a s possible to
render thp comparatively easy task of mastering the grammar at
the Panj i bt tgngue still more easy by showing th e chose wh im“
PANJZB'
I'
GRAMMAR.
that the Pan] ab‘
i and the Hindi (the grammar of which language
is preserved intact in Urdu) are sister-dialects rather thandistinctlanguages.
The Parts of Speech may be conveniently regarded as eight, as
in English . Of these , Nouns, A djecti\es, Pronouns and Verbs
posse ss Gender, Number and Case .
There are two genders ,Masculine and Feminine ; and only two
Numbers, Singular and Plural. In each number there are atmost
only two forms of the word, which are often identical, the in
flected and the uninflected form,which may also be called the
A bsolute and the Constructive or Oblique respectively.
The termination set is generally masculine , and is the mostcommonmasculine ending in the nom. sing. Its feminine equivalent is J.
52 . Nouns.l . Ga rden— No rule can be la id down which will fix the gender
of every word with certa inty. But it may be sta ted that the
termination -a is generally masculine , and 4 generally feminine
(ex cept in gentile nouns) . Most words derived fromUrdu preserve the gender they have in that tongue , ex cept any. rah, a way,
which is m. in Panjabi , though f. in Urdu. Words of Sansk rit
origin, if originally masculine or neuter, are 111 . in Pan] abi (ex cept
wastu, a thing, which is f. , though neuter in Sansk rit) ; if
originally f. they genera lly rema in so. A s in almost a ll tongues,
words necessarily implying females a re feminine . Words ending
in -t and -hat are ordinarily f. , unless these endings are part of
the root.
2 . Infl ation — Most nouns undergo no change in the singula r.
In the plural the oblique ending is universa lly 55.
B ut wages. in -5 change this into -e in the ohlique
n ow . p lan , and prefix -i before -a in the oblique phfr
NOUNS.
Femipines undergo no inflection in the sing. Their plural ends
in both absolute and oblique cases in
The ca ses are strictly two, Nom. and Obj . To these the Nom.
of A ddress or Voca tive may be added for convenience . To ma scs.
-i may be added to the stem -ii in case the nom. ends in -'
a) iii
the sing. and -e to fems. sing. to form the voc.
‘ In the plural
both may add -0 (for euphony-io) . We have therefore the
following scheme 2— 40
1 2
Abs.
or (-(i)d
0h]. d i d
Voc. i)o
For convenience we append the declension of the following
words with theirUrduequivalents.
(L ) ”new line. Feminine.
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural.
(Panj . ) (Urdu) (Panj .) (Urdu. ) (Panj . ) (Urdtl.) (Panj .) (Urdu)A bs. mund-i lurk -i mund-e lurk -e dhi beti dhi-d bet
‘
i -i
Obl. mund-e lark -e mufid-id lurk -6 dhi beti dhi-d bt-ti -o
Voc. mund-ii lurk -e mund-io [ark -o dhi -e beti dhi-o betj -o
A few mascs. in -a do not change this into -e in the oblique ,my. i tm'
a’
, sp irit, which may, however, ma k e atme .
Mascs. in -a have -o or -w‘
a invoc. sing., and -o or -wo invoc.
p.1. Their pl. oblique ends in -w
'
a.
Nouns ending in -a or -ii are treated a s if they ended in the
vowels without the nasal, a s far as declension is concerned .
Femininesmay contract the nom. plur. termination -i'
ft into -'
i .
Feminines in -u and a change this into-w before adding any
termination. Voc. pl. may be in -6 or -w6 ; voc. sing. in -wé, or
itmay he the same as the nom.
8 . Nouns with Postpoaitiom.— Instead of a variety of ca ses a s in
e a s scial iorm is N i,
66 ,
11; is the same i s!“Qgeuhet a u h.
rAmZni oa AmrAn.
Sansk rit, Panj abi , in common with Urduand mostmodern tongues.uses aux iliary words to ex press varieties of meaning. These maybe called postpositions as inUrdu, as they follow the noun instead
of preceding it. They all require the oblique form of the word .
The following are the most usual simple postpositions with the ir
UrduequivalentsP. U. P. U.
na i =ne (by) 16 ta k (up to) tOf those some are a lso
da . di =k § , id (of) nail =si th (with) used in composition wi th
pd k o t
fio) pur =par (on) the (
abliqug)
form of
Si;to so om as as g ar (e pus=gwichch m‘
e (in) fifth} p“(near) (k c) pas.
The postposition as di’
f. ) ta k es the same terminations
both sing. and pl. which mascs. in st and fems. in -i respectivelydo
, and agrees with the governing noun in gender, number and
sass. In Urdu and k i agree in gender and number but not in
case, and this construction is sometimes followed in Panj ab‘
i s.9
Usmanuk hk h did dhid=Usmard k i betid.Usmufide didmittrd wichch or
Usmunde de mittrd wichch- Us lurk s k e doctome .
4 . Other termina tions — In place of the postpositions wichch, to,
etc. , certain terminations, originally separate postpositions, are
sometimes added to the stem. Of these -e added to the sing.
denotes in, s.9. us di dargahe=us di darg'
ah wichch (Urduusk t
da rgah mé) — 6 denotes from s .9 . gha r6=ghar te . In the Plur.
oblique , (i)§ is turned into -'
i to denote in, as ghar'
i,
’ in the houses.
(The termination -6 is doubtless the same as theMarathi hun or
-nufrom, and occurs in the forman in Urduand Panjabi numera ls,unis for ok unie, (amfromtwenty) 1 9 .
l The postposition to is more commonly used in written com itions andin the Mslwa or Cis-Satlaj Panjab In the Trans-Satlaj distri ct or Panj i bproperms is almost universa lly used mthevil
Sometimes this termination is used in t e plural to denote the agent
with the past te nse of a transitive verb. s.9 . Musalmani' chahii , for Musalmfinlna i aba
'
bié'
. the Musa lmans desired .
’This is probably to be accounted for by
tb a fa ct tb a s in oldMarathi, the agential termination in the plural was -hf I
1 :22t a ss/mi n! would stand for Musalmlhl . (Ci . 3.3mm. P\. has“.
d e 'ehf, OldMar. devfihf
, now
rANJAni sauna s .
g 4 . Paonouss.
l . P0rsonals.— These are
1 st Pers. S. ma i , PI. asi ; 2nd Pers. S. tu, Pl. tusi ard Pers.
S . uh,Pl. uh, oh. They are declined as follows
1st 8 . nomma'
i, obl ma i (butme tefromm0) , Agent, ma’
i (forma i no) .2nd 8 . ta i (but te ts fromthee) , ta x (for ta i no) .3rd 8 . uh, oh, us, uh (sometimes ut) , un. on (foruh us) .letPl. as salt, as, asl .
2nd Pl. tusi , tust‘
t. tuha,3rd Pl. uh, oh, unhi , ,s unhl , unhl nai.
The third personal pronoun uh is also used for the demonstrativethat.
” Local dialects have several different forms for these
pronouns.
2 . Poss0ssir0s.— These are
1 st Pers. S. merit, 2nd ter‘
a , 3rd us da : lst Pers. Pl. asi d‘
a, si di ;2nd tus
'
ad‘
a, tuh
‘
ada 3rd unh'
ii d‘
a. These are declined lik e adjec
tives. (Tuba, tuhada etc. , are generally pronounced as if written
twfi, twadd'
a, etc. )
3. D 0monstrativ0s.— Ih (Urdii yih) this, is declined as uh, tha t,
above . A h, this (Hindi yah for yih), is indeclinable in the
singular ; in the oblique plural itma k es shit.
4 . Other pronouns— The relatives, interrogatives, etc.
, differ
very slightly fromthe Urd ii .
Sabb or sa rbatt, all Urdfi ash : in the obl. plur. it ha s sahhnfi.
Hor, other Urduaur ; in the oblique plur. it is sometimes regular,sometimes follows the analogy of sabh .
K oi , any one,ma k es k ise , k isi , or k ite in the obl. sing. and some
times k inha in the obl. plural. The A gent may be denoted byk ine or k ini sing. and k ini pl.
Jo, who, which, ma k es jis or j lll (or j it) in obl. sing . and jin'
d
1 An idiomatic construction. in which the Agential is used without the pa sttense of a transitiveverb should be noticed . We ofte n find sentences such asma i
'
di deh mi phfik ini ha i ; ta i sudagari k arni si , I must burn his body z'
lhil‘
:ha d to tra de. In these the pronoun is in the A ential to denote duly.
coa ch -00 11 00 h not used in UrdD ro er, though h ave hm it.M Kn th e
H industani of the uneduca ted u ammadans of Bomha‘
i
PRONOUNS.
or j inh'
i in obl. pl. : the A gent is denoted by 3mand j ini (or j xnhi )respectively.
Jihrii or jehra , who, which, whosoever ; j ihfi,‘jehi (Urduja is‘
i ),of wha t sort, are declined regularly. Jeta,’ as la r90 as, as lony a s,
is regular, but in the formjetor jail; is not declined .
So is declined on the analogy of jo, having tih and tit as well a s
tis— t tak ing the place of the initial letter in the oblique ca ses, as
inUrdu.
A jihi , ajehi =Urdii a isi,of such
“
a k ind ; iha or eha = of this
sort ; tih'
a or tobli, of tha t sort ; site (or sit indeclinable ) , so la r90,
are regular.
K auii , who?ma k es his, k ih, etc. K i , wha t? also has k is, k ih, etc.
K ehr'
fi, k ihri , which on0 ? ; K ihfi, k eh‘
a of wha t sort .
9;
k m, k ed'
a'
, k ait'
i (indeclinable k ait) , of wha t size ? are regular.
Ap, self, ma k es fipn‘
a, 1 , etc.,for the possessive , reta ininy ths lon9
cows! in thsfirst sylla ble. When used honorifically (in imita tion of
the Urduusage) for tusl, it ta k es the verb in the 2nd pers. pl. , not
the 3rd, as in Urdu.
5. 17430 of Pronouns — Til is used in Punj a bi to denote affection
between friends or relatives. Towards an inferior it is not in
sulting as in Urdu, but rather k indly. Tusi is used to equa ls andeven to superiors instead of 5p, used in both ca ses in Urdu.
6 . rifl es — The afii x es -i,-e ,
-0 , are sometimes added to a pro
noun, as-i is in Urdu, toma k e it more emphatic : uhi
,uho
Urdu wubi . Hi is also used , as in Urdu, for the same purpose ,with both pronouns and other words.
Si re Urdu-sii ) and jihi’
t Urdfi ja isii ) are added, especially
to adjectives of size and qua lity as well a s to adjective pronouns,to ex press ra ther ; as wadii sari ,
“rather large
”
(Urdu barii si ) ,chhota j ihfi,
“rather small,
”smallish (Urduchhotfi ja isz
'
i ) .
case to he used before it : as pak hird jiha hi l, sta t0
beingmore correct thanwit h
PANJZBI GRAUMAB .
7. Contractions — We often meet with j lchchir for j itn'
a chir
(Urdu jitni muddat), a s lon9 a tims as : jiddin= j is din,~ on wha t
day : k oik k k oi ik k, any one : ik k as ik si ik k , mmwas.
5. Va n s.
In Panj‘
abi the tenses are formed much in the same way, or at
least on the same system, as in Urdfi, and the use of the tenses is
similar. A s in most other infiectional languages, any part of
the verb may be analysed into Verbal root orverb proper,(2 ) participial afilx or part of the substantiveverb to be,
’
(3) pronominal ending.
The 2nd Sing. of the Imperative is the stem or simplest partof the verb . From this the other simple tenses, moods, etc.
, are
formed as follows
1 . Stemghall, 00nd.
Infinitive , or Noun of Action gha ll-Hui , to sand.
A orist, Indefinite ghall d, etc. , I may send .
Present Participle gha ll a , -i , send ing.
Past Participle Passive gha ll-Ha , -i,mat.
Future Participle Passive or ghall-H“,
-i, to 60 sent or sent
Gerundive i — mittendus ormissus.
The ao-called A orist is really the old Present Indicative , a s isseen froma comparison with the Bengali and the Sansk rit. It is
used with this meaning in the Granth. This tense is formed bya dding the remains of the original Aryan pronominal terminations
to the stem. These terminations in Panj i bi are
Sing. lst Pers.-d ; 2nd, -
‘
é 3rd, -e or a (as houfor hows), etc.
Plur. 1st Pars.-d, iye ; 2nd,
-o ;' 3rd, «mi ll or -an.
In the masc. a nasa l n is often added to the past Part. Pass.. as K iss danai mannid, he did not y a ttention to anyone
’s words.
’ The nasa l hereis doubtless a survival of the nnsk rtt neut. termmation -em, and not merely a
blunder.
3 Verbs in which -i is inserted before the infin. te rmas (0.9 . rahir'
ui ) ta k e -ifi
here instead of -ah or -eu ; and in thoseverbs in which the stemends in it, thisletter is changed in the 3rd pl. aor. into n, and then -mi is the termination added,
a s a ] . j én'
né, to k now, stemj ail , but 3rd pl. aor. janah.
I n the d a lnndha r dia lect in the 2nd pl. we often find 56 instead of -0 , but theG ran th is m A mri tsa r say this is wrong.
VERBS .
The Fjiture adds -g
'
a ma sc. and -gi fem. for the sing. , and sage
and gi a respectively for the plural, to the various persons of the
A orist.
‘
There are two forms of the Imperative — (a ) Direct, as ghall,’
pl. ghall-o : (b) indire ct, a s ghalli , ghall-io.
When the stem ends in.a vowel, as in auxin, to come ,’the full
ending -ndi is added to form the present participle , a s au-nda .
[Cf. Pers. i n,-anda : |Sansk .
-ant : Gk .-ont : Lat.
-ent : Anglo
Sa x .-and : German -end, etc.] In consonantal stems only
-di
(Urdii -tii ) is added , as in ghall-din.
The Infinitive afii x is generally and according to rule d i d (or
more probably not -na as inU. and H . (A shortened form,
in which the la stvowel is omitted , is in frequent use in both thenom. and the oblique . ) When, however, the stemends in -ii , r, r,
or 1, the termina tion is -na instead . In the Lfidiina dia lect verbswhich in H . and U. and in 1 ta k e 1 in its stead, and have -na in
the infinitive . In the Amritsar dia lect, however, the sound 1meter
occurs, its place in all words being ta k en by 1 ; such a verb a s
E .U. bi l-ui becomes therefore in Lndisaa bal-n:'
1 and in Amritsar
bi l-fia . (In the Vocabulary only one of such forms is genera lly
given. )The Infinitive changes its termination to agree with the noun it
governs in such phra ses as ga llfi k arnifi, Urdubats k arna .
The noun of A gency is properly formed from the shortened
infinitive which is often used in conne x ion with otherverbsThus ghall-ii i : shortened gha llafi : N. of A gency, gha ll
-ahwfili
or -afiw§ la, a sender.
’
Other tenses both A ctive and Passive are formed , a s in Urdu, byadding the Panj
‘
dbi equivalent forms of the aux iliaryverbs hon'
a
In some places the common people mak e the future masculine and in -gu
instead of in -gi ..
A short 4 is o ften added, as rahu,only s help to pronuncia tion, andmay be
su sh i amusin g.
and jars. We proceed to give the chief parts of these which
present any peculiarity.
2 . Hofiii , to 60, bscoms.
Indie Pres. Si lst huge) , 2nd hai(ga) , 3rd hai(ga) . The termination -ga ,Pi
n
ug. lst hd(ge), 2nd ho’
ge ), 3rd han(ge). if added, agrees in
Past Sing. let si (gi 2nd sa(ga), 3rd si (ga) . genderwith the sub
Plur. let se or 2nd se , ard at or can. jcet.Si feminine has si . etc. , and 1. aid. etc.
Indefinite , how etc Fut. howdga, etc mperat. ho, bowo.
Pres. Part. hunda ; Past. part. hora ; Fut. Part. Path. boidi .
There are very many dia lectic forms, too numerous to deta il
here . The fem. sin9 . si is a lmost nnicorsa lly a ssd for thsma sc. as
wsll. The future in Rawal Pindi , Multan, etc. , is hosii, hosi ,
hosi ; hos’fa,hoso, hosaii , instead of howdgi , etc. (0. Appendix
3. H im, to 90, to become.Imperat. j ah, j ao or j awo indirect jai and jfiio.
Present Part j i nda (distinguish fromj i fidi ,Past Part. gia m. , ga i f.
Gerund (as in Urdfi) jayi , as mai j ayii k ardi hii, I am in the
habit of going.
’ This, however, in Panj '
abi , is more commonlye x pressed by jfinda hunda h
’
a'
. So, for another e x ample , where wewould say in Urdu, wuh roz baroz masj id me’ j ‘
i k a du‘a mi ngi
k arta ha i, in Panjabi we would have , uh bar dinmasitwichch j i ik ebenti k ardi hunda hai, he is in the habit of going to the mosqueevery day and saying his prayers.
4 . Causativs Vsrls.
These are formed by adding -w‘
au-i1a to the stem,— compare the
Urdu-w§ as k arna, to do k ar-wiin-na , cause to do.
’
5. Transition fromIntransitiva andfromoth0r I l'ansitices.
These are formed much as in Urd i .
E xamples sik hth-alfii or sik hk hlinhi ; k arni , k aranina ; dck hna ,dzk hi lni or Jaufii ; ballia , hi lna
'
, tun a , turner.“him‘
e‘
neeni xbahu
’
zi , means ; bhi'gni , hhigofi i '
, k hi bia,“Vanni . erlfimYanh‘
a .
VERBS.
6 . Compound Vsrbs.
These require no notice, be ing formed in ex actly the same wayas inUrdu.
7. Irrsyular Verbs.
These are very few;in number. The principal are hoha and
j innalready given, together with
Infin. Past Part. Infin. Past Part.
h mi , to do, ti (k aria only. k hiina , to eat, k hadhu, k abdi .
stil
l: di hh Pat te rn”
it?“l i 3 ha if“ i t 8 .dek hna , tosee, Mm to an, mm“dehi , to give, lahna , to ali
ght, la thi .
pa hunchni , to a, pain-,a to fal pii .
rive, pauna (causat) , tob
ra-arm, to ra in,
nha .
cause to fall
ihii , to stay,
mhhmni , w re pachlla ti ,bmnhha
,wbmd,
cognise , pachha ix‘
u‘
i . la ihs‘
i , to ta k e ,Phasfii . to be en siuhi , to sew.
tangled,-phi ti . k ahina, to say,
The irregular forms of these a re the older, the regular a re in
most cases ofmore usua l occurrence when they ex ist.
s6 . A nvsnns, Pos'rrosrrroxvs, Cosm o-mos s, Lvrsmscrrox s.
.These require no notice here , as the rules of Syntax which
concern themagree so closely with those of the Urdu'
.
1 Fem. la i cf. gii , fem. ga i k iha, fem. k ahi ; riha,fem. rabi .
A PPE ND I X ~
A .
Tnn Nm nALs.
These very similar to the Urdfi. The -t00ns denoted by
ar'
i,the -tys up to 40 by -ih or -i , 40 in composition by -tali ,
50 in composition by -wanj § , 60 in composition by -hat, 70 ditto
by-hatta r, 80 ditto by
-'
asi , 90 ditto by-iinawé. 19
, 29, 39, etc.
are ex pressed by 20- 1 , 30-1 , 4 0-1 , etc. Singulars are often used
as inUrdu, inste ad of plura ls with the cardinal numbers.
Ordina ls.
pahilé,-i .
jdaja, s. daa, i .
tij ii , s , tit , s .
chauth
é,
lw -w
ghlilawd, -f.
7. satt The rest are form8 . athth ed (as inUrdu) b
y9 . na ii adding wh, whio
10. das may dialectically dons, twofold,1 1 .
gii rd, yard becomemfi. When tiuna , threefold,arii inflected , this -w§ chaur
'
ai, fourfold,
1 7 . becomes w'
c'
. pachauni , fivefold,19. m i chhiaufui , six fold, etc.
A PPENDIX C.
Norss on rm: LAnna BIALEGI‘.
This is the dialect in,which are written the E x tracts from the
Janem Si k hi which are given in ourReading Lessons. A lthough
Punjabi , lik e most other languages, especially those which a re
comparatively little cultivated, conta ins many dialectic varieties,yet these may be broadly divided into two ma in divisions, theWestern and the Eastern. The Granthis of Amritsa r say tha t
the ma in characteristics of the Western division are noticeable
more pa rticularly west of Lahore and north of the Ravi . The
speech of this part of the Panj i b may be regarded a s preservingsome words and grammatica l forms which a re older than the
equiva lent ones used in Hindi , and even in the Ea stern Punjabi .
In those and other respects it serves to some e x tent a s a con
necting link between the Ea stern Panj iibi and the Sindhi and
Gujarati languages, especia lly perhaps in the forma tion of the
future tense , in which it shares with Guj arati the honour of
preserving the Sansk rit future in a less corrupted sta te than any
othermodern language of India . The use of s a s the distinguish
ing sign of the future , lost by Latin in pro-cla ssica l times,
feta ined in Classical but lost inModern Greek , is still character
istic of Weste rn Punjabi . It shows, moreover, a preference , in
most instances, for the use of old and irregular pa st tenses of
verbs, when regular forms of the same words are more common
in the more cultivated dialect. On the other hand , however,some forms, as k ahii
, rahia (from k ahihfi, rahiin'
i) are regular
in the dia lects of the Western division, while they are irregular
(k ihii , riha) in the Ea stern. But this too is due to the preference
for archa ismg which we have mentioned , int nnh {Ma ere
m ff d d d forms of the older k ah i'
a and robin ,on
'
\e “fl ew
PANJKs'
i om x An.
from their feminines k ahi and rahi . In certain instances we find
Bra j Bhi sh‘
t‘
i (01a Hindi ) forms still used in tho Lahiiida and
other dia lects of the Western division. The Western dialects
show a preference for b where the Ea stern have w, as Lahinda
Obada for wads,‘largo bich for wichch,
‘in also for long
vowels (in this resembling the Marathi language), manuk hk h
for manuk hk h, ni ngi for nang‘
t'
t, nfihi and nhhi for nahi , dfik h
for duk h, etc. it also inserts a nasa l, as bhiiué for bhfiwé'
, pa indi
for pa idi ma i nu for ma i nii, etc. The following notes
will, it is hoped, enable the student to understand the ex tracts
fromthe I snamSi k hi which we have given, and will a lso serve a sa foundation for a more perfect acquaintance with the peculiaritiesof Western Punj abi genera lly.
1 . Nouns AND Amscrrvss.
In nouns and adjectives the Lahindii dialect is nearly in agree
ment with Eastern Panj i bi . The Nom. is often used for the Voc.,
as Bali for Bi le ; and fit is added in place of -'
ii to the longer
form, a sMandime forMardi nii . In this dialect the nai of the
instrumental or agential case is almost universally omitted (a s in
Da k k hani ) , but the nom. is put in the oblique case , Mord-tinek ahii for Hardi ne na i k ihi ; unhii chadi
‘
d for unhii nai (or unhi )obadia . But this is not the only postposition commonly omitted ,for da, di , do, are nea rly as frequently understood , a s a re other
similar words also : Parmesur j i nam= Parmesur j i da nfiu ;
sudhdh atme simare = sudhdh atme ni l sima re ulim simaraii i ia‘
ha i nan simarafi la i i ii ha i : tan bhasam lagiii tan pur bha sam
l'
di z j i fiwo= ] 1 wichch iiwe , etc. etc.
Feminine nouns in -s or : a i formtheir plurals in as ba l‘
o‘
. or
balai , misfortun0, pl. balai .B e side s
‘tb e usua l forms
,some peculiar and old numerals occur
4“d llb i a s W011 a s do,
‘two ;’trao a s well as tinn ,
th e
sorts on ma LAnnrnI ru nner.
bik h as y ell as ik k , one (the la tter being of course , a more
vulgarism,a s is hachhchhii for achhchh
‘
a,
52 . Pronouns.
Ma i is used in obl. instead of mai , as well as in the nom. and
agentia l : ma i ni'i k ahiii for ma i nii k ihii . So also ta i for ta i
in 2nd pore. sing. : afi , lst pl. for asi, and also for asii na i (a si )
tusfi for tuhi , tuhi na i, tusi , etc. In place of the usua l forms of
the 3md sing. , a shortened form-su, or
-os is used (=no na i and us
ni'
i ) , which is attached as an enclitic termination to other words,
especially toverbs (vide suchforms as nA x nx nros under Verbs) ,ni hisu nfihi us nai . Unhi is used for nuhi or unhi na i.
X0! is used, with an alternative form k ai , which is also used for
the plura l k a i . Its obl. is k iss or k ite . K aufi has generally hit
in the oblique , as 8 0 has tit. A s well as k uchh we find the forms
k ujh, k ichh, k ichhu, and oven the Braj Bhasha'
k achhu.
3. Van s.
1 . A orist. — The aorist has a considerable variety of forms :
for awe,3rd sing. , we find
‘
ziwa i and awi as well as the regular
form and in mostverbs which end in ii in the stem, instead of w
being inserted'
before the aorist terminations, h is put in, a s in,
as in Bra j Bhi sh‘
ti , dehe , deho, laho for dewe , dewo, lao (loo) .
This occurs in tho Imperative also. In the 3rd sing. aor. when
w (or h) is not inserted, the termination is often -i (hoi, cf.
the Hindi -y (hoy pronounced hoe ) . The form-io of the lot pl.
often becomes -iai as in Braj , k ari ai= k aric.
2 . Infinitivs.— The infinitive in verbs which in the Ea stern
dialect end in -iiuhi ta k e‘
t’
twafi‘
i inste ad in Lahindi . In the
infinitivos tho‘final -ii is often omitted .
8 . fi rm ! f or”.— Inverbs in which the Lah . t n
'
xt'
me enha‘
xa
PANJABI su m s .
-awi1 a (Eastern -auna ) , the pros. partmLah. is -awada or -awide
0 gawauna (Lah . gawawana ), pres. part. gawa ida ; k hawa ida for
k hawaunda ; awada (fr. awana = auf1 a , to come)= aunda .
4 . Conj unctivs Particip ls, or Psrfsct Part. A ct — Tho optiona l°longer formin -i k ahi k o for k ah k o) is much used in Lah .
a s older than the shorter form. It may’ be used without -k e or
-k ar as in Hindi . In the preference for the longer formin -i
pachhiifii , hoi j i wegfi, jai k ar, Lah . restambles Braj
5. Impera tios.— In the 2nd Sing. the termina tion -u is very
common, dehu (deh) , rahu (rah) , k aru (k ar), but may be
omitted . In other instances -i is added , as k hahi as well a s k h‘
a
for the usual Panj . k hiih or k habu. (See also under A orist. )6 . Past Tenes and p ast part. p ass
— Such old forms as liti for
li'
d are much used : also k ahifi for k iha, rahia for rih‘
a, para for pm
(from pa ini ) , etc. ; k hadi is used for k h‘
adh‘
i , from k hawa ii'
a, to
eat (Eastern Panj . k h'
afiii ) . The fem. , besides changing-a into -i ,
sometimes adds another as to that, a s k iti'
é for k iti (from k aruti ) .
But the most noticeable peculiarity about the past tense is that,
when the pronoun of the 3rd pers. sing. is used with it, either a s
agent or object (direct or indirect), the verb and pronoun are
united in a remark able way, a s will be seen from the ex amples
that follow, k ahiii us nfi or k ahié us na i becomes k ahios ; so
also k itos- us na i k iti or us nix k iti ; ditos=us na i dittii or us nu
ditti ; ak hios=us nai or us nu fik hi'
s'
t, etc. In these forms the'
o
arises fromthe fusion of the fina l -d of theverb with the initialu of the pronoun. So also in the pros. perf. we find k hattis ha isu
for us na i k hattii ha i, etc.
7 . Future — Tho regular Punj abi (Eastern) future may be used ;
but there a re other forms a lso which must be noticed . One is
produced by the insertion of -i before the future termina tions
without any apparent change ofmeaning, k attiegi for k a ttegii ,
Pb e f fa ng ey waflango, for pherange , warange But the most re
ma rk a bIo is the retention of the use of s in th e inte re , as‘
m
nou s on m u nusui DIALECT.
Sansk rit,This is used with all k inds of verbs. The following
comparative table may be of interest
West. Pan'
. Sansk rit
8 . let Poss . inf .-s K arishyimr
2nd mJ'
. K ar-s-l'
K arishyasi
3rd raj . K ar-s-i K arishyati
Pl. 1st m.f . Xar-s-d K arishyiimas2nd m.f. K at-s-o K arishya tha
3rd raj . K ar-s-an K arishyanti
In this formof theWVcstern Panjfibi future no gender distinctionappea rs.
8 . Other irr09ulariti0s.— Theverb hofi'
a has the in the past for
55, f. sing. 3rd pors. ahi ; masc. pl. the , f. pl. ahi ii . When ss is
used , it becomes inmasc. pl. sé for so : a s she is contracted into
na'
hfi. In the present tense also the 3rd sing . is often ha i a s well
a s ha i , the 3rd plur. generally ba ini for han, sometimes ha in (cf.
Sindhi term -ani in 3rd pl. of A si ha is contracted into asii,
a s k arde ass for asi k arde ha .
Daegii occurs for dowogfi, jano for jano, hoigi for howeg'
a [hosi
for howegii , awasi for awega or fiwcgi , etc. ,v. and jai e is used
in our ex tracts for ho jaie . Other peculiarities of the Western
Punj abi dialects the student will easily master as he progresses in
his k nowledge of the spok en language .
IND EX.
I . Tn Sm elt on m: Monur.
II . Luvs or Gum? Ni x“:
III . Exm o're n on m: Jnu x Sa‘
i
(1 ) Discourse with the Gubind Lok
(2) Story of the Bak shm Kaudi .
IV. Tn: Im onum nr Vn n or m: Jami
n m crs mu rm; u su r-si x a i .
l u mhfi ofi m fi l
A ecom or AN Irrrmwmw 3m m Gum? NANA I m a BI :
smss, su n to mva n u n PLACE m an Ismuw cam e
"R 17“12 23331 I wm vfi a m fi mh urrah
fimfi l fl n m mfimn, m fi<m, nfi mfaé amfl fifis; i nmm fis lm afi x lfi | 31
qq sfi fi zsnnfim, 37a m , i nnu, nmfi nrfi
m a fi l wflm fi a mfl nfl , flmfimfl, wm m w , i m 1m fi 8 %m $m
mi femvfis’t lmmmmufire afi sfifi sm .
W m .m m ? 31 fi u m vfi z§mfimmfi fi m m m—
Q im lmq m mmfe
’s
’
mafimmmesm umefzm mmmm vfi hfi ,mm,m fi 8 m w famfi,
fi wfi fi hm fi lma u fi énnfl nnfi fimfi ; m fi l fim3flfi éfimfi m3fi fi fi ?
m m hfi ufi m fi ?m%m fi f t fl
fivmé’tfimi srm fiwhm l smqm vh
m a onncron; vnasn or ms: Jm i .
IV. Ta x Ix '
rnonncronr a sr. or ra n Jami .
This ex tra ct will show (1 ) the style in which Panj abi is evennow written and lithographed in the Panj ab, and (2 ) the languageused in the Adi Granth, the great religious book of the Sik hs.
The “Japji is one of the poems conta ined in the Adi Granth,and was written by Guru Nana l: himself. It will be noticed
tha t the language he uses (a mix ture of Braj Bhash'
a and old
Panjabi ) is very different from that conta ined in the preceding
ex tracts, which represent the prose Panjabi of the present da yand of recent times. We transliterate the lines be fore ex pla ining
them, as the words a re not separated from one another in the
original. It should be noticed that, when a word (a s sati, namu)ends in a short vowel, the Granthis of the present day do not
pronounce that vowel a t all, in fact they say that the vowel isused in these instances not a s denoting any sound wha tever, butonly to show where one word ends and another begins. Of course
such a view needs no serious refutation.
Th ins!iteration
I lsa/car. Sa ti nimu, K arts, Pura k hu,Nirbhau, Nirwa iru,
A k'
almiirti, A juni , Sa ibham, Gfirprasi di.
The sign qé’is read Ik bk
'
ar,i .a . ik k , one
? -‘r on m ah
ru ni ni sum s.
and mystic sound which the Hindus use in worship and consider
to be significant of the Trimurti , Brahma, Vishnu,and S
'
iva )+ Ica
‘
r (a syllable used in Sansk rit and Hindi to denote sound
a k i r,the sound of a
’— i k ar, the sound of Granthis
say that fish or ii: is prefix ed to show the unity of God . The
long flourish is only an ex aggerated tippi , though the Granthis
ex pla in it as denoting the shy, and being full of other recondite
meanings.
Sati is for Satya Mod . Panj . Sa tt, Hindi Sash, true ,’
‘real,
’Vas, ‘to be ,
’ ‘ex ist.’
Nimu, U. Per. H . nam,term. of old Panj . ,
-u.
God is ca lled the real name .
’ The meaning of each word will
be clea r if we tranelate the verse as follows
The True Name , Creator, Mighty (or PrimevalMale) , Fearless, Devoid oi Enmity, of Timeless Form, not liable to Trans
migration, Self-E x istent, Beneficent Guide .
”
It would be beyond the scope of the present work to e x pla in
the full meaning of each term, as our object is not to write a
commenta ry on the Granth, but to show what Panj'
abi is and
what it once was.
VOCA BULARY.
Abhimana ,u n. (for abhiman, lengthened for sa k e of rhyme) , pride, ambition. S .
A chchal, c.m. name of a village near Batulli .
A cbhchha, -i,adj . m.f . good (H. U. achchha, -i ) .
A chwa ila,v.tr. (Lahindli dial. chahilfi, g to wish, lik e .— P.
Asa , c.m. protection, serene, shelter (cf. P. ai d and H. addli ) . — P.
Adar, c.m. politeness, respect ; dignity, reverence, honour.
— H.
A di la t, s.f . judgment, justice : adli lat k arni , to judge , do justice (corr. fr. A .U.
w hey— A .
Adharmi, a dj. m.f. and s.m. impious, ine ligious ; one unjust (a not dhann,— H.
A dhdhfi, a dj . m.f . half (U. H . i dhfi, -i) adhdhi rat, midnight.— P.
Admi, s.m. man, person.
— A . Per. U.
Agan,
}s.f . fire (S . agui, U. H . JT) .— P. A gan tap k armi , to perform
A S8 » austerities by fire, torture oneself by fire .
Agge , a dv. and postp . (with do) , before ; formerly (U. JT) . P.
A ggo, a dv. and postp . (with do) , frombefore ; beforehand — P.
Agha l (also aghai ), adj . m.f . satiated, sa tisfied.— H.
Age, sf . (H. ajua, agya) , a command, order.— H . P.
Agla,-i , a dj.m.f . (fr. former, prior, of ancient times : us to agli pik ambar,a prophet before him.
’— H. U. P.
Aha -r, a . intr. (Lahinda dial. P. si , si ), was : p l. aha , were .
A iai , a . :‘
ntr. 3rd sing. aor. of Awni (old H. and poet. for awe) .
A ib. e .m (corr. fr. U. A . ml ), fault, blame ; aib pa k arni , to find fault ; aib
15mm, to blame .
A in,adj . and ado. rea l ; ex act ; ex actly, quite (corr. fr. U. A . we ) .
A isi , -i, adj . m.f . (=Panj . aj ibi , ajehli , such.
— U. H.
a re, a dv. thus, in this way (=U. “ZL— P.
A j i rdiir, ssn. farmer of the revenue, contractor, monopolist (cor-r. fr. U. for,to;
Pu ni si su ntan.
A jga ibi , a dj .vn.f . invisible ; ajga ibi hona , to become invisible, to disappear (corr.
fr. Pers. as (j l)-s Ar. 9 4 i) ado. from the invisible world, by divine
interposition.
A jiba, -i , (e . ajehi ) adj . and ado. such, lik e this : so, thus.— P.
A jj , ado. to-day ; ajj k alh, in these days -.U(in— P.
A jma t, s.f . (corr. fr. A .U. w ho) , greatness, honour ; great deed, wonder, a
marvel.A judhii , mm. (B. Ayodhyi , U. P. sol,l) , the country Oude. — P.
A k arath, a dj . m.f . a nd ado. vain, useless ; uselessly, without design (H. also
a k zi rat : fr. 8 . a + k rita + artha ) . — H.
A k i s, am. the sk y, the visible heaven (S. (sk i ds, other) ; — H. i k i s, a k as,
ak k iis) .— H. P.
Ak hida.-i, ymmda
'
ocpa rt. ns.f . of ak haa, to call tobe called,— appella ndus
ca lled, named.
Ak hios, La h. d ia l. forno (us na i) ak hla or us nil ak hla , he sa id or he sa id tohim,
p.p.p. of ak hna, to say, (V. appendix on Lah. dia l.)— P.
A k hk h, s.f . the eye (U. H.— P.
A k hk har, a ns. a letter of the alphabet (another formis achhchhar), a written
character (8 . a k shara ). — P.
Ak hiui , 0 . tr. to say, to spea k , to te ll ; to call, name (=U.MI) . Intens. ak h
denli ; us nil Angad k ark e ak hde han, they ca ll himAngad.-P.
A k in, s.m. belief, certa inty, conviction (corr. fr. A . U. wig) mai nil a k in ha i , Iamsure .
— P.
A k k ila, e . :‘
ntr. to bevex ed, put out, annoyed .— P.
A la k a , s.m. (corr. fr. U. A . a ll and d h ) , anan ‘Ilaqa , a small district, portion of
a Tabail (uha s”lA lek b , a dj . m.f . and s.m. unwritten ; that which cannot be or is not written ;
wha t is not one’s fate .
— H.
Alsi , adj . "i f . la zy, inactive, feeble, weak — P.
Ami , intesj . Amen (A . U.
Andar, poslp . with do and ado. inside , within.— Per. U.
A ndar'
d, postp . with do and ado. fromwithin.— P.
A nek , adj . m.f . some , several, a good number (an 4» ek ). — H.
A ng, s.ns. limb,member ; body.— H.
Angad , s.m. name of Guru Angad, GuruNana k’s successor in the Guruship of
the Sik hs, the second of their twelve gun’ls.
A ng amk b k bé, a long tunic, long coat (ang.J‘rak hk hni , to protect
“f a 17.— H . P. U.
VOCABULARY.
a
Anheri , -i , adj . m.f . dark (U. H. andhera'
,-i) .— P.
Anheri , s.ns. dark ness, gloom(U. H . andhera) .- P.
Anberi , s.f. a storm, gale, strong wind (U.us
fiTL— P.
Anj li l'
l , a dj . m.f . unk nown, strange, unrecognised ; ignorant, stupid (H.
and anj li n) . — P.
Ann, e.m. food (8 . annam).— H.
Anna ,
Anni ,
Antar,adv. a nd postp . within, inside (8 . antara ) .— H.
Ap, pars. pron. m.f . oneself: honorifle , you (in this sense U. )— U. H. P.
Apui , -i , pron. one’
s own, suns. (U. H. apna,Mar. i pli ) .— P.
Ar, oonj . and (U. and H. aur, Pus'
htuaw). — P.
Ari dbr’
ui , 9 . tr. to adore , worship, supplica te : ari dhii k arna, to continually
worship— H.
A rdas, of . (con . ofU. Per. d bhb e) , entreaty, supplication, petition ; humble
representa tion.— P.
A re, intesj . addressed toma les, 0 ! hello, are tusf, youthere ! used contemptuously.
— U. P. H.
A rj , s.j . (corr. fr. A . U. x ) , request, petition ; representation : arj k iti (usna i) , he represented that.— P.
A rpr’
lai (H. arpnii), 0 . tr. to present as an ofiering, to sacrifice, dedicate ; intens.
arp deiui .
A rth, sen. object, meaning, ex pla nation ; purpose , reason, causeA rthli t (S . abl. sing. of artha , purpose) , tha t is to say, i .s., er
'
z.
A rthiri , -i,a dj . m.f . needy, in need of (di , de, etc. )— {H. arthiyi , -i .]- P.
A ru, oonj . (Lah. and old formof a r, and .
As, ff . (8 . hope , confidence, reliance .— H. P.
A si , obl. pl. 1stp ars. prom, us (v. Gram. )— P. (Another and shortened formis
0 . tr. to bring : pres. part. i ndli ,-i (Mar. i fiirii) .— P.
Ash (obl. a nd instr. of letpen . pron. La hr'
ndd dia l ) , us, by us.
595, s.m. a musicalmode , name of a song : li ssi di wi r, a . sub. wan — P.
A sadi , -i , m.f . p ass. pron. 1st pl. , our, ours (another formis slide, -i) .— P.
A sani , a dj . m.f . (asi n corr. fr. A .U. ”al l term.-r) , grateful, thank ful ;
benefited ; beneficent.
A si , p ron. 13! p l. we ; also instr. pl. by us.
Asis,s.f. prayer, benediction, salutation (froma superior especially), asis deal
”
,
to bless, sa lute (S.Missy— P.
Aeea‘
, am. (another formof585, a . saprah
rsmi ni seru m.
0
A ta k , s.f. obstacle, bar, hindrance, prevention, prohibition.— H. P.
A te, mv’. and (S. a tha , La t. et, This word now a lmost anieersa lly occurs
in the form te, but a te is sa id to be ex tensively used still fromthe Ri o? to
Peshawar.— P.
A tit, sen. a nd a dj . emf. past ; wanderer, devotee ; destitute .— H.
A ththopahir (U. H. aura pahr) , a dv. during all the eight watches, i .e . both day
and night, continually, incessantly.— P.
A thwli , eonj . , or (often in book language , rare in common speech in Panj .)— H. P.
Atmti , e .m. (S . li tman) , spirit (=U. A .- H. P.
Aur‘
ui , o. intr. to come : intens. i j inn: perf. part. act. often lluk ar (H.
also i ik ar. — P.
Aur, adj . m.f . other ; another ; eonj . and (not — U. H.
A ntari , e.m. one in whom a deity is incarna ted, an incarnation (autar less. to
descend, to be incarna ted) ,— (S. avatfira ) . — P. H.
Awri j , s.f . (corr. fr. Per. U. j lil) , a voice , sound, speech, words ; awi j k ami , tospea k , say.
Awana, o. intr. to come (Lahindli dial. =i ufii ) . — P.
Babs, s.m. old man, title of respect(T. Babs, father) .
Bi bar, e.m. (=babr, R; proper name of a famousMughul, a descendant of Ta imr
’
lr Shah, who overthrew the Lodi dynasty and founded the
Mughul Empire in India (a . sub. BahiramK ll i ).
Bfibat, postp . with d i , about, concerning— U.
Bachan, s.m. (H. wachan), word, saying, speech.
Bachaul'
la , 0 . tr. (cans. of bachna ), to deliver, save ,P. (U. My ).
Bad , pas/p . with de (corr. fr . A . U. M) . after.
Bods, -i , a dj . m.f . (Lahinda dish), big, grea t, large ; of age, old (of comp a ra tiveage only) the usual P. formis wadli , -i , forU. lib — P.
Badi , s.f . evil, wick edness.— Per.
Badli , s.m. recompense , ex change , retaliation : k isi wastu de badle (wichch) , in
place of something .— H. U. P.
Baghilir(another formis Bagihi r) , e.m. a wolf (U. they— P.
Bahar, postp . wi th do, and a do. outside, without — H. U.
Banana s, a . tr. (ca ns. of babies) , to cause to float ; cause to plough ; cause to
sit (in le tter sense highw ay— r.
VQCABULABY.
Babiila , v. .‘m. to flow, float U. to sit, sit down (for ba ithnfi — ia
this sense P. only) bahi jails, to sit down ; bahi rahir'
ni, to continue to sit,
rema in seated — P.
BahiramK hfi, s.m. (corr. fr. IbrahimK hi , Ute. name of the last sovereignof the Lodi dynasty, k ing of the country around Delhi and Agra , overthrown and slain at the battle of Panipat in 1526 Ad ) . by Babar.
Bahut, a dj . m.f . (in p l. bahute , m. and bahutid,f . are often used in P. much,many ; ado. much,very ; bahutsara U. law ) , a s. -i , f. a good many,much (often pronounced bohut) . — H. U. P.
Bahutera, -i , adj . m.f . much p l. many (U. H . ; proper P. is batherli , -i ,
Bahuti (a lso Wahuti ), s.f . a bride — P.
Ba isk li,s 1» (also Baisa k ) , sea t ; grazing ground (fr. baisna=baithnli , cf. Mar.
basne , to sit) .
Baithil li , a . intr. to sit down ; uh ba ithia hai, he has sat down, he sits ; ba ith
jails,intens.
=ba ithfl i .— H. U P.
Ba jar, e .m. a street, mark et place (corr. fr. U. Per.Jlj lg, )— P.
Bajaul’
la , v. tr. to cause to sound, to sound (an instrument) , play (a musica linstrument) , ring (a bell) , cans. of Bajna .
— P.
Ba k hasr'
l a , o. tr (eorr. fr. U. um ,Per. M in) to give, bestow, present ;
ba k has dena , mlens. : Parmesur da naw ba k nasna , to give God’s name ,
’a.e.
to bring to a k nowledge of God .
Bal, s.m. force , power, strength
— H . P.
Bali, i nf . misfortune , ca lamity, ill-luck ; Pl. in the La hindt
'
i dia l. , Bali i .
Balai , l U. Per. P.
Bela, s.m. name of Bhli i Bali , a servant of Kala who became a follower of GuruN i na k .
Bala k , eonj . nay rather, yea more , but U. Pers. A ; fr. which it is corr.,the
proper Panj . being sagwi or sagb'
,
I
Bala k , e .m. a little child ; dim. of Bill, 9. child — P.
Bdlgudli i , e.m. name of a Hinduascetic (j ogi ) with whomGuru N i na k is sa id tohave had an argument in Afghanistan ; he is said to have given his name toa hill there .
Balihar, e .m. a sacrifice, offering (a lmost U. P. A . la i ), (fr. H . Bali, offering) .
— H. P.
Bail , s.f . temper, manner, custom(S. varha ) .— H. P.
Baas, s or colour, form; habit, dress, costume (S.var-na , H. baui\.— Q
Bar'
ui una , 0 . tr. (cans. of henna), to build ,mak e ; i eigu to b e ,mak e ensu e“was.
to be (17. - P.
rANJZni sa d isma .
O
Banat. s.f . structure, work , creation, form; appearance , show, forgery ; combination, friendship, peace , intercourse .
— P.
Band, s.m. band, fastening, joint ; adj . m.f . shut, bound, fastened ; band k a rmi ,to
,shut fasten (Per. um ) .— Per. U. P.
Bandagi , s.f. service , worship ; salutation.— Per. U. P.
Bandben, a m. bond ; captivity ; obstacle ; rule , daily practice or observance.H . P.
Bli ndha i (U. H. not P. , which is bannhr'
lli , 0 . tr. to bind, fasten,
imprison.
Bangalil , s.m. Bengal.
Bani , s.f . speech, word , language ; a k ind of religiousverse ; worship (amongthe Sik hs), (H. bani , S.vi r'li) .- P.
Ba irnli , c. intr. to be made , to become , to be built — H . U. P.
Bannhr’
ni, 0. tr. to bind , fasten, tie, bind up U. an) ; k harch bunnhnu, to
fastenmoney for ex penses on a journey in a k not in one'
s garments.— P.
Ba iloi, s.m. (p rop erly H . , the true P. is bailwayyli ) , a sister’s husband, brother
ia -law.— H . P.
Banti , s.m. a share , portion, part, division. H. P.
Bar, s.f . (also war, turn, time, occasion ; song of praise ; dirge ; barren
and uninhabited country— H . U. P.
Bari g (H . ba irh‘
lg, also H . hiring) , s.m. asceticism, disregard of all sensua l
enjoyment, the not being a ffected by pleasure or pa in.— P.
Barns, e.m. a yearn— H. U. P.
Barns (corr. fr. U. A . an heir, inheritor.— P.
Barasili , a . intr. to rain (U. H. harasnii ) ; p .p . baththd and humid , 0 . G ames ,
I rreg. l'
erbs.— H. P. U.
Bara t, s.m. a custom, practice ; fasting ; barat ra k hk hr‘
la, to fast — H. P.
Bark hli , s.f . ra in, 9. shower.
— P
Barsaunil , 0 . tr. (cans. of Barasna ), to cause to ra in, to pour down ra in, lit. a nd
fig. (=U.- P.
Barti , s.m. one who fasts (v. barat) , a faster.— H. P.
BaSfifi, o. intr. to dwell, abide , remain.— H. P.
Bastr, sen. clothing .— H. P.
But, sf (U. ; the proper P. is gall, a word (as to its meaning, A li-yes,opposed to tail, a word as to itsformand pronuncia tion, pupa ) .— U.
Ba ta la , s.m. (alsoWatli lli in Panj . , g.c. U. slug) , Bata la , name of a town about
2 4 miles by ra il north-east of Amfim .
B‘fb i lfl i
(or bathélni , a . Gram. t6 , 1 , Observa tion on Infinitive m t ,
su sh i Gu nman.
0
Bhar, adj .m.,i . (follows its noun) , full, whole ; on] . din bhar, all day ; umar bhar,all one
’
s life - 11 . U. P.
Bhari , -i ,w:m.f. full ; bhari honi , ho jans, to be full, to be fulfilled .— H. U. P.
Bhi ra (more usually Bhi r) , s.m. a load , burden ; chuk i k armk fi bhi ri (Olda . sub Karim— H.
Bharak , s.f . splendour, brightness.— H . P.
Bharam, s.m. wandering, confusion whirling error, doubt, confusion (8 .
Bhrama ) .— H. P.
Bharamni , o. intr. to wander, go astray.— H. P.
Bharni ,v. tr. to fill ; to draw (water), to pour into (avessel) until it is full.H . U. P.
Pharola, s.ns. a k ind of bin for holding grain, somewhat in the formof a hay
stack , butmade of earth.— P.
Bhasam, s.f . (S. bhasman, ashes ; bhasamk arui (k isswast nu) , to calcine ,
reduce to ashes ; bhasamhoni , to be reduced to ashes ; to be in a rage ;
bhasma i, old Panj . (Braj ) oblique form; bhasma i dheri , a small heap of
ashes.— H. U. P.
Bhaththi (also Bhatti , in H. bhatthi), s.f . a forge , still, k iln, furnace .— H. P.
Bhau (S . bhiva , H. bhfiv, bhau), s.m. ex istence , nature , temper, disposition ;design ; heart, mind ; afiection, sentiment, love ; respect, reverence ; substance ; the world ; superhumanpower ; profit, price .
— H P.
Bhi nni, o. intr. to please, be pleasing to (k ise nu) , be acceptable to (M be
agreeable.— P.
Bhawaiai, 3rd sing. aor. (old E . and Poet. for howe) , fr. V bhi'
r.
Dhaw'
e(also Dhaw‘
e), (strictly 2nd singnor. of bhi uni )my“
. although ; bhawe
bhi w‘
é, whether or (cf. H. chahe chi he ; Per. tl,‘ at» , Latin
vel vel) .— P.
Bhay (H. for bhua ), 3rd sing. aor of Vbhu, =howe .— OldH.
Bhed, s.f . (U. H.Ms bher), a shoop.— P.
Bhejna, 0 . tr. to send, forward — H. U. P.
Bhek h, e.m. ga rb, attire, guise , disguise , appearance (8 .vesa ,vasha ). Bhsk ls isBhes, P. , as a lso Bhes,— the la tter a lso E .
Bhet, s.f . an offering, sacrifice.— P.
Bhi , oonj . also, as well (proper P. is bi ) .— H. U.
Bhiri , -i , a dj . m.f . narrow, straitened.— H. P.
Bbog, s. es. enj oyment, pleasure ; profit, use ; food : k iss wast di bhog k arni , to
Bhogn‘
i, s
'. tr. to enj oy.
— H. P.
VOCABULARY.
0
Bhojan, sm. food.— H.
Bhramna ,v. intr. to wander (P.— H.
Bhuk hk h, s.f . hunger, starvation (U. H. bhuk h) .— P.
Bhuk hk ha, J, a dj . m.f. hungry (U. H. bhuk hi , -i) . — P.
Bhut, a m. (pr0p. p.p. of S . Vbhu, bhuta , having been a ghost, evil spirit,demon.
— H. U. P.
Bhutna, s.m. ghost, evil spirit.— P. H.
Bi, eonj . (=U. H. bhi ), also, too (often pronouncedvi) . — P.
Biak aran,s.m. (H. wiak aran) , gramma r, ex position (there are nisss recognised
system of grammar) .— P.
Bich, postp . with to (U. H. not Panj . , which is wichch, in the middle of,
in the midst of ; s.ns. the middle .
Bichdi'
6, postp . with do (Lah. dial. for wichd
'
6) , from the midst of,by way of,
through, bymeans of.— P.
Biddia, s.f . k nowledge , science , art(H. bidya , S .vidya).— P.
Bidh, s.f . manner, k ind method, contrirancs.— P.
Bigari , s.f .m. a man forced to work (for Government, etc.) aga inst his will
Bigarna, c. intr. to be corrupted , to be spoilt, to be entirely changed ; bigsr
jdr’
u‘
r, intens.
Bigarna, o. tr. to compel to labour (for Government, etc.) ex actly the Greek
dn apedew (v. bigari ) .— P.
Bigarna , 0 . tr. to spoil, corrupt, alter (tr. of bigarua). — P.
Bih, num. adj . twenty (U. H . bis, 8 .vins’ati) . — P.
Bihauns (H. bihana) , o. intr. a nd tr. to elapse , to pass (of time) .— P.
Bihla, -i , adj . m.f . at leisure, not busy, outof work (alsowibli , -i ; in pronuncia
tionvela) .— P.
Bijas, 0. tr. to sow (seed) , to plant.— P.
Bik al, s.m. afternoon, twilight, dusk ; evening (8 . H. wik al) .— P.
Bik h, s.m. (=H. wish) , poison.— P.
Bik ini , 0 . intr. to be for sa le , to be sold : (k iss pur), to be dependent on(some one) .
H. P.
Bilas, s.m. (often used in delight, enjoyment ; bili s k arna (k iss wast da ordc) , to enjoy(something) ; bilas chalda ha i , pleasure results from(da) .— H. P.
Bilawal, s.f . name of a musicalmods a morning song (also called Bhairavi).H . P.
p al /p .vitti or without do, without (sins) —'
B . Y
mmxni ou trun .
Bindi , s.f . the name of the dot above letters (A ) in the Panj alphabet.— P.
Biphta , s.f. (also biptii and bipat) , ca lamity, misfortune .— H. P.
Birla, -i, adj . ns.f . scarce , rare , few ; separate (also writtenwirla , -i ) .— H . P.
Birth ,-1 , adj .m.j 2 and ado. useless, worthless ; invain, needlessly, worthlessly
(Bi vi +arth) . — H . P.
Bisarni , a . intr. (also wisarna, to be forgotten.— H P.
Bisi rna, 0 . tr. (tr. of preceding), to forget — H . P.
Bit (also bitt) , s. as. size , stature power, wealth.- P.
Bites, 0 . intr. to elapse, pass by (of time) .— H. P.
Biuhar, s.f . business of a merchant, trade ; ordinary life and business (H .
byohi r) . — P.
Bolt, s.f . conversa tion, language , speech, talk — H. U. P.
Bolna,v. intr. to spea k , talk , converse — H. U. P.
Brahmachari , e.m. a Brahmanstudent(residingwith his teacher,notyetmarried) ;a particular k ind of ascetic.
— H.P.
Budhdhman, adj . m.f . wise (H . buddhimfin) . — P.
'
Bujhna, o. intr. to go out, be ex tinguished (fire ) , be quenched (thirst) , be sa tisfied
(hunger) ; bujh jabs, intens.— H. P. U.
Bulanna, 0 . tr. to ca ll (caus. of bolas) bulii bhejr‘
xa, to send for,send to
call (U. H . bulana) .— P.
Burt} , -i , adj. m.f . evil, bad, ill, wick ed .— H . U. P.
Bars Badhawa , e .m. name of a Jat; who became one of Guru'
ana k’s disciples.
Buriai , s.f . (U. H. burai) wick edness, evil — P.
Buri ar, s.ns. an evil doer, a wick edmam— P.
Beta , e.m. shrub, flower, little plant shrub orflowerwork ed on cloth, etc.— H. P.
Chachi , e.m. uncle (father'
s brother) , (U. Gé) .— P.
Chahe (stri ctly3rd sing. nor. of chahna) , (if) one will, i .s. whether, although ;
chahe chahs, whether or.— U. H. P.
Chabis (U. is le fr. chahna) , it is fit, right, necessary, prOpsr ; one must.Chahni , 0. tr. to lik e, wish, desire , love .
— H. U. P.
Chahii,
Chahfl,
Cba k ln‘
, of . a mill, a bandmill ; cha k k i pihauna, to cause (one) to grind at a mill.
nuns. adj . all four, the whole four w a y— P.
0551; ":f : going , conduct, way (i .s. in religion) .— E U Y
VOCABULABY.
0
Chalachali , s.f . continued motion, preparation for a journey ; adj . f . tremnlous,moving continually.
— P.
Chains,v. intr. to go, go away, walk ; chalia jitni , to go away.
— H. U. P.
Chalochali , s.f . and adj . f .=chalacha li , a .o.
— P. H.
Chama k nii ,v. intr. to shine, gleam, glitter.— H. U. P.
Chanan,s.m. light.
— P.
Chanda], s.m chandala, s.f . a person of a low caste (sa id to be descended froma
Brahman: mother and S udra fa ther) an outcast,vile wretch.— P.
Changa, -i , a dj . am] . good (=U. H. Q t). (InU. changi means well in health) ;changa jsans. to approve of. -H. U. P.
Changiai , s .f . goodness, k indness, good deed, ex cellence , k indness merit.— P.
Chsnna,-i , a dj . m.f . bright, enlightened
— P.
Char,nuns. a dj . four.
— H . U. P.
Chars, num. adj . all four, the whole four — P.
Charan, e .m. a foot. (Used in Panj . only in order to show deep respect inste ad of
pa ir, the usual word. )— H.
Charauna,v. tr. to cause (beasts) to feed, to pasture (cans. of chariia) .— P.
Char-hire,v. intr. to go up, ascend ; char
-h jans, intens.— H. U. P.
Cha rni, s.f . the foot (diminutive of charan, H. charar
'
r) , charni lai lawo,‘touch
(us) with your feet’
(as a sign that we are subject to you and are your
disciples) .— P.
Chaunp, s.f. incentive , desire , wish.— H. P.
Chaura, -i , adj . ns.f . wide , broad — H. U. P.
Chela, s.m. cheli , s.f . a disciple , servant, pupil — H. P.
Chhadna , 0 . tr. to leave , abandon, desert ; release , forgive (sins) . =U. laugh — P.
Ohhaia , s.f . shadow,shade ; chhaia k arni , to shadow (=H. S. obbaya) . — H . P.
Chhapna ,v. intr. to be hidden, be concealed , hide oneself ; chhap rahir'
ia, id .
(U. he} , better ail ) — P.
Chhipr'
rb'
t,v. intr.
=chhapna , q .v.Chhodna, o. tr. chhadna), to leave , desert (U. H. chhornt
‘
t) .
Chhota , -i , a dj . m.f . small,little ; young (of compa ra tive age) . — ll .U. P.
Chhudauiia , 0 . tr (caus. of chhadna) , to deliver, save, rescue (U. intens.
chhuda dena .— P.
Chhfiti . s.f . release,discharge, dismissa l (Old H . for H. U. P. chhutti) .— H.
Chhutna,v. intr. to escape ; chhut jails, intens.— H. U. P.
Chij , s.f. (corr. of Per. U. chiz) , a thing — P.
Chikna, -‘
i (also chik na, -i), adj. m.f. fat, greasy cfi k h’
a h mk mg m é‘ SmV
PANJABI GRAH AR.
s
Chinti , s.f . thought, anx iety, care ; k iss di chinti k arni , to be anx ious about
(some one) .— H. P.
Chintawan, adj . mf . thoughtful, anx ious, troubled — H. P.
Chir, e.m. a long time, delay ; chir to, long since .— H. P.
Chitamni , 0 . tr. (aor. in Jalandhar dia l. chitwi for chitmid), to remember,consider, determine .
— P.
Chitbthi , s.f . a note, a letter.— H. U. P.
Choirs, e.m. name of a particular clan (got) of the Khatri (Kshatriya) caste .
H. P.
Chor, e .m. a thief. — H. U. P.
Chori , s.f . theft ; chori k arni , to steal.— H. U. P.
Chugatta ,s.m. (for T. name of theMn hul tribe to which Babar and his
ancestor Taimnr belonged.
Chugli , sf (fr. Per. U. complaint, back biting, slander ; chugl‘
i k ha i‘
n, to
slander.
Chuk kna ,v. intr. to cease , desist, finish (often used as in U. in composition with
anotherverb, as uh galld k ar chuk k ia , he finished spea k ing) (U. H . t — P.
Chnkna , a . intr. old and Poet. for ehuk k sid or LC;Churam‘
ia, 0 . tr. to steal (fr. chor ; U. H. churana) .— P.
D i, m. di , f. (obl. m. de, pl.m. nom. de, obl. did ; p . did), paarp . of U. H .
k s, k i ) . — I t agrees in the ma nner of a n adj . with the governing noun, j ust
as led in H . U. (4 25) inMa r. a nd -no in Guj . do.— P.
Dabbus, 0 . tr. to reptem, press down ; to bury ; intens. dabb dens (H. dabna) .. . P,
Dak h, sf . grape (S. drak sha) .— H. P.
Dam, s.m. breath,moment, instant. — Per. U. P.
Dan,e .m. a gift, tribute .
— H . P.
Dand, e .m. a tooth (U. sl a y— P.
Dand, e .m. (H. also send) , a staff, pole, stick ; armabove the elbow ; punish
ment ; a particular gymnastic ex ercise H. P.
Dand, s.f . a noise , an outcry ; dand pa im, an outcry to be made, to arise (a
shout) .— P.
p enda nt, sj . (H. dandawat, 8 . prostration ; salutation (by prostra tion, to a
deity or holyman) dandaut k ami , to salute — H . P.
D a ng , ing/ I astonished, stupefied.
— H. P.
YOCABULABY.
o
Dar, s.m. (properly Per. ; the Panj . is babe, door ; sachcha dar, the
true door,’i . e. the door (or court) of God.
— Per.
Dar, e .m. fear, dread .— H . U. P.
Darga h,
Dargah,
Dsrk hat, s.f .m. a tree (corr. fr. Per. U. dara k ht 55 1303(properPanj . is perorruk h) .
Darsan,s.on. (H. dars
'
an, Vdris) , sight,view (of God , bea tificvision,’ also of a
sa int or grea t personage , Per. U.
,bu ) .— P.
Darwajj a , s.m. (corr. fr. Per. U. door, ga te (properly in P. used onlyof e g .
a city ga te, buha being the door of a house) .— P.
Dassr‘
ia , 0 . tr. to relate, narrate , tell ; show (H. disna) .— P.
Daulat, s.f . wea lth, money.— A . Per. U.
Daula t K hd, name of one of the Lodi family (a . sub BahiramRhd) .Daurnfi,v. intr. to rum— H. U. P.
Daya , s.f . mercy, pity, gentleness — H . P.
Dayaman, a dj . m.f . merciful, tender, full of pity.— H. P.
Deh, s.f . the body (whether living or dead ; the dead body is generally loth,
Dehi , (S. deha , s.m. H. deh is m. aboutBanri ras, but elsewhere f . )— H.P.
D ehra, e .m. an idol temple (deva griham, a sepulchral monument (of a
guru, a guru’s shrins.
— H. P.
Dek hiu’
t , 0 . tr. to see , to look at.— H. U. P.
Dena, 0 . tr. to give (irreg. see Gram.) 2nd sing. impera t. dih, pl. dio de jam ,
to k now how to give .— H . U. P.
Der, s.f . a short period , delay ; der k arni , to delay— Psr. U. P.
Dora , s.m. tent, camp, temporary dwelling dera k arna, to encamp, halt.°
-H . P.
Des, s.m. (8 . (less , H . des) , country, land.— H. P.
Devata , e .m. (H . U. a lso deota), a deity, demigod — H . P.
Dhahina, a . intr. to fall down, go to ruin (a . irreg . , see Gram.) p . p a rt.
dhaththa) . (In Eastern Panjabi diggna ismore usual) .- P.
Dha k k a , e.m. pushing , shoving ; a push ; dha k k a li unii (=H. dha k k i lagani ,
also=dha k k na , to apply force , to push.— H. P.
Dhan, e .m. wealth, treasure — H. P.
Dhanu, adj . m.f . (for S . and H . dhanya , from dhan), wea lthy ; wea l-bringing ;
fortunate , luck y, happy.
Dharauna , 9 . tr. (cans. of to cause to place , ca use to set down.— P.
Dharm, e .m. religious practice , rite , outward obsemmus ;righteousness (S. dharmma) .— H. P .
s.f. a court (of a sovereign or of God) .— Per. U.
rmsx si Ga sm an.
0
Dharma, adj . and s.m. for dharmi (in poetry) .— P.
Bharmi, adj . m.f . and s.m. pious, religious a piousmam— H. P.
DharmmUrat, e.m. (lit.‘image of a title which Brahmansmay use
in addressing a Raj-1 or a Vais'
ya .- H. P.
Dharti , s.f . the earth.— H. P.
Dheri , s.f2 (dim. of dher) , a little pile or heap — H. P.
Dhi , s.f . (S. duhita) , a daughte r. — P.
Dhiraj , e .m.f. (m. in ste adiness, coolness ; endurance , patience ; courage ,
self-possession (fromS . dhirya ).— H. P.
Dhor’
u‘
r, 0. tr. to wash, cleanse .- H. U. P.
Dhoti , s.f. a small strip of cloth fastened round the wa ist and passing between
the legs, tuck ed in behind.— H. U. P.
D iban, s.f . (U. m., eorr. fr. A . U. P. wigs) , court, tribunal ; suchchi diba
'
n, God'
s
tribunal.— P.
Diggna, o. inlr. to fall (=U. H. gima) ; digg pa ins, to fall down and lie there
(=U. H . ninth— P.
D ik hai , s.f . appearance : dik hai debt , 0 . intr. to appear, show oneself.
H. U. P.
D ik halna (Jalandhar dik halna) , o. tr. (ca us. of dek hna) , to show.— P.
D ik hauna , 0. tr. (caus. of dek hna) (=dik bala a andU. H . dik hana and dik hlané) ,to show. P.
D ik hiyri , appearance : dik hiya dens, to appea r, a . intr.— P.
Di], e .m. heart (in all senses of the word, literal and metaphysical) the interior
(so stomach, -Per. U. P.
Din, e.m. a day (meaning both a natural day, as apposed to night, and also the
period of 24 hours) .— H. U. P.
Din, e .m. religion, faith (especially the outward as contrasted with iman mu d.)— Per. A . U.
Dinda , -i , pres. pa rt. of debt , to give,’ giving (a .— P.
D io, 2nd p l. impera t. of debt , give ye (o.— P.
D itta, -i , p astp a rt. p a ss. of dens (=S . da tta ) , given.— P.
Diwa, e .m. a lamp(especia lly avery small clay lamp lik e a little saucer with a
spout quite open at the top, with a wick lying in it and projecting at the
spout ; mustard oil is usually bumed in it) .— P.
Diwak hi , s.f . a lamp-stand.— P.
D o, nuns. a dj . inf . two 061. can dob! and don§ .-H. U. P.
Pucci ni 0m m.
0
Gal, s.m. the neck , throat (U. elf) ; k iss de gal da hi r hotai , to cling to one, to
importune, tease ; persist in quarrelling with any one ; overpower any one
with k indness galmala, s.f . neck lace , garland for the neck .— P.
Galh, s.f . the cheek‘
(U.JUL— P.
Gall, s.f. word (=both a t and tail in thing.—P.
Ga lmala , a . sub Gal.
Garanj , adj . m.f . displeased, angry (H. garajni , to growl, roar, thunder) .— P.
Gardhab, e.m. (H. gardabh) , an ass (=U. b sS) .— P.
Garib, adj . m.f . (A .W ealso Per. poor, humble, tame, meek , lowly. — P.
Garm, a dj . m.f . warm, hot — Per. U. P.
Garmi , s.f . warmth, heat.— Psr. U. P.
Gat, s.f . (S. ga ti) , course , conduct ; end ; destiny, fate ; state, condition ;
transmigra tion, absorption into the deity (=muk ti in this sense) .— H. P.
G i una, 0 . tr. (H . U. gla d ), to sing.— P.
Gawi dhi , e.m. a neighbour.— P.
Gawan (Bra j for gaman) , e .m. going, approach gait ; tirath gawan, act of
going to a holy bathing-
place .
Ghabriiunfi, e . intr. to be disturbed in mind, astonished, dismyed (U. H . gha
bri na) .— P.
Ghallna, 0 . tr. to send (=U. leg gy— P.
Ghar, s.m. (S. griham, n.) house, dwelling — H. U. P.
Ghar da, one of one’s house or family, a relative .
— P.
Gharabh, e .m. womb, foetus, conception, pregnancy : gharabh wichchms,to be
conceived — H . P.
Gharri r’
ni , s.m. a household, family (U. H. ghari nii) .— P.
Gharbar, e .m. family, household, house and all that dwell in it.— P.
Ghari , s.f . a period of 24 minutes ; a watch, clock : gharik u, about 24 minutes
(12. Gram. 2, note, p.
Gharwar, e .m. a notherformof gharbar, gnu— P.
(l) Ghat, e.m. murder, slaughter ghat k arna (k iss nfl), 0 . tr. tomurder.— P.
(2) Ghat, s.f . lying inwait, ambush : ghi t li ufii , to set snares, to lie in ambush.
— H . P.
Ghattna, 0. tr. to throw, cast, put, drop into.— P.
Gborsi , e .m. a howo.— H . U. P.
G isi,a t. g a s
“
, f .
’
p . p a rt. q dsid, togo (o. Irv. Vsrbs} .— P.
0m“? ca t counting, number (also gifiat) .— H .U.v.
VOCABULARY.
Girast, girist, e.m. position and privileges of a householder or married man (8 .
grihasta ) .— P.
Giristi, e .m. a householder, secular person (as distinct froma faqir) . - P.
Gora k hnath, e.m. name of a celebrated Hinduascetic with whomGuruNauak is
sa id to have had a controversy. Gora k hni th founded the sect of K annpatas
(gm) .
Gost, s.f . conversation, talk , interview (8 . goshti , H .Mar. gosht) .— P.
Got, e .m. a clan or division of a caste — H . P.
Granth, s.m. a book ; especia lly the sacred book of the Sik hs, the A—
di Granth ;
the Sik hs in spea k ing of it a lways append the title Sahib .— H. P.
Granthi , e .m. a scribe (N . a granthi or Sik h minister, whose duty it is to
read (and when possible to ex plain) the Granth.— P.
Gui ana, 0 . tr. to waste , squander.— P.
Gubind, e.m. (H. Govind) , a name of K rishna : Gubind lok , a Hindu ascetic
sect.I “ ,
Gujar, s.f . livelihood , means of living (Per. root of the verb Un a!) (corr. for
guzar) . P.
b
Gujarna , o. intr. to pass by, to elapse (U. tipsy— P.
Gun(8 . guira ) , e .m. quality, virtue ; sk ill ; cause , method ; merit.— H . P.
Guni , s.m. a nd adj . a sa int,virtuousman ; virtuous.— H. P.
Gupt, adj . m.f. (orig. p astp a rt. 8 . gupta ) , hidden.— H. P
Gur, e m. (a . sub. gun'
r) .— P.
Gun a r,s.f . guru-ship, office of a gun?
— P.
Gurmuk h,s.m. a disciple of a gun
'
s, a piousman, one who learns fromthemouth
of a guru; Gurmuk hi , belonging to the mouth of the Guru— the Punjabia lphabet is so ca lled because (wrongly) supposed to have been invented byGuruNana k .
— P.
Gurparsad, e .m. a title of the deity (in the Granth it is gurprasadi =gurprasadya ,
Gurprasad, i .s. k ind Teacher,’
beneficent Gurir,’
fr. gur prasad, k indness,
etc. )— P.
Gur, s.m. a religious te acher, spiritual guide. (This word in the Granth is
Guru, often a title of the Deity as the one only true Guide , but often the
human guru, e.g . Ni uak,is supposed to be identica l with Him, hence the
termis applied to the human teacher.) Guruk arna , to act the gunk — H. P.
Gurumat, s.f . method or conduct or religion of a guru(guru ma ti) .- H. P.
Gussa, a dj . m. and e .m. angry ; anger, wrath (A . U. gussii these, to be
angry, feel anger.— P.
rw si ni GRAMMAR.
k
Ht, adv. yea , yes.— U. H. P.
115, 1st sing. a nd 1st p l. pres. ind ie . of Hons, to be’
(=U. up , up ) , I am, we
are ; e . Gram.
Habuk a , e .m. a sigh ; hahuk a la ir’
ra, to sigh.— P.
Hairan, adj . m.f . astonished, thunderstruck , perplex ed (oorr.fr. A . U.
U. Per. P.
Hairanagi , s.f . confusion, wonder, astonishment, bewilderment (for Per. U.
Hajar, num. adj . m.f. a nd s.m. one thousand (eorr. fr. Per. l , U.All
ah— P.
Hal, e.m. (A . U. Per. JG ) , sta te , condition ; na rra tive.
I
Hanjir, s.f . a fig (oorr. fr. U.- P.
Hank ar. e.m. pride , egotism(inH. hank armeans — H. P.
Har, a dj . m.f . every, each harek , every one .— Per. U. P.
Har, e.m. a mounta in-torrent — P.
Har, e.m. a garland (for neck or head) .— H. U. P.
Harb , e .m.=har, q .o.
— P.
Hari, s.m. a name of the god Vishri ii [generally used by the Sik hs (of . Ram) asan appellation of the Deity]. — H . P.
Hassr’
ra, e . intr. to laugh (=U. H. hasna) .— P.
B arns, mintr. to return, come back ; get out of the way.— H. P.
Hathth, e.m. (U. H. hath), the hand ; a cubit ; hathth runs, to come to hand ,be found.
— P.
Hayat K ha, s.m. name of aMusalmanwhose daughter was GuruNanak ’a second
He, interj . 0 (used with subs. invoc.)=U. Per. in H . e, and so now pro
nounced in the Panj ah) . — P.
Heth, postp . with or wi thout do, under.- P.
Heth’
d, postp . a nd ads . fromunder ; undernea th.
— P.
Hi , a dv. pa rt. (a dds empha sis) , even, just ; (withpres. p a rt. ofverbs, e .g . dek hde
hi ,‘immediately on seeing
— H . U. P.
Hik k , num. adj . (vulg. a nd p rovincia lfor ik k , one .— P.
Hin, p ostp . (with or without te) , devoid of, without (also used as an amx =less,as balhin, without strength) .
— H. P.
H indu,e .m. a Hindu. (In India this word has only one sense, and that a
re ligious one ; it doesnotmean an inhabitantofHindustan; but a believerin — H . P.
PAIUABI GRAHMAB.
0
Ima , -i,adj . m.f . so much, as much ; p l. as many : itne wichch, meanwhile (U,
H. itne — H. U. P.
I ii, ado. thus, in this way (=U. H . yd, another and betterformis ai
‘
ti,
9v— P
I iik ar, a dv. in, thus. — P
Iw‘
é, a dv. (another formof in, thus.— P.
Ja, adv. when (correl. of th, cf. H. jo used in this sense) . —P.
Jab, a dv. when (properly H. U. , not P. , which is jad) jab ts, since the timethat.
J’
ad , adv. when (correl. to tad) , H. P. J’
ad lag , until the time when, as long as
(followed by nit if the mea ning is"unti l —
.U J or a“? b ury— P.
Jag (a lsomP. jagg) , s.m. the world , the present world — H. P.
Jaga (a lso jaga) , sf a place, spot (Old Per. slfib and ,(lla in Sha hnama
U s!»
Jagat, e .m. j ag, the world— H. P.
(I ) Jagg, e .m. jag, q .v. the world — P.
(2) Jagg, s.m. (S. yajna , H. jagya , also j ag) , oblation, sacrifice — P.
Jagr'
ra,v. intr. to awak e jag nthna, to awa k e and get up.— H. P.
Jagwedi , s.f . (S. yajna+wedi , a ltar) , a sacrificial a ltar.— P.
Jai, conj unct. p a rt. of jana (also ja, jak ar, jaik ar, jaik s) , having goue .— H. P.
Jaiai, 3rd sing . a or. (Old H. for jaws) of jana.
Jaie, 1stp l. op ta t. of jana (for ho jaie) , let us become .— P.
Ja in, em. a Jain,one of a Hindusect so called. (The Jsins are by some thought
to be a remnant of Buddhism, by others to be due to an older movement of
the same k ind — H. P.
Jm m, s.m. name of the brother-ia -law of Guru Nanak ; his wife was Nansk i
GurirNanak’s sister.
Ja isa ,-i , pron. a dj . inf . (properlyH. U. , not genuine P. , which is ajrha or j iha ,such, as, lik e (sorrel. waisa or ta isa).
Jal, e .m. water ; cold ; jal tap k arna, to performpenance (auste rities) by wa ter.
— H. P.
Jalna (also jalna) , 0 .tr. to k indle, burn (=U. sai ) . — P.
Jama t, sf . (corr. fromA . U. b eg ) , an assembly, crowd, multitude .— P.
W3), the earth , laud, ground— P.
Jam' s”.
”Gay— E P .
Jan, s.f. life, soul (not spirit) ; janb' mama, to k ill. - Per. U. P.
Jana, e . intr. to go ; a . aux . with post pa rt pa ss. qf othsr esrbs to become, to
be, as in U. and H. ; e.g . uh maria gia, he was struck ; a lsoforms intensi
tives, e.g . uh jan apna ann k ha gift, tha t man ate up his food ; pa st tense
gia, en. ga i , f . (see Grammar) .— H. U. P.
Janam, e.m. (S . janma , H. janmand janum) , birth — H. U. P.
Janamsak hi , s.f . (j anam+ sak hi , an account of the birth,’
biography ;
name of severa l book s in Panjabi which give legendary accounts of the life
of Gura Nana k .
Jammna,v. intr. to be born.— H. P.
I aneti , e .m. a friend of the bridegroom, one of the many tha t tak e part in the
bridal procession (called janst) . — P.
Jangal, sm. (orig. forest, wilderness ; uninhabited tract of country ; jangalbar jangal. -Per. U. H. P.
Jung-til, s.m. rust (corr. fr. Per. Jfij also j lft'
) and cfi j )verdigris.— P.
Jangli, adj . m. f . of the wilderness, wild, uncultiva ted savage .— Per. U. P.
Janida, -i, gerundive of jeans, to k now (0 . k nown, thought, esteemed,
believed — P.
Janna ,v.tr. (dialectic for janna) , to k now.— P. Old H.
Janna , v. tr. to k now, esteem, consider, fancy, think ; ak in j anna, to believe(=ir-ilq w all — H. U. P.
Jant, jantu, ..in. living thing, creature , insect. worm.— H . P.
Jap, e .m. muttering prayers, te lling one'
s heads ; a muttered prayer or spell.- P.
Jipe , 3rd sing . a or. of jupua for japna : used in the phrases k i jape ? and
jape nahl', ‘ere one can repea t it,
’i .s. instantly ; also a Parmesur jane,
God k nows,’
i .e. I cannot te ll how,
’in some way or other.
’— P.
Japji , e .m. name of a poem in the Adi Granth, written by GuruNanak as an
introduction to the whole ; so called fromthe fact that, after the intro
ductory ascription of pra ise to the Deity, comes the word jap, i .s. Repeat
(to jap is added ji as a termof respect) .— P.
Japna, v. tr. to mutter (prayers) to repeat (mentally) the name of the Deityover and over aga in.
— H. P.
Jun,s.f . adultery ; jari k arni , to commit adultery (fr. j ar, of. Per.
) b) .— H. P .
Ji t, s.f . caste .— H. P. (inU. the A . a l.; is used) .
Jata, s.f . long, unk empt, tangled ha ir (worn by ascetics) .— H. P.
Jatar, e.m. cultivated land H. jutar) . — H. P.
Jatt, e.m. name of a (Hindu andMuhammadafl can“at fi rms“, un is u\
Pu ni si sau na s .
0
Jehi , -i (v. phi , -i ) .— P.
Jets, J, pron. my. asmuch H. U. j 1tna , J) p l. asmany : a lso, as long as,
as large as.— P.
J'
hagra, s.m. quarrel, dispute , contest — H. U. P.
Jhandi , s.m. flag, banner.— B . U. P.
Jhari unfi, 0 . tr. (for char-henna , cou nt. of charhni ) , to cause to go up, cause to
ascend — P.
Ihokni , 0. tr. to throw, to supply (fuel to a furnace) .— H. U. P.
Jhol, s.m. f. brood, litter ; gravy, broth ; goldwash.— H. P.
Jhuth, s.m.
~ a lie , a falsehood — H. U. P.
Jhfithi , -i , adjnn. f . fa lse , lying, deceitful : s.m. lien— H. U. P
I i , s.m. life, heart, soul ; as a termof respect, Sir (ji h! or ji a lone, Yes,— H. U. P.
Jia , c.m. living thing, animate creature ; animalcule .— P.
Jii , s.m. life, soul — H. P.
Jidhar, ado. whither ; m ommly where (U. and H. not P ) .
J1ha , -i , pron. adj . m.f . (other forms are jeha , -i , aj iba , J, ajehii , -i , q .s . such as
(U. H. raj a j iha manuk hk h, :=ua d-
l.
sla sh,‘a k ing
-lik e man ;pak h
'
ira j iha ha l, ‘11 sta te lik e that ofmendicants.
— P.
J11a , s.m. (corr. fr. A . U. division of a province, district. — P.
Jind, s.f . (mm of Per. U. l1fe — P.
J1ththe a dv. where (=H. U. ul-r’ ) — P.
J1tts Randhawa , or simp ly J1tts , name of a Jatt who became one of Guru
Nfina k’s converts.
Ji‘
1'
1 , a dv. as, when, lik e, j ifi ti‘
u, as— ao (U. “H y— P.
Jinn, sm. life (H. j iwan) .— P.
Jiuna ,v. intr. to live , be alive (8 . j 1n1‘
1) .— P.
J‘
1'
w, s.m. life , soul (8 . j iwan) living thing ; man’
s sentient individual spirit asdistinct fromthe Jiwatmi or the A nima Ma ndi — P.
Jo, pron. rel. m.f. who, which, that (its corral. is so) , (a . conj . that
(=sf when( na ry— H. U. P.
Jogi , s.m’
. a Hinduasceticwho practises austerities with a view to union (yoga ,
jog) with the Deity — H. U. P.
Jor, s.m. strength, violence (oorr. fr. Per. M) . [The sentence Mere pa k hirpur j or tel k uchh nahl
'
, etc 1s thus rendered , I have no power overa thqz
‘
r, but I shall be doing no harm in bringing himwith his own
Pu ni si au t ism.
Ka k k ar, e.m. snow, ice , frost — P.
K al, s.m. time ; fate, death.— H . P.
K al, ado. (Braj forJ), toomorrow.
Kala, -i , adj . mf . black (U. H. k ala, -i ) .— P.
Kalat, s.f . (perhapsmisprint for k ara t or k irt, use, service,merit — P.
K alb, ado. to-morrow, yesterday (H . U. J?) ditto.
Kali k al (k ali, a d ie, + k al, time) , s.m. the fourth and last age of mank ind,the present age (supposed to be the last andworst. Hindas say that it began
8 102 and is to la st years ; at the end of it thevisible universeis to be destroyed . )— H. P.
Kall, ado. to-morrow, yesterday (=k alh and k allh) .— P.
K allh,a dv. — P.
K alliaa (also Kalian) . s.f. welfare, prosperity, happiness (H . Ralyaa , — P.
Kala, e.m. name of Gun‘
1 Nanak’s father.
K am, adj . m.f . scanty, too little,very little — Per. U.
Kama, s.m. a labourer in the fields, of low caste — P.
Kamai , s.f . ea rning ; gain, profit ; work : k amai k arni , to work , to earn.— H. P.
K amauaa , 0 . tr. to earn, ga in, get ; work , perform, commit (U. H. k amana) .— P.
K amandal, e.m. a wa ter-pot (earthen orwooden) , especially thatused by ascetics.
Dand k amandal, the staff and water-pot of a hermit (supposed to be his all) .H. P.
Kemdila, -i , a dj. ns. f . timid, cowardly (k am+dil).— P.
Kamla , -i , a dj . m. f . mad, foolish, insane .— P.
Kamm, e.m. (S. k arma , Vk ri : H. U. work , deed : k ammda hoaa , to beuseful : k ammauna, to come into use, be useful ; k ammk ar, business.
— P.
Kamma,s.m. a labourer (c k ama, — P.
K an, s.m. a little bit of anything, atom, gra in.— H. P.
Kand, e.m. section, part ; joint (of a reed) chapter of a book .— H. P.
Kandhar, e.m. the town k nown in English as Kandahar, in A fghanistan.
Kandhi , s.f . (S. k andhi, a cloud — H. P.
Kandiala, e.m. a prick ly bush, thorn bush.— P.
K enn, s.m. the ea r (U. H. k an) .— P.
K annia, s.f . (for S . H. k anya) , a ma iden, unmarried girl.— P.
K annpata, s. 111. a member of the sect of ascetics (jogis) founded by Gorak hnath ;they are so called fromhaving their ears slit to admit a glass ring (mandra,often in Panjabi ca lled mundar), the name means slit-cared ; in Hindi
their name is k anphara or k anpatta .— P.
K ‘PGB t om. hypocrisy, guile, pretence, deceit.— H . P .
Kapat, s.m. forehead, sk ull, fate, destiny (H. also a door) k isi da (or de) k apatk hulna, to have a favourable change of fortune — H. P.
K apati , s.m. a deceiver, hypocrite — H. P.
K appa (also k appara) , sm. clothing, clothes, a garment.— H. U. P.
K ar, s.m. work , business.— Per. U.
Karaha , s.m. a shallow boiler for boiling sugar, etc., a cauldron.— H. P.
Karahi , s.f. a sma ll boiler ; 11 frying-pan.— H. P.
Karaia , s.m. (strictly past p a rt. pass. of k aranai , q .o. , used substantively), thatwhich one is caused to do.
— P.
Katsk h i , o. intr. to roar, thunder, burst into a raga— H. P.
Karamat, s.f. (plur. used a s sing. , ef . U. u lSlI
, etc. ) (pl. of A . U. u fi), awonderwork , miracle .
— P.
K aren, s.m. cause , reason : postp . with de , on account of, by reason of, because
of (H. k aran).— P.
K arauna , 0 . tr. (ca ns . of k arna ), to cause to do, cause to commit (H. U. aft— .P.
K arbatt, s.m. (H . K arwat) , self-sacrifice in order to obtainmuk ti a k ind of saw.
— P.
Ka tj , s.m. a debt (corr. fromA . U.éy— P.
Karj i , s.m. (also k arjai ) (fromk arj , a debtor.— P.
Karm, e.m. (Sk . k arma ) , deed,virtuous action,merit ; the sumtotal of one’
s good
and bad deeds .— H . P.
Karna, 0 . tr. to do, mak e — the conj unct. pa rt. is used very idiomatica lly in Pe .g. (l ) bahut bolan k a rk e ,
‘on account of, because of, much spea k ing
’
(2 ) joMata Choii i k a rk e masahar ha i, who is celebrated by the appellation
Mata Choni (3) us nil Bala k ark e ak hde han, they call himBala past
tense k i ta, etc . (a . Gram. irreg. verbs) in the Jalandhar dialect k ara
k aro, 2nd p l. aor. (v. Gram., p. 1 1 , note) : k ar chuk kna, to finish doing.
H . P. U.
K arodh, s.m. (also k rodh, as in H ., S. k rodha ), anger, wrath : k isi pur k arodh
k arna , to be angry with any one .
K a rtar, s.m. (S. k artrs'
, Vk r1) Ma k er, Creator (applied only to God) . — H . P.
Kartarpur, s.m. name of a town in the Punjab, now ca lled Dehra Nanak .
K arwat, sm. self-sacrifice to obta inmuk ti (also P. k arbatt) .— H. P.
Kasba, e .m. a sma ll town (corr. fr. a U. Z i a— P.
K astani , s.f . (S . k asht) , difficulty, trouble pain, distress ; poverty k astani
dek hni , to see e. ex perience) trouble — P .
K asai ; s.m. (earr. fr. A . U.fl ), fault, guilt.— P .
K aththa, -i , adj. assembled , collected ; k aththa k arna , 9 . tr. to collect, assemble
(a . U.
Katr, s.f . =(l) k attar, s.f . a narrow slip (of cloth, k atra , s.m.
parings, clippings ; (3) A . U.;-E, 213, a drop (ofwater, — P.
K attak , e.m. the 7th Hindiimonth, Sept.— Oct.— H. P.
K attna, 0. tr. (H. Katna) , to spin.— P.
K attiia, o. intr. to be cut, diminished, spent (as life) , to be cut short, to cease,
and ; be obliterated, forgiven, k att‘
ida, i , gerundive (11. Gram. underghallna) .— H. P.
Kaii , s. 11e. a crow (H . U. {XL— P.
Kanda, e.m. name of a Rak shasa or giantwith whomNanak had an adventure ,which is related in our 2nd ex tract fromthe JanamSa k hi .
Kaum, s.f . (corr. fr. A . U.é) , a people, na tion.
Kaun, 1'
nterr. pron. (e . who ? (U. H . Kaun,Mar. k oi1) .— P.
Kauri , s.f . a emery-shell (used asmoney, 60 to a pics or paisa) .— H . U. P.
Koda, -i , a dj . of what size or amount ? k edi dar, how far? =H. U.
Kedi k u, n1 . k edik u (see about what size, etc. (another formisk eta , i ) .— P.
Kera , -i , postp . (Old H. and poet. K) , of.
Khabba, -i , adj . naf . left (of the hand) . — H. P.
Khabar, s.f. (eorr. fr. A . U. news, tidings, information, warning — P .
K habardar, acb'
. 111 .f. (eorr.fr. Per. U. figs ), careful, on one’sguard ; k habardarboaa, to bewa re — P.
K habarsar, s.f. (see k habar) , news, tidings — P.
Khada, -i, pa st tense and pastpa rt.pa ss. of k hai1a, to ea t(Lahinda dial.=k hadha,c. Gram. I rreg . Verbs), ea ten.
- P.
K hsdhs, -i , pa st tense a nd pastpa rt. p ass. of these, eaten — P.
Khak , s.f . (eorr. fr. Per. U. JR) , earth, dust ; anything worthless or scanty ;
k hak il k hak , a formused in the Granth (of . such forms of bich'
6 b ich, in H .
and dust of dust,very dust.Khalas, s.m. deliverance , release (eorr. fr. A . U. us lit ) ; adj . m.f . relea sed , freed ,
delivered ; completed, finished ; k halas hona, to be free , released ; to be
finished , done ; k halas k arna , to free — P
Kha1'1a, c.tr. to eat (H . U. k ha lama , o.tr. intens. to ta k e and eat ; k ha
j obs, to go and eat ; sugand k hani , to swear an oath ; da k hk h k hana , to
sa f er pa in . (Jasp er. k hah, etc. , pa st pa rt. pass. k hadha, 11. Gram. Irreg .
1 1111 1 1 111 9 111111 1 1 11 11 .
0
Khurma, e.m. name of a town nearKabul in Afghanistan, nearwhichMardana,GuruNana k
’a first disciple , died.
Khus,adj . 111. f . (1101 r. fr. Per. U. pleased, satisfied, happy.
— P.
Khusi , s.f . (eorr. fr. Per. U. fi gs ) , pleasure , happiness ; tusadi k husi , whateveryou wish, as you please ; in Panj . a lso adj . 1nf . happy, pleased
— P.
K i, conj . tha t ; for, since — H. Per. U. P.
K i, interr. pron. what ? (8 . k im, U. H. k ya). — P.
K ia. inter. pron. (=U. H. k ya, for P. k i ), wha t — a lso used in ask ing a question.
Kich, s.m. mud ; dirt k ichar) .— H . (Panj . is chik ar) .
Kichai (obl. sing . of Old Panj . k ichu, now. for k ich, used in the A di Granth
thisformis used without a postp . ) k ich da or k ich wichch.
Kicheh, pron. anything, something ; na-k ichh, nothing (Lah. dia l. for k uchh) ._ p ,
K idhara, ado. whence ? fromwhere (U. H. k idhar, whither?+P. 6 , from) .
Kiha, -i , adj . m. f . of what sort ? to what degree ? (=U. H. k a isa) .— P.
Kiha, pa st tense andp astpa rt. pa ss. of k ahina, to say, to tell(11 . lrreg. Verbs) . P
K ik k ur, adv. how, inwhatmanner.— P.
Kime , K im‘
é'
, and K iml , in some way, somehow.— P.
Kina , -i , pastpa rt. pass. and past tense (Braj ) of k arna, to do, ma k e : beri bandk ini , (he) fastened the fetter.
’
K inha, obl. p l. of p ron. k oi (v. Gram.) — P.
Kira, e.m. a worm, any creeping thing— H. U. P.
Kirpa, sf . (8 . k ripa) , k indness, mercy, favour, compassion : k ise de utte k irpa
k ami, to show favour ormercy towards one . H. P.
Kirt, s.f . (S. k rcta, done, Vk ri H. k rit) , work ; result, consequence merit=k arm) — P.
K irtarth, e .m. (H. K ritarth) , accomplishment of one’spurpose , discharge of duty
success : a dj . 111 .f . successful.— P.
K is, obl. sing . of k aui1 , who ? a . Gram— H. U. P.
Kise , obl. sing . of k oi (H. U. k isi ) .— P.
Kisi , obl. sing. of k oi , 11 . Gram. (H. U. k isi di (gall) sunni, to listen to,attend to one .
K it, Western P. formof k is,Kita , -i , p ast pa rt. pass. and past tense of k arna (c. Irr. Verbe) . - P.
Kitab, s.f . a book (Panj . pothi or granth) .— A . Per. U.
K ite, ad o. somewhere H. U.— P.
K itmi, -i , a aj; . 1n. f howmuch ? howmany?— H .U.
K 1 01 4 4 ? Why ? for wha t reason (U.
Kinnk i, conj . since , because (H. k yonk i, U.— P.
K iunk ar, ado. how (H. k yonk ar, U.M) . — P.
Xc, postp . 1na rh1ng obj . d 1 1 eet or ind irect =P. nil.— U. H.
K oh, s.m. H. U. a hoe, ordistance of fromone and a half to two English
miles.— P.
K oi , pron. and a cy'
. 111 . f . anyone , some one ; any, some ; k oi nahl'
,no one , no,
none. (See Gram.)— H. P. U.
K ol, postp . w1th do, with, near ; bymeans of.— P.
K om, s.f . (corr. fr. A .U.
ff ) » people, nation a nother P. formis k aum,
Kothri , s.f . a small room, store room— H . U. P.
K rodh, s.m. anger. (See the more common P. formk arodh) .
Kripa, s.f. mercy, pity (S . k ripa usua l P. k irpa,— H .
Kuchh, pron. a nd indef . a dj . of qua ntity ,m.f . some , any ; something, anythingk uchh nahl , nothing, none .
— H. U. P.
K uchhchhar, s.m. f . the hip, haunch ; k uchhchhar(pur) la ina, to seat(a child)K uchhchhur, on one
’s hip,
’=to ta k e it into one’s arms, to name it : k uchhchhar
hona k uchhchharpurhofia, to be on the hip,’i .e . to be a baby in arms.
- P.
K ujh, pron. etc. (Lahinda for k uchh, something, etc.— P.
K ul, s.f . family ; k ul-parchat, e .m. family priest (11 . sub. parchat) . — H . P.
K nlchhetra,e .m. name of a town a little north of Agra .
K fima l, a dj . 1n. f . ; soft, mild, gentle (H. K oma l) .— P.
Kuna, s.m. corner (H. N .— P.
Kuran, s.m. (eorr. fr. A . U. the Quran, the sacred book of the Mnbammadans.
K urahi , e .m. a heretic (K n, H. 8 .
‘bad’
rah, way) ; k urahi suima, to be
ca lled a heretic (cf. the use of audire in La tin) — P.
Kurmai , s.f . betrothal (f 1 . k uram, marriage relationship) . — P.
Kurta , s.m. a shirtworn outside the trousers, a jack et, wa istcoa t(Per. U. 1 1; — P.
K utamb,K utumb,Kutta , e.m. a dog.
— H. U. P.
K utwar, a do. (H. P. K ot, 11 crore ,verymany, ware -bar,time
,turn),very many
times,very often.— P.
e.m. household, family, rela tives, progeny.— H. P.
Labh. e.m. ga in, advantage , profit.— H.
Labhbh, s. 111 . ga in, etc. H. labh) — P.
s bbhni, 0. tr. togain, acquire, 11 . intr.tobe gained ,tocomsta hmbvr
PANJABI OM AR.
0
Lagauna, 0 . tr. (ca ns. of laggna), to apply, cause to touch (more usual form
Lagna (O. H.=lagg1’
1a P. ,— H.
Laggna, 11. tr. to touch, affect, concern, begin : intr. to be attached to,belong
Lahaur, e.m. the city of Lahore, capital of the Panjab also name of the districtin which it is situated.
Lahina, s.1n. name of a subdivision of the K hatri (Kshatriya ) caste .
Lahina, 0 . tr. to ta k e , receive (payment of a debt) , (another formof la ina)
(H. U.— P.
Lei , postp . with or without (10, on account of, for the sak e of, because of
(H. U. liye) . — P.
Lei (past pa rt. p a ss. a nd p a st tense of laii1a , f . of lia) , tak en, took (a . Irreg.
Verbs) . — P.
Laik , adj . m.f . (eorr. fr. A . U. a”: properPanj . jogfr. yogya ) , worthy ; uh k isi
wastu de laik ha i, he is worthy of a certain thing.
La ina, 11. tr. (=U. H. lena) , to ta k e , receive , grasp : p a st tense, etc. lia, lai , 1n.f .
aor. lawa, etc. (verb irreg . a . lai la ina, intens. (=le lena, H. U.)lai auna
, to bring (intr. a s H. U. 1174 ) la i jana,to tak e away, carry off
(intr. a s H . U. Big— P.
Lajafia, (eorr. fr. la i jana fr. laina, to tak e away, carry off ; (considered
intr. as in H. U. , beca use the jana is intr. a lthough the laina is tra ns hence
the agent in the p a st tenses is notput in the agentia l, but in the nom. )— P.
Lak hmi Das, e .m. (for H. La k shmi Das) , name of OurirNana k’s second son.
— P.
Li la, e.m. a Hinda title of respect Mr. or Esq .— H. U. P.
Lalo, name of a carpenterwho was a friend of Gun’
r Nana k and at whose
house the latter for some time resided .
Lalii , e.m. name ofKala’s brother ; he was therefore Gura Nana k
’
s paternal
uncle.
Latarna, 9 . tr. (from lat, a k ick ) , to trample on, tread under foot ; despise .
— H. U. P.
Lanna, 0. tr. (ca ns. of laggha and=H . U. to apply, cause to touch.— P.
Laws, 3rd sing . car. of laix‘
ia, g.v. — P.
Lehu, 2nd sing . impera i . a nd 3rd sing . aor. (Old H . ,Western P. and Bra j for H .
lewe , P. lawe ) of laina,L ek blrba
’
, s. fn. account, bill (=A . U. g aw k — H. P.
L ianne (con/f a d ed f or lai 511111 , 0. sub 151111 1, used as intrans.verb for reason
w 11 1 1 1 1 , 11 11 111 ) 11 1 11 13(a n. U. s.m.— r .
Pu ni si sauna s .
Q
Maia, s.f . S. H. maya), illusion. (The Hindi1s say that the wholevisibleworld is an illusion, as is also the idea of personality.)— P.
Ma il, 1 .f. dirt, filth, pollution ; sadness, displeasure— H. U. P.
Majad, a dj . m. f . (corr. of A . U. ex istent, present.— P.
Ha k k a, e.m. the city ofMecca whereMuhammad was born.
Mala k , e.m. (corr. fr. A . U. 1.5L), owner, master.— P.
1 . 11 . to rub, polish, ano’
int ; tread on.— H . U. P.
Ma lechh, (S . mlechha ), any one not of Hindubirth, a foreigner, barbarian,outcast.— H. P.
Malo, e .m. name of aMusalman carpenter, who became a disciple of Gurii Nanak .
Mamata, s.f . egotism, pride ; covetousness, arrogance ; selfishness : individuality,belief in one
’
s individual ex istence — S . H. P.
Man, s.m. the mind, hea rt (in all senses) .— H . P.
Manasa, sf mind, desire , inclina tion, purpose .— 8 . H.
Mahda li , ef (H . mandali ) , circle , disc ; congregation. assembly.— P.
Mangha , 0 . tr. to ask , beg (H. U. latte ), dua mangni , to pray (U.
hAh. lie ) .k isi te (to any one ).
Manjh, e.m. name of a casts ofRajpiits an individual of that caste — H. P.
Manjhara , s.f . perh. f. of manjar, a cat ; S. marjar,Mar. manjar), a female cat.
Manjhot, s.f . name of a daughter ofHayat K ha, who was given in marriage toGuruNana k , his first wife, Choni , being still alive . For the sa k e of honour
she is calledMataManjhot. (The Sik hs entirely deny the story ofNana k’s
ta k ing her, as narrated in our Second E x tract.)Manj i , s.f. (dimin. of H . P. manja) , a little bed, pa llet, couch ; a ra ised chair ;
a k ind of throne .— P.
Manj ar, adj . m.f. acceptable , accepted (corr. fr. A . U. j is. ) manjirr k arna,0 . tr. to accept, approve of, agree to.
— P.
Manna , 0 . tr. to respect, obey honour, ack nowledge (a command, duty,H . U.
Manna , 0 . tr. (P. farm of above) , to respect, honour, revere , k eep (a command) .— P.
Manorath, wish, desired object, aim(8 .fr. manas, mind, +ra tha , chariot) .— H . P.
Manta, s.m. the heart, will ; desire — H .
Mannk hk h, e.m. (S. manushya, H . manna) , man, mank ind ; a human being
Mi pb, 01 . j : (eorr. fr. A . U. forgiven ; mi ph k arni , 0 . tr. to for
g ive — P.
VOCABULARY.
0
liar, s.f . a beating, blow, strok e ; mar k hani , to be beaten.- H U. P.
Mara , -i,adj . m. f . (corr . fr. mata , fr.verbmama , gu n), lean, wea k , worthless,
low, bad — P.
Maren, e .m. dying, death janammaran k attna, birth and death to cease,’i e.
to be absorbed into the Deity.— H . P.
Mardana,s.m. name of a Mirasi , a servant of Kala ; he became one of Gura
Nana k’smost devoted followers.
Mardana rag, e .m. name of a certa in tune (rag) .
Marefpostp . with de , on account of, because of, by reason of.— H . U. P.
Marg, e.m. road ; method ; search ; sect, religion.— H . P.
Margi , a sectarian ; one following any particular religion.— H . P.
Marhi , s.f . monument of a Hindu, shrine of a deceased Hinda ; jo°’s hut, small
temple near a grave — H . P.
Marj i , .f . p . U. will, good pleasure ; jo marj i , jo marjihowe , as youwill, whatever you please — P.
Mama , 0 . intr . to die ; mar jana, intens. : p . part. and pa st tense moia , 1n. moi,
f . (11 . Gram. Irreg. Verbs) . — H. U. P.
Mama, to strik e , hit, beat ; embezzle ; marmama, to give a beating ; marsittna , to slay, k ill (=U. H . mar dalna) .— H. U. P.
More , sm. name of a certa in tune or song (rag) . — P.
Masahar, adj . (corr. fr. A . U.Li ) , well k nown, renowned, celebrated — P.
Masit, sf . (corr. fr. A . U. na i a mosque ; used in the N .T. for a synagogue— P.
Mat, ..f (s. mati) , belief, Peligion ; sect — H. P.
Mata, s.f . mother ; mata pita father, and mother, parents =U. Ga ls“.
Mata is given as a title of respect to Nana k’s wives,Mata Choii i andMata
Manjhot.— H . P.
Mata , -i , adj . m.f. drunk , intox icated ; maia mad k a mata, intox icated with theliquor of illusion
,
’engrossed in worldly cares.
— H . P.
Matt, s .f . (S . mati) , advice , instruction, wisdom; the mind, purpose ; opinion,belief.— P.
Maya, s .f . (S. and H. ofMaia, — H.
Me , oneformof the obl. sing. of ma'
i, used only with to, instea d of ma i, asme te ,
fromme .
’— P.
Mela, s.m. a meeting ; a fa ir, gathering.— H. P. U.
Melgel, s.m. interview, meeting, conversation.— P.
Mep, e .m. a measure , avessel formeasuring — P.
Mara, -i , pose. p ron. m.f . my.— H. U. P.
PANJA BI GBAHHAB.
o
Ml’h, sum (U. H. rain — P.
Miharwan,a dj . m. f . k ind, beneficent ; k ind one (For. and U.
— P.
Mihnat, sf (coir . fr. A . U. a
l
e -sf ), toil, ex ertion, effort ; mihnat k arni , to toil,strive
,labour.
Milap, sm. (as inH. , but inU. it is an interview, meeting ; ha rmony, concord , agreement ; an a lliance — H . U. P.
Milna,v. intr. tomeet,mix with (nil) , associate with ; to come to one, be ga ined ,
be obta ined : mil jana, intone milia rabina (k ise mi l), to cling to one,
associa te with one continually.— H . U. P.
Minna, 0 . tr. tomeasure, mete out. — P.
Hinnat, sf. (in Per. itmeans k indness), favour, entreaty minna t k arni , to en
trea t — Per. U.
Mirasi (otherformsmirasi and marasi fr. A . U. cog” , inheritance) , a caste of
low origin (a dam, q .v. , but a more resp ectful tee-oi), of which some members
are Hindi1s and someMuhammadans ; a memberof thatcaste . (A tweddings
the familymirasi recites the genealogy of the family.)— P.
Mitt , e.m. a friend — H. P.
Modik hana, e.m. (H . modi , merchant, gra in-seller, Per. 61a , house), store
house , steward’
s room [a sort of gra in magazine belonging to a prince or
great man, who would give his favourites or the poor orders upon the
steward for so much gra in] modik hana k arna, to do a steward’s work , to
act as steward , ta k e charge of a modik hana. — P
Molwi , e .m. (corr. fr. A . U. aMuhammadan teacher.— P.
Morna, 0 . tr. (w a s. of muma), to turn away, avert ; esp . withmilh, to turn awaythe face .
— H . P.
Moti , e.m. a pearl.— H . U. P.
Mudda i , s.m. (corr. fr. A . U.
gas .) cla imant, plaintifi, opponentma lawsuit.
Milh, s.m. face , countenance, mouth (H. U.— P.
Mujab, e. .m cause, reason (aorr. fr. A . Per. U. 5 postp . (with or without
do) , according to, because of. — P.
Mujaur, sm. (corr. fr. A . Per. U. fl ip ), a guardian of a mosque orMuhammadansa int
’
s grave or shrine , who receives the oflerings of devotees.— P.
Muk at, e .m. crown, crest, pea k , point, tuft.— H . P.
Muk h, s.on. face , countenance , mouth.— H. P.
Muk ht, a dv. (corr. fr. U. gratis, for nothing, freely, without payment. P.
Mnk t, a ] : (fr. H . S . muk ti) , deliverance from consciousness of personality,
a bsorption in the deity, salvation ; adj . m.f. QB. mum past part. paw ) ,sna red, delivered ; mnk t k a rna, 0 . if . to save (mth eH . sa ssy — E X .
mmi si GRAMMAR.
s
Nal (or postp . (with or without do), and ads. with, along with, together
with.— P.
Nam, e.m. (the usua l P. formis naii , a name (often in the Granth used as
Parmesur da riam, the name of God ,’
and hence=the Deity) — H. U. P.
Nama, J, a dj . m.f (Ja la ndhar D ia l. for nawa) , new.- P.
Name , ads . by name.-H . P.
Namitt, e.m. etc. nimitt, P.
Namitt, s.f . (fr. H. namati) , bowing, obeissa nee.— P.
Nana k , s.m. Gari'i Nana k , the founder of the Sik h religion, born 1 4 69 A .D . ,died
1 639’
ana k ana , s.m. avillage (also calledTalwandi ) not far fromLahore ; Guril Nana kwas born here.
Nanuk i , s.f . Nanak i , sister of GuruNanak .
Nang, e .m. na k edness, shame ; nang bhuk hk h (H. nang-bha k h) , na k edness and
hunger, poverty — H. P.
Nanga, -i . adj . m. f . na k ed — H. U. P.
Nanga,-i , a dj . m. f . (d ia l. for nanga, -i , — P.
Nara k , e.m. Hell (the place of torment ; the lower world or Hades generally is
called Patal, H ., or Pa tal, P. Hindi1s say that there are twenty
-four
divisions of Na ra k ) — H/ P.
Nas, s.m. (H. destruction us da nas howega, he shall perish.— P.
Nas1hat s.f . (oorr. fr. A .V: advice, counsel, direction(given by a sup erior
to an inferior, 1n this differing fromCb ) .
Nat, s.m. a dancer, rope-tumbler
,actor ; name of a gipsy caste ; name of a mode
inmusic.— H. P.
Natbiddia, sf . (H. natwidya) , art of a gipsy, jugglery.— P.
Natsala, sf . (H. nat+i ala) , a dance-house , place for acting — P.
Nataa, sm. (H. natwa) , an actor, rope-dancer.
— P.
Nau, nuns. a dj . m. f . nine ; nawa (naua) , obl.— H. U. P.
Naii , e.m. a name (H. U. nam) . — P.
Naua, obl. of nan, nine — P.
Nauk ar, s.m. a servant, attendant — Per. U. H.
Naw,e .m. a name (a . namand naii) .— P.
Nawa, -i , a dj . m.f . new (=H. U. naya ; Mar. nawa) .— P.
Nawa , e .m. (Braj ) , a name (=nam, gm) .A
'
ek r'
, goodness (fr. U. Per. good) .— Per. U. P.
N ero, p a st. a nd a ds. near, close to (to) . — H. P.
A 39”; mm. (8 . netra) , the eye .— H. P.
vocssuu nr. 1 18
Niai, e.m. justice , right (H. a yay) .- P.
N iai ,
N1a i ,
Niai , postp . with di , lik e , resembling, similar to .— P.
Nlamat, ..f . (corr. of A . U. g a lls) , favour, gift. — P.
N iau,I
Niai'
i,
N ich, a dj.m. f. low, base , mean, worthless.— H. P.
N1hal, a dj .m. f. prosperous, fortunate, happy : nihal k arna ,v. tr. to mak e happy.
— H. P.
Nihoba, e .m. belief ; inquiry ; resolve : nihcha k arna, to ascerta in, to believe(H. nihcha, niecha, niiichai , fr. Sk . nis+vchi) . — H. P.
Nihk arma, -i , a dj .m. f. devoid of k arma ormerit (0 . sub k arm) .— P.
Nihphal, a dj nn. f . fruitless, devoid of fruit ; profitless, useless — P.
Nik alna , v(r. , to drive out, cast out (caus. of nik k alna) . — H. U. P.
Nik k a lna ,v. intr. to come out, go out (U. H. nik alua) on comp . nik k al auna, to
come out ; nik k a l jaiia , to go out. P.
Nimitt, e .m. ma rk , sign, omen, cause, fortune, share ; postp . with do, for the sa k e
of, for the purpose oi .— H . P.
Nimoli , sf . name of a k ind of plant, a k ind of creeper orvine bearing a yellow
berry.— P.
Nindia,s.f . (H. ninda), blame, reproach, abuse (k isi di nindia k ami , to abuse
any oue) . — P.
Ningar, e .m. a l1ttle child (cf .Mar. 1‘
ék arfl) . — P.
N ira, a dv. only, merely, simply.— P.
Nirank ar, a cti on. f . devoid of form, incorporeal (fr. Sk . nirak ara fr. nir+ ak ar,
form) e .m. (esp. common in Granth), the Formless One, God — H. P.
N irank ari, a dj .m. f . rela ted to Nirank ar or the Formless One , divine .
— P.
N iras, a djmi . f . (Sk . nir without h0pe , despa iring— H. P.
Nirshat , acti on. f . (other forms H . and P. are nirahar and nirihar, fr. Sk . nir
ahar), devoid of food , fasting, hungry.— H. P.
N irmal, « dim. f . free fromdirt or defilement, pure , clean ; clear, transparent,
limpid .- H . P.
Nitt, a djm . f . a nd a do. continual always(Sk . nitya , H . nit). — P.
K ii'
i,s.f . foundation, foundation-stone (U.
— P.
so, postp . U H. k o) , to(also indicates thedirectobject oftransitiveverbs) .— P.
Nuk hsan, e .m. (oorr. fr. A'
. U. ”Gin, defeat,mum ;m x wvmama-mk arna
, 0. tr. to injure , to domischief tc.— P .
ia dj .m. f . just, righteous : e.m. a judge .— P.
.m. justice , right, equity ; judgment.— P
PANJ'
ABI GRAMMAR.
Q
-o, demonst. term. U. H.-i (o. Gram. ) e.g. iho, P. H . yahi = U. “(s — P.
Oddarna, e . intr. to feel depressed , moumful, to grieve (esp. for loss of a relativeor at leaving one
’s native land) , to sufier fromhome-sick ness (heimweh) .— P.
Oh, pron. , p l. nom. of uh, m.f . they, those (0 .— P.
Opra, -i, a dj m. f . strange , foreign ; e .m. f . a foreigner, stranger.— P.
Or, e .m. f . the end, termination.- P.
grit
f , 0b the end ; ora k nil, oruk nil, at last, fina lly.— P.
Pachhar‘ma, 0 . tr. (more usually pachhaunna, to recognise .
— P.
Pachham’ma, 0 . tr. (H . U. to recognise ; p astpa rt. irreg. (v. — P.
Padarth, e .m. (Sk . pads artha ) , meaning ; thing, substance ; good ; rarity.
— H. P.
Padsah, e .m. (U.£36; Per. sting) , a k ing, emperor ; in Panj . applied (1) tothe Emperors of Delhi ; (2) to Gura Nanak and his successors (though often
Padsahi is used in this sense instead of Padsah) and (3) as a title of respect
applied to religiousmendicants, etc.— P.
Padsahi , s.f. (oorr. fr. Per. sovereignty, empire , imperial power (used
of each Sik h guril=padsah, q .o. ; e.g . Gurh A ngad ji daj i padsahi ea ,
Gura A ngad was the second Sik h teacher— P.
Pae , Urdii for pawe , 3rd sing . aor. of pam’
i a (U. W),Peg, sm. the foot (Old
Paghi'
i, obl. p l. (for paga) of pag, the foot. — Old H.
Pah, postp . (with do) , to, towards pas,— P.
Pahar, e .m. a mountain.— H. U. P.
Pahila , -i, num. adj . m. f . htat — H. U. P.
Pahila, a dv. in the first place H. U.
Pahile pahil, a dv. first of all.— H. U. P.
Pahiiina,v. intr. to put on (clothes) . — H. U. P.
Pa hir, e .m. a watch (of the day or night, vigilia ) ; the day of 24 hours is divided
into e ight wa tches, hence athth‘
apahir, q .o. day and night ; duhipahir
the second wa tch, a bout noon (Rial— H. P .
mml si GRAMMAR.
o
Panipat, e.m. name of a town a little NW. ofMirath (Meerut), where IbrahimLodi was defeated and sla in by Babar.
Panj . nuns. adj . m. f . five (U. H. panch) .— P.
Panja, e.m. (Per. U. i ii) , grasp, Openhand : panja launa , to applythe hand— P.
Panja Sahib, s.m. honorific name of a place where they say tha t Nana k (when
travelling in Afghanistan from the Panjab on the way to Kandahar) leftthe impressionof his open hand on a mounta in(others say a huge rock ) which
an enemy had rolled down, hoping to crush him, but which Nana k stopped
with his openhand -P.
Panja, obl. pt. q auj , gn u— P.
Pank herfi, e.m. a bird (0. puk harn) . -P.
Panth, e .m. (H. path), road, way ; religion, sect.
Pap, e .m. sin, wick edness.- H. P.
Papi , s.m. and adj . m. a sinner, sinful.— H. P.
Par, postp . (H. U. not P. which is pur, on, upon.
Par, eonj . but, however, yet. — H. U. P.
Par, ads. and postp . with do, on the other side of (a river, ete.) par k arna, to
cross ; a lso par parna (rare) , to cross (over the ocean of ex istence) , be
absorbed in the deity.— H . U. P.
Paraia, -i , a dj. m.f. (H. paraya,-i ), belonging to another, alien ; strange,
Paramarth, e.m. the summumbonum, the highestgood,most sublime truth, spiritualk nowledge,virtue .
— H. P.
Parbat, s.m. a mounta in.— H. P.
Parda k hna, sf . (Sk . prada k shinm. pradak shina the ceremonyof going round
any object reverentially, k eeping the right side always turned towards it,— a
method of showing reverence (of . the Muhammadan customof a ll.) k isi
nil parda k hna deni or k isi di'
pardak hna k arni , to salute anyone (in themanner
described above .— P.
Pardes, e .m. (S. parades'
a , H. also a foreign land, any land outside the
boundaries of India (hence Gk . and Ar.— H. P.
Pardesi , e.m. and adj . a stranger, foreigner ; strange, foreignt— H. P.
Pare, postp . (with to) , beyond, farther.— H. P.
Pargas, e.m. and adj . m. f . light, brightness, lustre ; clear, evident, bright, (H.
P8 13“, 4 411 1 m. 1 : (fr. H. pragat) , evident,visible — P.
Pam“;fi f e/ 71nd old P . for perhe , 8rd sing. ear. ofparhni , qs .
VOCABULARY.
0
Parhr’
ia , 0 . tr. to read, recite : ik k par-hmhoia manuk hk h (P. part. pa ss. used
intrans. a s in ssh) , . .Ql, a man who can read, a well-educated
mam— H. U. P.
Par-k ar,e.m. sort, manner, k ind — H. P.
Parmesur, s.m. (Sk . pa rames'
wara , fr. parama+idwar : H. parameswar) , God,the supreme God (continually used by Sik hs, Christians and even Hindi1sforthe true God .)— P.
Parna,v. tr. (of . pharna) , to tear, rend : pardons,parmarna , to tear, brea k through
(a wall) ; pa; sittna =bll5j ig intens. of parna ; pa; k hans, to tearwith the
teeth and ea t, to devour.— P.
Parcha t, e .m. (corr. fr. Sk . purohita ) , a familyBrahmahorpriest, onewhoperformsall birth
,marriage , funera l, and other religious rites for the family.— P.
Parsad, s .m. (Sk . prasada ) , purity, cleanliness ; tranquillity, graciousness ; boon ;prop1tia tory offering, food offered to a god or gura , remnants of food left bysuch.
— H . P.
Parsinn, a dj . m.f . (Sk . H . prasanua ) , plea sed, glad. happy.
Partap, s.m. heat, brilliancy ; ma jesty ; courage (H. pra tap) . — P.
Partawa, s.m. ex amination, trial, temptation.— P. H.
Partit, s.f . (Sk . pra titi) , fa ith, belief : pa rtit k arni, to believe — P.
Parwah, s.f . (Per. U. lz) , care, anx iety : k uchh parwah nahl , itdoesnotma tter.
’
— P.
Parwanagi , s.f . (fr. Per. U. permission, permit — P.
Pas, postp . (with or wi thout de) , (1 ) near, close to (of rest in a p la ce, in reference
to both persons a nd things) ; (2 ) up to, to, to the presence of(only with persons ;denoting motion to) . — H . U. P.
Pass, a do. and postp . (fr . pasa , a side , direction) , bye ; e.g . k isi de bachan pass
jana, to pass bye , transgress, set atnought any one’
s command. ’
Pass, postp . (see pas) , fromwith, fromnear fromthe presence of (Mar. pasnn) .
— P.
Pasn, e .m. an animal, beast (Sk . padu) . — H. P.
Path, e .m. recita l,reading a loud (of sacred book s especially) , lesson : path parhiia ,
path k a rna, to recite (cap. a passage fromthe Vedas, to read aloud,
revise a lesson.— H . P.
Pathan, s.m. a Pathah, A fghan.
Puththa r, e .m. (H. U. patthar) , a stone — P.
Patijna, o. intr. to believe in (par) .— P.
Patsah, s.m. a k ing, emperor(anotherformofPM , N— Y
PANJABI GRAMMAR.
O
Patwari , e.m. avillage ofi cial,village registrar (his duty is to k eep the accounts
connected with the land of thevillage) .— H . U. P.
Paula , -i , adj . en. f . white, gray.— P.
(l) Pauii a, 0 . tr. to find, gain, obta in ; devise (U. H. pana) .— P.
(2) Pauna, 0 . tr. (caus. of paina, to fall, to cause to fall and lie , put, place ,
deposit ; cast ; past pa rt. p ass. paia, o. Gram. Irreg. Verbs (this form is
quite regular, but is inserted among the irreg. verbs to correct a common
mista k e) . — P.
Paune , mun. adj. quarter less than ; e.g. paunia panja barsa da , four and three
quarter a quarter less than five years of age (U. H. paune) .— P.
Pauri , s.f . stanza . couplet,verse .— P.
Pawada , La h. formfor paunda , p res. p a rt. of pauna q .v. ; parsad mfihpawadia nai, while (we were) putting the food into ourmouths.
’— P.
Pawe, 3rd sing . car. of pa ina, g.v.— P.
Pawe , 3rd sing . aor. of paui ia , g.v.— P.
Pewitt , a dj . m. f . pure , clean, holy.— H. P.
Pha il, s.m. (corr. fr. A . U. work , deed) ; acting, feigning, sham, pretence ;
adultery— P.
Phak ir, e.m. (corr. fr. A . U. a beggar, religious mendicant (in P. also
pak hir) . — P.
fruit ; advantage, benefit ; reward — H. U. P.
Phan e.m. the hood of a cobra di capello (more correctly spelt de capelo) .— H. P.
Phari ad, s.f. (com fr. Per. U. a lga), compla int ; phariad k arni , to complain — P.
Pharna , 0 . tr. to tear, rend (v. parna) .- H. P.
Pharna, 0 . tr. to seize , grasp, catch (=U. lazy— P.
Pharebi , adjnn. f. (corr . fr. Per. U.
(fi g ) ,deceptive, false, feigned : s.m. im
postor.— P.
Phart‘
i si (Syr. and s.m. a Pharisee .— P.
Phate , s.f . (corr. fr. A . U. victory, conquest : phate la i jana, to carry ORthepalm, gain thevictory.
— P.
Pher, conj . and ads . aga in, in the nex t place ; aga in, back (=H. U.
) Q)“— P°
Pherna, 0 . tr. (ca us. of phirna, to turn, cause to turn : pher dena, intens.
H . U. P.
Penna, a . intr. to turn chalna phirna, to walk to and fro.— H . U. P.
Ph ak fi a’
, a . tr . (H . phank na) , to blow (with bellows, eta .) mmdke , set on fire ;bum Pbfik dens, intens.
— P.
ru si si GRAMMAR.
o
Prani , ski. and e.m. (fr. prah, breath) , breathing, living ; a living creature
(applied only to human beings) , aman, a ghost — H . P.
Prapt, adj. m. f . (origina lly pa st pa rt. p a ss. prapta, fr. 8k . ap) ,
Prapti , obta ined, attained to, acquired, ga ined : prapt k arna, o. tr. to obta in,
acquire, prapt hor’
n‘
r, to be obtained. — H . P.
Prasan, e .m. (Sk . H . pras'
n) , enquiry, question.— P.
Prem, e.m. love , a ffection.— H. P.
Prit, s,f. (H. pri ti) , love, afiection ; priti rak hk hni (k iss nai) , to love any
Priti , one .— H . P.
Pach, s.f. enquiry, ex amination. H.
Pushch, sf .=H. pirch, g.o.— P.
Puchauira , 0 . tr. (a lso pujaur'
ra , gm.) to cause to arrive, to conduct, bring.-P.
Puohhchhna , 0 . tr. to ask , enquire (U. H . pachhna), to ask a question (in P.
followed by nil usua lly, also by to ; inU. by se) . — P.
Paja, s.f. worship, adoration ; k isi di paja k arni , to worship any one — H . P.
Pujara, e.m. (H. pujari , a worshipper, devotee ; a priest who sits at a
shrine and lives on the ofierings of the worshippers.— P.
Pnj aufra, c. tr. (cau'
s. of pujjna egg) , to cause to arrive, bring - P.
Panji , s.f. capital, stock -in-trade ; store, wea lth, property.— H . U. P.
Punn, a dj . m. f . and s.m. right, good, pure ; virtue, merit ; happiness (Sk . H .
punya) .— P.
Pur, postp . U. H. par), upon, on tap of. — P.
Para, -i, a dj . m. f . full, perfect ; para k arna, 0 . tr. to fill, fulfil. — H . U. P.
Pnrab, e.m. the East, the districtEast of the Ganges.— H. U. P.
Pure k h, s.m. puruk h, q .v. —P.
Puran, e.m. a Pa rana , one of the semi-sacred book s of the Hindi1s, of which
there are eighteen, sa id to have been composed by Vyasa .— H . P.
Par-i , s.f . fulness, end ; completion.— H. P.
Purnmasi , s.f . the full-moon, day or night of the full-moon.— H. P.
Paruk h, e.m. (Sk . purusha , H. purush) , a male, a man (vir), mank ind ; theanima mundi , the Supreme Soul (paramatma) of the Universe, the Deity(in this conception) .— P.
Pustak , e .m. a volume , a book .- H. P.
Putauna, 0 . tr. (caus. of puttna, Sk . put) , to cause to be dug, cause to be pluck ed
(ha ir) puta dena intens.— P.
P a ir, e.m. (Sk . putts) , a son.— H. P.
P 0“; s.m. (H . patj ar putt) , a son — P.
VOCABULARY.
0
Q does not occur, the Arabic g; becoming K in Panjabi .
Rehab, s.m. (Ar. a rebeck , a k ind ofviol.— A . U. P.
Bachira , o. intr. to be made , crea ted, invented ; to be used to, accustomed to ; toassociate with, be intima te with : v. tr. to ma k e , create , compose , adorn,arrange
— H. P.
Bachna, 0 . tr. and intr. (Old H . for ra chria, — H.
Bag, s.m. tune, song ; a musica lmode (of which there are six‘
— H. P.
Rah, sm (fem. in a way, road (Per. shy— Per. U. P.
Rahau, e .m. stop, pause (in read ing, chorus (i .s. the burden or part of the
song repea ted with ea chverse . In H. and P. songs, the chorusvery often
comes at the beginning) . — P.
Rahiira , v. intr. (U. thj) , to rema in, continue , dwell (often compounded with stem
of a notherverb, e.g . ho rahiria, to continue to be : p ast p a rt. riha m. , rahi
f . (v. Irreg. Verbs in — H . P.
Rahio (for Ra hyo) , Braj m. sing . p a st pa rt. ofRahina=Pa nj . riha.— H.
Rahit, adjnnj . (orig . p a stp a rt. left, deprived of(ts) , freed from, abandoned
by.— H.
Ra 1 , s.m. (H. also ray and rae) , a Hindu title ofmen.— H . U.
Rar Bular,s.m. name of an early patron of Gura Nana k .
Raibhoidi , s.m. name of an ‘llaqa in the Lahore district.
Raj , s.m. k ingdom; sovere ignty, rule ; raj k arna, to reign— H. P.
Raja,s.f . (corr. fr. A . U. the will of God, or of a prophet, fate ; ra ja hona ,
ra ja ho jam, tomeet one’s fate , to die.
Raja, e.m. a k ing, a Raja — Sk . H. P.
Rajai, s .f . another formof ra ja , q .e . raj a 1 auna , to perish, die — P.
Ra jal' (fromra ja, o. in or by or in accordance with the will of God — P.
Rajauna, 0 . tr. (ca ns. of rajjria) , to sa tisfy (with food, drink , to sate — P.
Baj i , a dj . m.f . (corr.fr. A .U. contented , satisfiedwith (de utte) , pleased — P.
Rajj , sm. (H . raj , Sk . ra jas) , impuri ty, dirt ; passion ; (one of the three ga in s
or qualities of matte r recognised by the sank hya Philosophy ; the other
two are sattva , truth or rea lity ; and tamas, dark ness) .— P.
Ra jna , o. intr. to be satisfied, satiated ; intens. raj jana .— H.
PANJA BI GRAMMAR.
Ba jjna , o. intr. to be sated, satisfied H. ra jna) .— P.
Rak has, e .m. (Sk . Rak shasa ), an evil being, demon, giant (one class are supposed
to devour human flesh, they differ from the micro in being still in the
body) . — P.
Rak hk hna, 9 tr. (U.v.65) , to place , put ; to k eep, preserve ; to have ; intens.
ra k h lama ; k isi da riam(naii) ra k hk hiia, to call any one by a certa in name,to name — H . P.
Rak hk hios (0 . Appendix 0. pa ra . he k ept, he k ept him, etc — P.
Rak hna, 0 . tr. Old H. for ra k hk hna H . ,
Ram, e .m. Rama , one of the Riudii Deities, often called Ramchandra . (One of
the most frequent of their prayers consists of mere repetitions of his name .
Ouri’
rNana k and the other writersof the Granth use Ramand Hari (Vishnu)as Permeant , God. Some ascetics use Ram as a salutation, repea ting the
name twice . )— H. P.
Rang, s. fn colour, style ; method ; amusement, pleasure — Per. H. U. P.
Rae, e.m. juice, liquid ; essence, best part of anything ; taste (six flavours are
recognised) enjoyment — H. U. P.
Basm, s.f . (A . U.
rs) , habit, ceremony.— U. P.
Basta , e .m. a way, road, path.— H . U. P.
Rat, s.f . night (Sk . ratri).— H. U. P.
Batan, e.m. (H. ratu) , a gem,a jewel. — H. P.
Ra ttiia, 0 . tr. (H. ratna), to dye , dye red, imbue ; c. intr. to be imbued with,a tta ched to.
— P.
Bet, s.f . sand — H. U. P.
Rijh, sf . fondness, choice ; desire , inclina tion — H . P.
Bit, sf . (Sk . rita ) , a rite , ceremony, custom.— H . P.
Rok , e .m. ready money, cash.— H . P.
Rokna ,vtr. to stop, hinder, prevent.— H . U. P.
Roti , s.f. a loaf, bread — H . U. P.
Ruk hk h, e.m. a tree (H . rak h, Sk . vrik sha ) .— P.
Ruk hsat, s.f. (corr. fr. A . U. leave, conge'
ruk hsat la ini , to ta k e leave ,say farewell.
— P.
Ruliia , v. intr. to be pounded , pulverised ; rolled, made smooth.— H . P.
(Rula i, Old P. and H . for rule, 3rd . sing . aor. of rulna .)Rup a zyd , e.m. a rupee (U.
— P.
B utt, sf season, time of yea; (Sk . ritu) : mite , in the season\c. Gram. Nouns,
I — P .
PANJABI GRAMMAR.
Sagar, s.m. ocean, seasea . .— H P.
Saga t, a dj .m. f . a nd ads. (eorr. of Per. U.M ) , harsh, hard ; stern ; ex tremely.
Sagla,-i , adj . m. f. (other forms are sagal sagra ,
-i , S. all, the whole .— P.
Sago, conj . (another formof sagwa, g.o . but. — P.
Sagwa, conj . but, but on the contrary, nay rather Per. U. 2L) .— P.
Sah, e .m. (corrfr Per. i ts) , a k ing (in P. generally) a sa int — P.
sabab, s.m. (corr. fr. Ar. U.me al) , Sir, Lord ; in P. often a title of God ;
a gentleman, a European. (This word is applied by the Sik hs to inanima te
objects as a sign of reverence , e.g . Granth 8ahab, Panja Sahab, — P.
Saheli , s.f. a woman’s female friend, a woman
'
s female attendant or companion.
— H. U. P.
Bahib, e.m. (see under sahab)Sahir, s.m. (corr. fr. Per. U.
flat) , a city.
— P.
Sahiia, 0 . tr. to sufier, endure, tolerate — H. U. P.
Sahura , s.m. fa ther-ia -law ; (a term of abuse) wretch, (U. H . sasur, susar,
susra) .— P.
Sahurs, s.m. pl. members of the fa ther-in-law’s family (Jfi ). — P.
Sai , nuns. a dj m. f . a hundred .—
.H P.
Sa il, e .m. walk , journey, sa il k arna, to walk : k isi des da sa il
k arna , to travel over a country.— P.
Sa ja , s .f . (corr. fr. Per. U. punishment : k iss nfi sa ja deh‘
i, to punish
any one .— P.
I
Saj a da, e .m. name of aMirasi , son ofMardana.
Sajja, -i , adj . m.f right (dex ter) : sa jja hathth, the right hand .— P.
Sa k arth, adj m. f . efficacious, useful, beneficial, profitable .-H . P.
Sa k has, s .m. (corr. fr. U. A . uni a person.— P.
Sak hi , s.f. (Sk . sak shya ) , evidence , testimony, story, treatise ; a discourse ; e .m.
(Sk . sak shya ) , a witness. — H . P.
Sak ha,v. a ux . to be able (used, as in H . and U. , with the stemof otherverbs,e g . bol sa kna, to be able to spea k
— H . U. P.
Salah, sf . (corr. fr. A . U. advice , counsel, plan : salah defii , to advise .
Salam,e .m. a sa lutation : salamk arna , to sa lute — A . U. P.
Sa lok , s m. (Sk . s'
lok a ), renown ; a hymn of pra ise , distich,verse ; epic stanza
(conta ining twoverses, each of 1 6 syllables) . — P.
Salirr'
i a , -i , a dj . m. f . salted, salty, saline (H. salona, -i . )— P.
S ami db, e profound contemplation, abstraction ; self-immolation(of a sannyasi .
g enera”! by drowning or burying himself alive) tomh (of a m yasi buried
8 1) re) , gm78 . — H . P .
1 2 6 G RH HH II .
O
(1 ) Sent, mg. m.f . (for H . shant, rt. Sk . s'
am) , quieted , appea sed, sa tisfied : e .m.
an ascetic, one indifferent to objects of pleasure or pain.— P.
(2) Sai nt, s .f . (Sk . H . di nti), peace , comfort, calm indifference to pleasure
Santi , and pa in.— P.
Santok h, e .m. (H . Sk . santosh) , contentment, sa tisfaction, patience ; delight,
happiness.— P.
Sapp, e.m (U.H . samp, Sk . sarpa) , a snak e — P.
Sar, e .m. a sacred tank , pond, small la k e — P.
Sar, e.m. end, top. Per. sar suns, to be comprehended, reached (of a secret) ; to
discover (spok en of the agent) to be accomplished .— P.
Si re, -i , a ct/2m. f . whole , all. — H . U. P.
Bara k pur, s.m. name of a tahsil in the Lahore division.
Saran, sf . (Sk . s'
arnam, H. s'
aran) , shelter, protection, place of refuge .— P.
Sarap, e .m. a curse scrap data, to curse — H. P.
Sarb, ad i eu. f . all, whole (Sk . sarva ) . — H . P.
Sarbandhi , e .m. relation, relative, k insman.— P.
Sarir, s.m. the body.— H . P.
Sarm,s.f. (Per. U.
rJig) , shame, modesty : ni l lite di sa rm, shame for one ta k en
with — P.
Sarminda, -i , whim. f . (Per. U. ashamed .— P.
Sarp, s.m. (Sk . sarpa , P. usua l fem sapp, U. H . simp) , a sna k e , serpent.
— H . P.
Sarfip, e .m one’s own natural shape ; figure, form, shape : hor sarfip
hoJana , to assume another shape — H . P.
Sas sm. (U. H . si s) , breath ; a moment. — P.
Sostauna , e . intr. to rest, delay, stop.— H. P.
Sastr, s.m. weapons, arms.— H. P.
Sastr, e.m. a S'
astra (Sk . éastra ) , one of the sacred book s of the Hindus ; sastr rit,s .f . customor rite appointed in the S
'
astras.— P.
Satauna, 9 . tr. to persecute , harass, worry (U. H. satana) . — P.
Sate , a dv. along with. together with (cf . sixth and sang) .— P.
Betgar, e .m. (fr. satt, the true Gun‘
x, an orthodox religious
teacher ; esp . God . (The Sik hs apply the word primarily to God, and thento certa in religious teachers (gurus) in whom the Deity is supposed to
b fbfb, a wn . a d) : six ty (H. U. si th) .— P.
fit; s .m. a beam
, rafter (Sk . athira ) .— P.
VOCABULARY .
Shah,
Sa i hu,
Sui n, e .m. (Sk . s'
wan) , a dog— (Old H . written in the P. manner for swan) .
Suzi u, s.m. (corr. fr. A . right, rectitude , right way, just act ; the future
reward ofvirtue — P.
Sabh, adj . m. f . (Sk . s'
ubha ) , shining, auspicious ; handsome ; virtuous ; subh
k arm,avirtuous deed, a work ofmerit — H . P.
Subhau, e.m. (Sk . eu, good
’ bhava ) , good disposition, character.— H . P.
Sudagari , s.f . (eorr. fr. Per. w a g) ,v. saudi gari . — P.
Sudai , a dj . m. f. mad ,melancholic (eorr. fr. Per.3‘s; fr. A .— P.
Sudh, a dj . m. f . stra ight, right ; clean, pure Sudh A tmii , the pure Spirit,God — H. P.
Sudhdhman, a dj . m. f. (sudh+man, pure-hearted , pm in heart.- P.
Sudi , s.f. the light half of the month, fromnew to full moon — H. P.
Sugand, s.f. (corr. fr. Per. U. fig , an oath ; sugand k ha ni , to tak e an oath, to
swea r.— P.
Suk ar, s.m. (corr. fr. A . U. thank s ; k isi dis suk ar k arna , to thank anyone .- P.
Suk h, s.m. and adj . m. f . ease , happiness ; happy, contented, satisfied— H. P.
Suk hk hsa nd,s.f . welfare , ease and comfort — H. P.
Suleiman, s.m. Solomon.— A . Per. U. H . P.
Sultanpur, e .m. (U.fisii ) name of a small town in the K apurthalii ‘ili qa .
Sufina, 0 . tr. to hear, to listen to, to obey k isi di (gall) or k isi did (gallh) sufini
(suha id) , toheark en to any one’s words, to attend to his wishes.
— H. U. P.
Stir, e.m. a hog, pig (a termof insult and grea t contempt) H. U. shar). — P.
Sura j , e.m. (Sk . H. sa tya ) , the sum— H. U. P.
Surajgrahan, s.m. an eclipse of the sum— H. P.
Surg, s.m. (Sk . Swarga, H . also swarg) , the sk y, Heaven (among Hind i1s thedwelling
-place of Indra and good people) .— H. P.
Surgri j , s.m. for Swarga ri jya ) , Heaven-k ingdom, the k ingdomof Heaven.
— P.
Surgwalzi , -i , adj . m. f . heavenly.— P.
Sat, s.m. cotton, thread, wire ; the sacred thread worn by the highest castes
H . U. P.
Sutta, -i , a dj . "s. f . (p a rt. of soiia ‘ to asleep : sutti paiiia, to fall
asleep— P.
s.f . (perh. fr. Sk . a'
wasa , brea th ashes.-P.
mmi a i am a ss .
Ta, p article (=U. H . to) , then (=French done) . [Granthis says that ts=td, but
the following sentence shows that it is a differentword : J5us sahirwichchaie, t§ Sajada nd ta bathti l dittii . In rea lity, while tri =to in U. H .
— P.
Ta, ado. in order that (Per. U. U) .
Ts, ado. then(sorrel. of js, =H . U.L; at that time : ta bi (H. U.
taubhi ) , even then, yet, nevertheless.— P.
Tad , ado. then, at tha t time (sorrel. of jad, and=U. H .— H . P.
Tad6 , ado. (tad+6 , e . fromthen, thenceforward , after that time — P.
Tag-id, s.f. (eorr. of A . U. age), urgency, stress : tag
-id k arni , to lay stremupon,
to urge , importance -Pf
Tahil, s.f. (H. tahafl) , attendance, waiting upon, service .— P.
Tahilna, e.m. servant, attendant, menial.— P.
Tai , p . p ron. 2nd sing. obl. of til, 0 . Gram. (=U. H . tujh), thee .— P.
Ta i , p . pron. 2nd sing . instraw. of td, a . Gram. by thee .— P.
Ti l“, postp . with dc, to, up to ; a lsofor a d
,used to denote direct obj ect (H . U.
Spy— P.
Taisti , -i , adj . m. f . so, such (sorrel. of jaisit, -i) . (The P. is teha , -i , or tihii , -i ,
q .v.) -H .
Ta k , postp . up to jad ta k , until whom— H. U. P.
Tak hitr'
i, e.m. a carpenter.
— I’.[ w
Ta k tar,e .m. a promise , dispute ; ack nowledgment (A .
,lfi ) . — U. P.
Ta k hsir, s.f . (corr. fr. A . U.fla ir) , fault, offence, trespass, shortcoming — P.
Talni ,v. intr. to be fried 0 . tr. to fry.— H . P.
Talni , a . intr. to pass away : intens. ta!j ii hi .— H . U. P.
Talni , 0 . tr. to put aside (caus. of talna) , to cause to pass ; to prevent ; to prevaricate ; to choose , select.
— H. P.
Ta lumbha, s.m. name of a town between Batala andMultan.
Talwa iidi , s.m. name of avillage not far fromBatali , inwhich Gun“
; Nana k was
born.
Tamacha, e .m. (corr. fr. Per a box on the ear, blow on the cheek .— U. P.
Tami si , e .m. (eorr. fr. A . U. Ltw) , show, display, ex hibition, pleasure.— P.
Tan, s.m. the body.— H . U. Per. P.
Ta ng , adj . m. f . na rrow,strait, difficult — Per. U. P.
Tap , a m. religious penance, self-torture (byfire) ; heat, fever tap k arna, toper
form a usterities : j sl tap k arna, to performa water penance— E X .
PANJZBi sau na s .
C
Thok ar, s.m. a stumble, stumbling : k ise nil thok ar k hulti uria , to cause any one to
stumble — H . U. P.
Thfifidhfiti , 0 . tr. (=U. H . dhiu‘
idhna) , to seek,to search fort — P.
Thuhra, -i , =U. H . thora, -i), scanty, little (in quantity), p l.
Thuhurti , -i,
Thuhuri-partit-witlti , a dj . on. and sm. one of little faith — P.
Tiaghs,v. tr. (H. tyi gmi ) , to desert, put away, leave, forsa k e ; divorce .— P.
Tiagpatri , s.f. a writing of divorce .— H. P.
Tier. adj . m.f . (U. It; and ready, prepared— P.
Tiari , s.f . (corr. fr. U. w ig) , preparation, readiness.— P.
Tiha , -i , adj . m. f . another formof tehi , -i , q .v.— P.
Tihais, m. tihai , f . adj . thirsty (fr. tiha , tihai, thirst, Sk . trishii) .— P.
Tija, -i , adj . num. m. f . third — P.
'
I i k ,
Ti k u,
Ti k ur, postp . as far as .— P
Tila k , e .m. the sectarian pa int-mark on the forehead ofHindOs.
— H . P.
Tilla , e.m. a hill, mound — P.
Tima t, s.f . a woman, a wife .— P.
postp . up to, unto.— P.
Tim'
i,
a woman, wife.— P.
Tinhfi, obl. p l. m. f . of so,v. Gram. them.— P.
Tinn, num. adj . m. f . three (U. H . tin) ; tinne , all three (U. H .— P.
Tirath, s.m. a sacred ba thing-place , a place of pilgrimage forHindi1s (as Banti ras
or llt‘
ihiibad , etc. ) tira th k arnii (k ise jagti di ) , to go on a pilgrimage (to anyplace) . (Sk . tirtha , H . tirth.) — P.
Til-pat, s.f . (Sk . tripti ) , contentment, satisfaction, pleasure .— H . P.
Tia , obl. sing. m. f . of so (q .v. in that, him.— H . P.
Tise =tis+ term.-e , q .v. thatvery=U. H . usi .
— P.
Tiththe , adv. there (sorrel. of Jiththe ) . - P.
Tiii , adv. so, then, accordingly (sorrel. of j i‘
ii H . tyli, ty6) .— P.
Toba, s.f. (oorr. fr. A . U. repentance ; meri toba hoi , I have repented — P.
Tobhti , e.m. (another formis tuhuba), an unwalled tank or pond.— P.
Topa , e.m. a measure (generally containing two sirs or about 4 — P.
Toma, e . i f . to cause to walk (cans. of turns) ; to cause to become prevalent, tobring (a custom) intovogue, to establish (a sect) , start (a. doctrine ) .— H . P.
Toma“
, l’. tr . (mm. of (Utah) , to break , break off, pluck— H .“Y
VOCABULARY .
Q
Trae, nuns. adj . en. f . (Lah. three=tinn, g.o. thrice,very ; trao k husi ,verymuch pleased,very happy.
— P.
Tra ik ti l, e .m. (H. a lso trik al fr. tri+k al) , the three times, i .e. past, present,future , ormorning, noon, and evening.
— H . P.
Til, p . pron. 2nd sing. m. f . (=U. H . tl’
i ) , thou.— P.
Thichhchh, a dj .m.f .mean, base, despicable tuchhchb jsans, to despise — H . P.
Tuba, p . pron. 2nd p l. obl. (=tusti , you.— P.
Tuhii da, i , p ass. p ron. 2nd p l. (=tusti dzi , i your.— P.
Tubé'
, p . pron. 2nd sing. (for tfihe fr. tfi e or he) , you, yourself (U. H . ti: bi ) .
— P.
Tub-s, e .m. piece, portion, share, fragment, bit of bread — H. U. P.
Turahi , s.f . a clarion(Sk . turya , H . turi , tura i ) .— P.
Tumzi,v. intr. to walk , go ; k ise de pichhche turmi , to follow any one .
— P.
Turt adv. (H . also turant) , quick ly, at once .— H . P.
Tuait, p . p ron. 2nd p l. m. f . obl. fr. tfl(see you.
— P.
Tuséda , -i , pose . pron. 2nd pl. m. f . your, yours.— P.
Tusi, p . pron. 2nd pl. mf . (see you.
— P.
Tyagns, 0 . tr. =Titi gna , q .v. to abandon.— H . P.
U.
Ubitre K hfi, e.m. name of a Pathan(A fghan) who became a disciple of Guruvitnak .
Uchcharnti , 0 . tr. (H. uchcharna) , to utter, recite ; compose .— P.
Udas, adj . m. f . lonely ; sorrowful, sad : udasmdh hofni , to be sad-faced .— H.U.P.
Udasi , s.f . sadness, depression ; k ise nai udasi pakri , some one became sad (lit.
seized — H. U. P.
Udhar, s.m. a debt, a loan (of money) udhar leiia , to borrow ; udhar deiui , to
lend ; udhti r mangini , to ask for a loan ; udhti r boin'
i , to be lent, to be in
debt — H. U. P.
Udhdhar, ado. for U. H. udhar, p roper P. uththe nfi) , thither, to that place ;udhdhar tofor uththb
'
,fromthat place , thence .
— P.
Udik iui, 0 . tr. to look out for, ex pect, wa it for, await.— P.
Uh, dem. a dj . and ard p . pron. m. f . (see Gram. that, he, she, it.— (H . wah,
U.— P.
Ujj al, a dj . m. f . bright, radiant, clear, pure , white .— H . P.
U,
mar s.f . (corn fr. A .-P.
U”, a im. ad}. a nd p r. inst. si .ng and obl. pl. of uh kc . Gnmk e
— Y
mmi si GRAMMAR.
s
Wed , (H . U. bed, Sk .veda ) , the Veda , the fourVedas of the Binni e — H. P.
Wadi , e.m. name of a got (clan) of the k sha’
triya (k hatri) caste .
‘Vefi ,e.m. time (=both SJ
]
, and In.» with this word and others denoting tines
and subdivisions of time the p ostpp . a re generally omitted, as us wale, a t
tha t time.
'— P.
Wi ah, s.m. (U.H . byith) ,marriage ; k iss nit!wrah k arna, tomarry any one.— P.
Wibhnt, s.f . (Sk . vibhirti) , grea t power, superhumanmight ; ashes of cowdung
(rubbed on the body by S'
iva ’s devotees) . - H . P.
Wichiir, s.m. judgment, Opinion, thought ; wichitrk arna, to judge , think — H. P.
Wichitrnti ,v. tr. to judge , think .— H . P.
Wichch, postp . (U. H. bich, used a s=U. H . m‘
é) , in, among, into.— P.
Wichch‘
ci, postp . fromin, fromamong.
— P.
Wide, adj . m. f. (H. hntaf. A . U. dismissed : wide k arna , 0. tr. to dismiss,bid farewell .— H. P.
Widdizi,s.f . learning, k nowledge (H . widyii) .— P.
Widia , s.f . dismissa l(Sk .vidaya,H. bids) , ta k ing leave widiti leii i, to ta k e leave ;k isi nd widizi k arni , to say adieu to any one — P.
Wigarni ,v. intr. to be spoilt, entirely altered , corrupted (U. H . bigarnti ) .— P.
Wigi rni ,v. tr. (acres. of wigarnti ) , to spoil, corrupt, cause to be altered for the
worse (U. H . bigiirnti ) .— P.
Wik he , postp . (used, in Amritsa r esp ecia lly, forWichch) , in, into ; aga inst. — P.
Wirodh, s.m. dispute , contention, contrariety, enmity.
— P.
Wissarna, v. intr. to be forgotten (for biserna, intr. of bisiirnti to forget. )— P.
Wita rna, v. intr. to fail (an attempt) , be damaged disagree ; be enraged ;
Wittamfi, to be rebellious, to be sulk y : wirur ba ithr'
ui , to be in a sulk y
Wima! tampon— P.
Ya, conj . or— Per. U. P. (the properP. word athwi is used in book s, but is hardly
understood by the uneduca ted) .
Yi d, sf . remembrance, memory ; yad ra k hk hnr, to remember ; yi d k arni, to
mention, learn by heart, repeat. — Per. U. P.
Yarnsa lam,s.m. Jerusalem.
Yisfi, e .m. (U. U‘ i) ’Jesus.
GTRPHRN A USTIN A ll !) 3030, PR\I T! I S ,
CATALOGUE OF IMPORTANTWORKS,PUBLISHED BY
T R t'
J'
B N E R 8 3 c o
57 A ND 59 LUDGATE HILL.
ABEL — LINGUrsrxo Esen s. By Ca rl A bel. Cox rsx '
rs : Language a s the Ex pression of N a tiona lMod es of Thought— The Conception of Love in some A ncient a ndModern Langua ges
— The English Verbs of Command — The D iscrimina tion ofSynonyms -Phnlologica lMe thods— The Connection betweenD ictiona ry and Grammar— The Possibility of a Common Litera ry La ngua ge for the SlavN a tionsCoptic Intensifica tiou— The Origin of Langua ge
— The Order and Position ofWordsin the La tin Sentence . Post 8vo, pp. x ii. a nd 282 , cloth. 1882. 93.
ABEL — Swi n e A N D LATIN . Ilchester Lectures on Compara tive Le x icography .
Delivered a t the Ta y lor Institution, Ox ford . By Ca rl A bel, Ph.D . Post 8vo,pp. vi. — 1 24 , cloth. 1883. 53.
ABRAHAMS .— AMANUA L or ScammmHrsroa r roa Usa mJswxsn Scnoons Am)
FAMILI ES . By L . B. A br ahams, B. A . , Principa l A ssistantMa ste r, Jews’Free
School. With Ma p a nd A ppendices. Seventh Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and152, cloth. 1 887. 1 s. 6d .
AGABBIZ A x EsS Ar ox CLASS IFICATION. By Louis A ga ssiz. 8vo, pp. vii. and381 , cloth. 128 .
AHLWABDT.— Tnsvu s or rm: e A x cu sr A aAmoPom , Ba ri um,
’A 8 7 A BA
,
TnA a A rA,Zua u a ,
’A LQUA x A , a nd I x a UUtQUA xs ; chiefly accord ing to the 3188 .
of Pa ris , G otha , and Leyden, with a List of the va rious Re adings . Ed ited by\V. A hlward t, Professor of Orienta l La ngua ges a t the University of Greifswa ld .
D emy 8vo, pp . x x x . a nd 340, sewed . 1870. 1 28.
Amt — A Coscrss: GRAMMAR or THE DUTCH LANGUAGE. with Selections fromthebest A uthors in Prose a nd Poe try. A fter D r. F . A hn
'
s Method . Fourth Ed it .on, thoroughly Revised a nd Enla rged . By D r. J.M. Hoogvliet and Dr. K ern
(of Le iden). 1 2mo, pp. vi ii. - 1 68 , cloth. 1 887. 3s. 6d .
AHN.— Pa A crmA h G a Aua or rm: G na x A s LA soUAol . By Dr. F. Ahn. A New
Edition. By D r. D awson Turner, and Prof. F. L . ‘Ve inmann. Crown 8vo, pp.
cx ii. and 430, cloth. 1878 . 39 . 6d .
Amt — New,Pascrxcm,
A ND BA srMrruon or a mvo ra nGa a x u LAnama l . By
gr. F. A hn. First and Second Course. Bound in 1vol. 12mo, pp. 86 and 120,oth. 1866. 30.
m — e to D itto. 1 2mo, pp. 40, sewed . 8d .
2 A Ca ta logue of Important Work s,m .
— MANUA L or Gra in s A ND ENCLIsR Coscx asA-rross, or Vad eMecumfor English Tra fallers. 1 2mo
, pp . x . and 137, cloth. 1 875. 111 . 6d .
Ami — N aw,Pa AcrICAL, A ND EASY MsrRoD or LRARNi No rm: FRRNCR LANovs .
By D r. F . A hn. First Course and Second Course . 1 2mo, cloth. Each ls. 6d . The
Two Courses in 1 vol. 1 2mo , pp. 1 14 and 1 70, cloth. 1865. .~3s.
Ann - N ew,PRA CTICAL
,A ND EA srMnrRoD or LsA RNIso rm: Pa rson LAsooAcx .
Th ird Course , conta ining a French Rea der, with Notes and Vocabulary. By H .
\V. Ehrlich. 1 2mo, pp. viii. and 125, cloth. 1866. 1 s. 6d .
AER— N ew,PRA CTICA L, A ND EAsrMn RoD or LEARNING rns IrA LIA§ LANCUA
CR.
By D r. F. A hn. First and Second Course. 1 2mo, pp. 198, cloth. 1 872 . 3s. 6d .
AHN .— A RN
’8 Cooasx . La tin Grammar for Beginners. By W. Ihne , Ph.D . 1 2mo,
pp. vi. and 1 84 , Cloth. 1 864 . 38 .
ALABASTER.— Tns Wa rm. or run LAw Buddhism illustra ted from Siamese
Sources by the Modern Buddhist, a Life of Buddha , and an A ccount of the Phrs
Ba t. By Henry A laba ster, E sq . , Interpreter of HerMa jesty’s Consula te -G eneral
i nSiam. D emy 8vc. pp. lviii. and 324 , cloth. 1 871 . 1 4s.
ALASIO.— Sce SCRNRRR.
ALBBBUNTB INDIA — Sec Sachau, page 58, and A lberuni, page 71 .
ALL— Tm: PRoPoSRD POLITICA L , LRCAL, AND SoCIA L Bure aus IN rm; O'rroNA N
EMPIRE A ND OTHERMOHAMMED AN S '
rA'
ras. ByMoulavi Cheragh A h, the
N isam'
s Civil Service . D emy 8vc, pp. liv. and 1 84 , cloth. 1 883. 8s.
ALLAN-FRASER— CnmsrmmrvA ND CRURCRIsN . By Pa trick A llan-Fra se r.
Second (revised and enla rged ) Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. 52, cloth . 1 884 . Is.
ALLEN .— THE COLOUR SENSE . Se e English and Foreign Philosophical Library .
ALLIBONR— A CRITICAL D xcrIoNARr or ENCLIsR LITERA TURE AND Bnmsn AND
AMERICA N A urnoa s (L ivo A ND D ECEA SED ). Fromthe Ea rliest A ccounts to thela tter ha lf of the 1 9th century . Conta ining over A rticles (A uthors), with40 Inde x es of subjects. By S . A . A llibone . In 3vols . royal Svc, cloth. £5, 85.
ALTHAU8 .—TBB SPA S or EURO" . By Julius A lthaus,M.D . 8vc, pp. 51 6, cloth.
1 862. 7s. 6d .
AMATEURMRCRANIo’
s Woa x snor (Ta r). A Trea tise conta ining Pla in and Concise
D irections for the Manipula tion ofWood and Meta ls ; includ ing Ca sting, Forging, Brazing, Soldering, a nd C entry . By the A uthor of The La the and its
Uses. Six th Ed ition. D emyu
gbo, p vi . and 1 48, with Two Full-Page Illus
tra tions, on toned paper and numerous£Voodcuts, cloth. 1 880. 6s.
AMATEURMECHANICAL 800m .— JOURNA L or run AMATEURMECHANICA L
SOCIETY. 8vc. Vol. i. 344 cloth. 1 871 - 72. 123. V ol. ii . pp. vi. and 290,cloth. 1873— 77. 12s. 01. iii . pp. iv. and 246, cloth. 1 878- 79. 1 28 . 6d .
AMERICAN A LNANAC AND TREA SURY or FA crs, STATISTICA L, FINANCIAL , A ND
PoLIrICA L. Ed ited by A insworth R. Spofiord , Librarian of Congress. Crown
8yo, cloth. Published yearly . 7s. 6d. ea ch.
AMBBRLBY.— A N A NA LYS IS orRFLIGIOUBBRLIRr. By V iscountAmberley . 2vols.
d emy 8vc, pp. xvi. and 496 a nd 51 2,cloth. 1 876. 308 .
AMONGSTMACHINES. See LUKIN .
ANDERSON .— PRA CTXCA L MRRCAe u CoRRasross cs. A Collection ofModern
Letters of Business, with Notes, Critica l and Ex plana tory , and an Appendix ,conta ining a D ictiona ry of Commercial Technicahties
, pro forma Invoices, A ocoun t S a les
, B ills of Lading, and Bills of Ex change ; also an E x la nation of theRoman Cha inRule . 27th Edition, revised and enlarged. 8 3V? m“OW N “s o
. pp . x x x ii. and 280, cloth. 5s.
4 A Ca ta logue of Important Work s
ARNOLD -{ rim SONG Csnssm i. or. BHA GAS’
A D-G ITA (from the MahshhAra ta ).Be ing a D iscourse between A I juna , Prince of Ind ia , and the Supreme Be ing underthe formof K rishna . Tra nsla ted fromthe Sansk ritTe x t. By SirEdwin A rnold ,
M.A .
, C. Second Edition, crown 8vc, pp. 192 , cloth. 1 885. 58 .
ARNOLD — POETICA L Wonx s. By Sir Edwin A rnold ,M.A . Arc.
Uniform Ed i tion, comprising The Light of A sia — Ind i an Poetry— Pea rls of theFa ith— Ind ia n Idl s— The Secret of D ea th— a nd The Song Celestia l. In SevenVolumes. Crown 8vo, cloth. 1 888 . 428 .
ARNOLD — Tw i I LIA D A ND Onrsssr or INDIA . By Sir Edwin A rnold , ILL ,
k c. Fcap. 8vo, pp. 24 , sewed. ls.
ARNOLD — A SI I PLB TRA NSLITx a A i. Ga u nt“; or Tim Tua x i sn LANGUAGE .
Com iled fromVa rious Sources. IVith D ialogues and Vocabulary . By S irEdwinA rno d ,M.A . , k c. Post 8vo, pp. 80, cloth. 1 877 . 28 . 6d .
ARTHUR.— THE COPABCEN EBS : Be ing the A dventures of two Heiresses. By F .
A rthur. Crown 8vo, pp. iv. —31 2 . cloth . 1 885. 108 . 6d .
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. List of Publica tions on a pplica tion.
ASIA I'IO SOCIETY.
— Joua NA i. or TB ] RorA I. A si A rio Soci srr or GREAT Ba i rA INA ND IRELA ND
,fromthe Commencement to 1863. First Series, complete in 20Vols .
8vo. w ith many Pla tes. £10, or in pa rts from «i s. to 68 . ea ch.
ABIATIOsocmTY.
— JounN A i. or THE ROYA L A SIATIC SocmTr or GREAT BRITA INA ND IRELA ND. N ew Series. 8vo. Stitched in wra pper. 864- 8Vol. I . , 2 Pa rts , pp . iv. and 4 90, l6s.
— Vol. II 2 Parts, pp. 522, 1 6s.— VoI. II I 2 Parta ,
pg) . 516
,with Photogra ph , 22 8 .
— Vol. IV 2 Pa th . p. 52 1 , 1 6l .— Vol. V. . 2 Pa rts, pp. 4 63, wi th
1 full-pa ge and Ioldmg Pla tes . 1 83. Oi — Vol. VI" a rt I, pp. 2 1 2, with 2 Pla tes and aMap. 88 .
— Vol. VI . Pa rt 2 , pp 272, w ith Pla te and Map, Se.— Vol. VII Pa rt 1
, pp . 1 94 , with a Pla te .
88 — Vol. VII .
,Pa rt 2, pp . 204
,w itn 7 Pla tes and a Ma p, 88 .
-Vol. VI II . , Part l, pp. 156, wi th3Pla te 8 and a Pla n,
— Vol VI I I Pa rt 2, pp . 152, tc.
— Vol. IX . . Pa rt 1 , pp. 154 , with a
Pla te , -Vol. Pa rt 2 , pp. 292,W i th 3Pla tes, 10
'
s. 6d .— Vol x . , Pa rt I, pp,
156 , wub 2Pla tes and a Ma n. rs — Vol X . , Pa rt 2. pp. 1 46 , 68 — Vol. x . , Pa rt 3. p. 204 , 8 8 — Vol. XL ,
Pa rt 1, pp 1 2-5, SAL — Vol X I Pa rt 2. pp 159 , With 2 Pla te s , 7s . 6d — Vo XI Part 3, pp. 250,
38 — Vol X I I Pa rt 1, pp . 152 , 6 8 .
— Vol. XI I Pa rt 2, pp. 1 82 , with 2 Pla te s and Ma p, 68 .
Vol XI I Pa rt 3, pp. 10H 4s.— VoI. XI I . , Pa rt 4 , pp . x . , 152 cx x 1 6 , 88 .
— VOl. X II I. . Part I ,pp. 1 20
, 58 .— V0 1 X I II Part 2 , pp . 1 70, wi th 8 Ma 88 .
— Vol. X III . , Part 3, p . 1 78, with a
a b le , 7s. 6d .— Vol X I II. , Pa rt 4 , pp 282 , wi th a P a te and Ta ble , 108 6d .
— V0 XIV.. Part 1 ,
gp. w ith a Ta b le a nd 2 Pla te s , 58 .
— VoI. X IV. , Pa rt 2, pp . 16 4 . wi th 1 Ta ble , 78 . 6d .— Vol.
IV. , Pa rt 3, pp 2 6 . W ith 6 Pla tes, Ba r -Vol. X IV. Part 4 , P}?
4 92, W ith 1 Pla te, Ila — Vol.XV. , Part 1 , pp. 136 , 6s Pa rt 2 , pp . 158 , with 3Tables, se . art 3, pp . 102, 68 . Part 4 , pp .
1 40, (ie .— Vol. XVI" Pa rt 1 , pp. 138 , W i th 2 Pla te s , 78 . Pa rt 2. I ' 1 84 , w ith 1 Pla te, 98 .
Pan 8 , July 1 884 , pp 74 —clx . , 108 . 64 . Pa rt 4, pp. 1 82 . 88 .
— Vol. XV I . . Part 1 . pp. 14 4 . wi th6 Pla tes. 108 6 d Pa rt 2 , pp . 1 94 w ith a Map, 98 . Part 8 , pp . 34 2 . w ith 3 Pla tes, 1 08. 6d .
-Vo l. XVI II . . Pa rt 1 , pp . 1 26 , w ith 2 Pla te s, 58 . Pa rt 2,
196 , with 2 Pla tes. 68 Pa rt 3,pp. 130, w ith 1 1 Pla tes, 108 . 6d . Part 4 , pp. 8 1 4 . w ith 8 Pia tes , 78 . 6d .
— Vol. X IX Pa rt 1 ,
pp.100, w ith 3Pla i e s , 10~
. Pa rt 2 , pp. with 6 Pla tes, 108 . Pa rt 8, pp. 216 , wi th 6
a te s , 108 . Pa rt 4 , pp . 2 1 6 , w ith 1 Pla te , 108 .
ASTON .— A Short G rammar of the Japanese Spok en Langua ge . By W. G . A ston,M.A . Third Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. 96 , cloth. 1873. 1 2s.
ASTON .— A G RAMMARor THE JAPA NESE WRITTEN LANGUA G E. By W. G . A ston,
M. A .,A ssistant Ja panese Secreta ry Lega tion, Yedo, Japan. Second
Ed ition . 8vo. pp. 306, cloth. 1 877. 288 .
AUCTORES SANSCRI’I’I.Vol. I . Tm: JA IMINivA -Nri rA -Mlm-V ISTA IIA . Ed ited under the supervisionof Theodor G old stuck er. La rge 4to , pp. 582 . cloth. £3. 138 . 6d .
Vol. II . THE INSTITUTES 0 1“G AUTAMA . Ed ited , with an Inde x ofWords. by A .
F . Ste nzler, Ph.D .,Prof. of Oriental Languages in the University of Breslau.
8vo, pp. iv. a nd 78 , cloth. 1 876 . 4 8 . 6d . Stitched , 3s. 6d .
Vol. I II . V A ITANA SUTIIA THE RITUA L or THE A THA BVA V EDA. Ed ited , wi th
Critica l Notes and Indices, by D r. R. Ga rbo. 8vo, pp. viii . and 120, sewed .
7 0 15. I V. a nd VZ— VARD IIAMANA 'S GANAnA AnonAD iI I. with the A uthor’s
Comment E d ited,with Critical Notes an Indian ,
‘
wj Ba k e s E ggelm$P A D . 8vo . Pa rt L, pp. x ii. and 240, wrapper. 1 81 9 . 6 8 .
WmI ’I’Of o 1 881 63,
Published by Trubner d: 00.
AUSTIN — TimDUTIES A ND THE RIGHTS OF MAN . A Tre a tise on D eentology, inwhich a re d emonstra ted the Ind ividua l, Socia l, and Interna tiona l Duties ofMan,a nd his Ind irect Duties towards A nima ls. By J. B. A ustin. Large post 8vo,pp. x ii. and 496 . Cloth. 1 887. 8s. 6d .
AUSTRALIA — Ta x YEAR Boos or A USTRA LIA for 1888. Published under the
auspices of the Governments of the A ustra lian Colonies. D emy 8vo, pp. 893;with 7 La rgeMaps ; boa rds. 108 . 6d .
AXON — TRE LIECRANIG’S FRIEND . A Collection of Rece ipts and Pra ctical Sug
gestions rela ting to A quaria , Bronzing, Cements, Drawmg, D yes, Electricity,G ilding, G lass
-work ing, &c. Numerous Woodcuts. Ed ited by W. E. A . A x on,F.S .S. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii . and 339, cloth. 1 886 . 38 . 6d .
DADA — A N E LEMENTARY GRAN IIA R or THE JA PA NRSE LANGUA G E. With Easy ,Progressive E x ercises. By Ta tui Ba ba . Second and Enlarged Ed ition, crown8vo, pp. vii i. a nd ~l20, cloth. 1888 . 58 .
BADEN-POWELL — PROTEGTION A ND BA D TIMES, with Specia l Reference to thePolitica l Economy of English Colonisa tion. By G eorge Baden-Powell
,M.A . ,
&c. 8vo, pp. x ii. -376, cloth. 1 879. 6s. 6d.
BADER.— Tin NATURA L AND Moa s in GRANGas or TEE HUN AN Era , AND THEIR
TREATII ENT. By C. Bader. Med ium8vo, pp. viii. a nd 506 , cloth. 1 863. 1 6s.
BADBR.— PLATES ILLUSTRATIUG Ti i a NATURAL A NDMoa smCHANGES or Tin HUiI A N
Ri it. By C. Ba der. Six chroma -lithographic Pla tes, ea ch conta ining the figure sof six Eyes, a nd four lithographed Pla tes , with figures of Instruments. Vt
'
ith a n
E x la na tory Tex t of32 pa ges. Medium8vo, in a portfolio. 21s. Price for Te x ta n A tlas ta k en together, £1 , 128 .
BADDELEY.— LoTcs LEAVES . By St. Cla ir Baddeley. c p. folio, pp. x i i . and
1 18 . Fa ncy boa rds, lettered . 1 887. 88 . 6d .
BAN GOR— Wa rs A ND STa Ars Ta ox TE E FA REAsT ; Essays onMa tters rela ting toChina . By F. H . Ba lfour. D emy 8vo, pp. 2 24 , cloth. 1 876 . 10s. 6d.
BALFOUR.— TRE D IVINE CLA SS IC or N A N-HUA be ing the lVork s of Chuang Tsze
Ta oist Philoso her. With a n Ex cursus, and Copious A nnota tions in English andChinese . By H. Ba lfour. 8vo, pp . x lvi ii. and 426, cloth. 1 881. 1 4s.
BALFOUR.— TAOIST TEXTS . Ethica l, Politica l, and Specula tive. By F . H . Ba lfour,
Ed itor of the N orth-China Hera ld . Imp. 8vo, pp.vi. - 1 18, cloth. 10s. 6d .
BALFOUR.— LEA VE8 TRON MY CHINESE SCRAP-BOOK. By F. H. Ba lfour. Post8vo,
pp. 215, cloth. 1887 . 78 . 6d .
BALL — TunD I A i IoNDs, COM A ND Gnu ) or IND IA ; the irMode of Occurrence a ndD istribution. By Profe ssorV . Ba ll,M. A F .RS . , F .G .S. , D irector of the Sciencea nd A rtMuseum, D ublin, formerly of the G eologica l Survey of Ind ia . Fcap. 8vo,pp. vi ii . and 136. cloth. 1 881 . 58 .
BALL — A MA NUA L or TEE G EOLOGY or INDIA. Part 111 . Economic G eology . ByV . Ball,M.A . , F.G .S . Roya l 8vo, pp. x x . and 640. with 6 Ma ps and 1 0 Pla tes,cloth. 1881 . 10s.
BALLAD SOCIETY— Subscriptions, small paper, one guinea ; la rge paper, two guineasper annum. List of publica tions on applica tion.
BALLAN‘I'YNE — Et si i ssrs or HIND I A ND Bau BRAs G a A i I i IAR. Compiled for
the use of the Ea st India College a t Ha ileybury. ByJames Ba llantyne . SecondEd ition. Crown 8vo, pp. 38 , cloth. 1 868 . 5s.
BALLANTYNE .
— FIRST Lsssoss IN Su sx a i r G aA inu a ; together with an Introduction to the Hitopadeéa . Fourth Ed ition. By JamesR. Ba llantyi i e , LL.D . ,
rian of the Ind ia Office . 8vo, pp. viii. and 1 10, cloth. 1 88 1. SA NA .
B
gm
.
7 ENE.— THE SAs TA ArRoRi sus orm in i . see T ammie ; when
en es.
6 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,BARANOW§RI .
— VA DE MEUUE D E LA LANGUE eFEA NeAISE, rédigé d'
apres les D ictionna ires classiques a
vec les Ex emples de Bonnes Io cutions que donne l'
A cadémieFra nca ise , on qu on trouve d ans les ouvra ges des plus célébres auteurs. Pa rJ.J.
Ba ranowslci. Second Ed ition. 32mo, pp. 224 , cloth. 1883. 2s. 6d .
BARANOWBK I. — A NGLO-POLISH LEx IGON. By J. J. Ba ranosgsk i, formerly UnderSeci
é
e ta x
iyéto the Ba nk of Pola nd . in Wa rsaw. Fcap. 8vo , pp. viii. and 492, cloth.
188 s.
BARANOWBK I .— SL0WNIE POLS Eo-A NGIELSE I . (Polish-English Le x icon. ) By J.
J. Ba ranowsk i. Fca p. 8vo, pp. Ivan- 402, cloth. 1884. 1 2s.
BARENTS’HELIOS — Recovered in the summer of 1 876 by Cha rles L. W G ardiner,Esq . , and presente d to the Dutch G overnment. Described a nd e x pla i ned by J.
K . J. de Jonge , D eputy Roya l A rchitect a t the Hague. Transla ted , with a Prefa ce , by S . R. Van Campen. \Vith a Map, Illustra tions, and a fac-simile of theScroll. 8vo
, pp . 70, cloth. 1 877. 58.
BARNB8 .— A G LOSSARY or THE DORSET D i A LEcr ; with a G rammar of itsWord
Sha pening a nd Word ing. By VVIlliamBarnes. B .D . ,A uthor of Poems ofRura l
Life in the D orset D ia lect. D emy 8vo. pp. viii. a nd 1 26 . Sewed. 1 886. 6s.
BARRIBRB and CAPENDIL— LES FAux BONSHox x Es, a Comedy. By TheodoreBarriere and Ernest Capendu. Edited , with English Notes a nd Notice on Ba r
riers, by Professor Ch . Cassa l, LL.D . , of University College, London. 12mo, pp.
xvi. and 304 , cloth. 1868 . 4s.
HARM— THE RELIG IONS or IND IA . See Triibner’s Orienta l Seri es.
BABTLE'IT .
— D ICI IONARY or A x ENICANs s. A Glossary ofWords and Phra ses colloquia lly used in the United Sta tes. ByJohn Russell Ba rtlett. Fourth Ed ition,considera bly enlarged and improved . 8vc
, pp. x lvi . and 8 14 , cloth. 1877. 2 1s.
BAZLBY.— Norns ON THE EPICYCLOD IA L CUTTING FEAHE ofMessrs. Holtzapffel
Co. With specia l reference to its Compensa tion A djustment, and with numerousIllustra tions of its Ca pa bilities. By Thoma s Seba stian Ba rley, M.A . 8vc, pp.
xvi. and 1 92 , cloth. Illustra ted . 1872 . 103. 6d.
BAI LEY.— TBB STAES IN THEIE COURSES : A Twofold Series of Maps, with a
Ca ta logue , showing how to identify , a t any time of the yea r, a ll sta rs down to themagnitude , inclusive of He is, clearly visible in English la titudes. By T. S .
Ba zley,M.A . A tlas folio, pp. 46 and 24,Folding Pla tes, cloth. 1878. l5a .
REAL — A CATENA or BUDDHIST Soa EES raox THE CHINESE. By S. Ba a l, B L ,
Trin. Coll. , Cambridge , &c. 8vc, pp. x iv. and 436 , cloth. 1871 . 15s.REAL — THE RouA NTIo LEGEND or SA E I A BUDDHA . From the Chinese -Sansk rit.By the Rev. Samuel Bea l. Crown 8vo, pp. 408 , cloth. 1 875.
BELL — DM APAD A . See Triibner’s Oriental Se ries.
BELL — BUD DHIST LITEEATUEE IN CHINA : A bstra ct of Four Lectures, D elivered bySamuel Bea l, B . A . , Professor of Chinese a t University College , London. D emy8vo, pp. x x . a nd 186, cloth. 1 882. 10s. 6d .
BEAL .— S I-YU-K I . Buddhist Records of the Western
'
World . See Triibner’s
Oriental Series.
BRAD — THE LIFE or E IDEN TS IANG. See Triibner’s Orienta l Series.
M BS.— OUTLINES or IND IAN PHI LOLOGY. With aMa showing the D istribution
of India n Languages. By John Be ani es, B .S. , &c. Second enlargedand revised Ed ition. Crown 8vc, pp.viii. and 96 , cloth. 1 868. 50.
BRAMES.— A CourA E ATIvE GNA N II A E or
‘I‘Bl MoDEEN A a rAN LANGUA GES or INDIA ,to wit, H ind i. Punjab i, Sindhi, Gujara ti, Mara thi. Oriya , and Benga li. By JohnB e ames, B . M &c d c. D emy 8vo. Vol. L On Sounds. Pp. xvi.a nd 360, cloth. 1 872 . 1 6s. — Vol. II . The Noun and th e Brenna n . Y x ii . and348} clo th . 1 8 75. 1 6m— Vol. II I . The V erb . Pp. x ii . S . “a .
8 A Ca ta logue of Importa ntWork s,BBNM — THNORT or LEGISLATION . B Jeremy Bentham. Transla ted fromtheFrench of Etienne Dumont by R. Hil reth. Fifth Ed ition. Post 8vo, pp. xv.and 472 , cloth. 1887. 7s. 6d.
BBNTLBY.— A GRAMHARor THE K ONGO LA NGUA GE. With a n A ppend ix of Tales,
Proverbs, 820. By the Rev. \V. Holman Bentley . D emy.8vo. In the Press.
BENTLEY.
— D ICTIONARY A ND GRAMMAR or THE K ONGO LA NGUA GE. A s spok en
a t S an S a lva dor, the A ncient Ca pita l of the Old K ongo Empiire, West A frica .
By the Rev. W . Holman Bentley,Missiona ry of the Ba Itist issiona ry Societyon the K ongo. D emy 8vo, pp. x x iv. and 720, cloth. 1 8 21 s.
BBS'
I‘
. A ND UTILITY : A N a tura l Science of Ethics. By George Payne
Best, B.A . ,M.B. ,Cantab. Crown 8vo, pp . viii. and 200, cloth. 1 887 5s.
— See VA LD ES .
BEVBRIDGB.
— THE DISTRICT or BA E ARGANJ. Its History and Sta tistics. By H.
Beveridge , B .C.S Magistra te and Collector of Ba k a rganj . 8vo, pp. x x . and460, cloth. 1 876 . 21s.
BHANDARK AR.— EARLT B I STORT ON THE D EE EA N DOWN To THE MAHOIIED AN
CONQUES'
I‘
. By Ramk rishna Gopa l Bhand a rk a r,M.A . . Profe ssor ofOriental Lan
guages, D e k k an College . Roya l 8vo, pp. 1 28 , wrapper. 1 884 . 5s.
BICKNELL.— Sce HA rIz.
BICKNELL — FLOWERING PLANTS A ND FERNS or THE RIvIERA AND NEIGHEOURINGMOUNTA INS . D rawn a nd d escribed by C. BiclIncll. 1Vith E ighty
-two Full-Pa ge
Pla te s, L ithographed and Coloured byMessrs. \Vest, N ewma n 8: Co. , conta iningI llustra tions of Three Hundred a nd Fifty Specimens. Imperia l 8vo, pp.viii . and1 72 , ha lf-roan, gilt edges. 1 885. £3, 38 .
BIGANDBT.— THE LIFE or G AUDA N A . See Trubner
’
s Orienta l Series.
BIGGS .
— I\IA STER THA D DEUS ; or, The La st Foray in Lithuania . Transla ted fromthe Polish of A d amMick iewicz. By Maude A . Biggs. 2 vols. foolscap 8vo ,pp. x x iv. a nd 316 and 268 , cloth. 1 885. 158 .
BILLINGS .— TE E PRI NCIPLES or VENTI LATION A ND HEATING , and their Pra ctica l
A pplica tion. By John S . Billings, M. D LL.D . Surgeon U.S.M y.
D emy 8vo, pp. x . and 216, cloth. 1 884 . 15s.
BIRCH.— FA STIMONA STICI Av Summer or
,A n Alphabetica l List of the Heads of
Religious Houses in England previous to the N orman Conque
r}to which is pre
fix ed a Chronologica l Ca ta logue of Contempora ry Founda tio By lValter d eG ray Birch. 8vo
, pp.vii. and 1 14 , cloth. 1 873. 5s.
BIRCH.
— A COLLECTION or THE PRINCIPA L BIOGRA PHICA L NOTICES or D E. BIRCH,
which have a ppe a red in the BI itish a nd FOI cign Pre ss. \Vith a Bibliogra phy ofhis L i tera ry ‘Vfl l
‘k fl, PortI nits, a nd a n Introduction. By \Va lter D e G ra y Birch,
F.S .A . WithMed a llion Portra it. 8vo, pp. x ii. and 96 , cloth: 1 886. 38 .
BIZYENOS .— AT6 1A EE AYPA I . Poems. By G eorge M. Bizyenos. “1 th Frontis
piece Etched by Prof. A. Legros. Roya l 8vo, pp.vii i. -31 2 , printed on hand-madepaper, a nd richly bound . 1 833. £1 , 1 1 s. 6d .
BLACK .
— YOUNG JAPAN, YONOHAHA A ND YEDO. A Na rra tive of the Settlementa nd the City , fromthe S igning of the Tre a ties in 1 858 to the Close of 1 879 ; witha G lance a t the Progress of Ja pan during a Period of Twenty-one Yea rs. By J.
R. Bla ck, formerly Ed itor of the
“Ja pa n Hera ld ,” 8m. 2 vols. demy 8vo, pp.
xviii. a nd 4 18 ; x iv. and 522, cloth. 1 88 1 . £2 , 2s.
BLACKBT.— RESEARCHPS INTO THE LOST HISTORIES or A NERICA ; or, The Zod iac
: h a rm to be a n Old Terrestria lMa in which the A tlantic Isle is d e linea ted ; soth a t L
'
g b t ca n be thrown upon t ie Obscure Histories of the Ea rthwork s a ndR'U lj ed Ci tie s of America . By lV. S . Bla chet . “h aunted b yW ‘m g fl 8va . pp . 336, cloth. 1 883.
Published by new E Co.
BLADBs.— A H A CCOUNT or THE Gl en n MORA LITT PLAT ENTITLED .DEPosmo
COBNUTI TI’
POGHAPHICI, a s Performed in the Sevente enth a nd Eighteenth Cen
tut ies. With a Rhythmica l Transla tion of the German Version of 1 648. BylVilliam Bla de s (Typogra pher). To which is added a Litera l Reprint of the
unique Origina l VergIon, written in Pla et D eutsch by Paul de “Vise , a nd printedin 1 621 . Sma ll 4 to, pp. x ii. and 1 44 , with facsimile Illustra tions, in an appropria teb ind ing. 1 885. 7s . 6d .
BLADBs.— SHA ESPERE AND TrPOGRA PHr. Be ing an A ttem t to show Shak spere
’s
Personal Connectionwith ,and Technical K nowledge of, t e A rt of Pri nting ; a lso
Rema rk s upon some common Typogra hica l Errors, with especial re ference to theTe x t of Sha k spe re . By WilliamB es. 8vo, pp. viii. and 78, with an Illustration, cloth. 1 872 . 3s.
BLADES .— THE BIOGRAPHY A ND TYPOGRA PHY OPWILLIAH CA x TON , England
'
s FirstPrinter. By W. Bla des. Founded upon the A uthor
’s“Life and Typography of
\VilliamCa x ton. Brought up to the Present D zite . Ele ntly and spproprmtelyprinted in demy 8vo , on ha nd -ma de paper, imita tion old velled binding. 1 877.£1 , 1 s. Che ap Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth. 1 88 1. 5s.
BLBEK .— RBYNARD THE Fox IN SOUTH A rEICA ; or, Hottentot Fables and Ta les,
chiefly Tra nsla ted fromOriginalMa nuscripts in the Libra ry of His E x cellenc SirG eorge G rey, K .O.B. ByW. H . I . Blee k , Ph.D . Post 8vo, pp. x xvi. an 94 ,cl0 th . 1864 . 38 . 6d .
BLEBK .— A BRIEF A CCOUNT or BUSHHAN FOLE Loan, and other Tex ts. ByW. H.
1 . Block . Ph.D . Folio, pp. 21 , paper. 2s. 6d.
BLUMHARDT.— See CHARITA EA LI .
BOEHMER.— See VALDES, and SPA NISH RETORHERS .
BOJBSEN.— A GUIDE TO THE DANI SH LANGUAGE. D esigned for English Students.
ByMrs. Ma ria Bojesen. 12mo, pp. 250, cloth . 1 863. 5s.
BOLlL — THE G ERHA N CA LIGRAPHIST : Copies for German Handwriting. By C.
Boli a . Oblong 4 to, sewed . 1 s.
BOOLE .— hIESSA GE or PsrCHIc SCIENCE To MOTHERS A ND NURSES . By Mary
Boole . Crown 8vo, pp. x iv. and 266, cloth. 1 883. Se.
BON E-ELL — S ‘
rom s A ND FOLK -LORI: orWEST CORNWALL. By WilliamBottrell.
Witt: Illustra ttiins by Joseph Blight. Third Series. 8vo, pp. viii. a nd 200,c ot 1 884 .
BOY ENGINEERS — See under Ll‘
K lN .
BOYD — NAOKHAND A or, the Joy Of the Sna k e lVorld . A BuddhistDrama in FiveA cts. Tra nsla ted int oEnglish Prose , with Ex lana tory Notes, fromthe Sansk ritof Sa-Hsrsha -D eva . By Palmer Boyd , B .A . , ambridge . With a n Introductionby Professor Cowell. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi. and 100, cloth . 1 872 . 4s. 6d .
BRADSK Aw.— D ICTIONARY or BA THING PLA CES A ND CLIHATIC HEA LTH RESORTS .
Much Revised a nd Considera bly Enlarged . lVith a Ma p in Eleven Colours.Fourth Ed ition. Crown 8vo
, pp. lx xviii. and 364,cloth. 1888. 2s. 6d .
BRADSHAW — A B C D ICTIONARY or THE UNITED STATES , CA NADA , A ND MEE ICO.
Show ing the most importa nt Towns and Points of Interest. \Vi thMa ll, Routes,
Are . N ew Ed ition,Revised . Fcap. 8vo, pp. 320, cloth . 1 887 2s . 6d.
BRENTANO — ON THE HISTORI A ND D EVELOPHENT or G ILDs, AND THE ORIGIN orTRA DE -UNIONS . By Lujo Brentano
,of A schafl
'
euburg, Bava ria , Doctor JurisUtriusque et Philosophia . 1 . The Origin at can . 1 . B a gxmn \Q\
G ilda . 3. Town-Gilda or Gad -Merchants. Q. Qu i t -G k S .
8vo, pp. xvi. and 136 . cloth. 1 8 70. 3s . 6d .
10 A Ca ta logue of ImportantWorks,BBB
'rsc BR.
— EA BLY EUROPEAN Rssm cnss INTO THE FLORA or CHINA .
By E . Bre tschne ider,M.D . , Physician of the Russia n Lega tion a t Pe k ing. D emy8vo, pp . iv. and 194 , sewed . 1 88 1 . 7s. 6d.
BBBTSOBNBIDBR.— BOTA NICON S IN ICUH . Notes on Chinese Bota ny, fromN a tive
{351
2We
Bter
gdSources. By E . Bretschneider,M.D . Crown 8vo, pp. 228 , wrapper.
l s.
BBBTBCHNBIDBK — INTERCOURSE or THE CHINESE WITH WESTERN COUNTRIES .
See Trii bner’s Orienta l Series.
BRETTE and THOMAs.— FRENCH E x AHINATION PAPERS SET AT THE UNIVERS ITY
OF LONDON. A rra nged and ed ited by the Rev. P. H. Ernest Brette , B.D . , E x a
miner in the University of London.&c. , and Ferdinand Thoma s, B.A . , B.Sc. ,la te
A ssista nt E x aminer in the University of London. Pa rt I.Ma tricula tion, and theG enera l E x amina tion forWomen. Crown 8vo, pp. x x . and 176, cloth. 1 858 . 3s. 6d .
mm and THOMA8 .— FRENCH EXAMINATION PA PERS SET AT THE UNIVERS ITT
or LONDON . K ey to Pa rt I . . in which a ll the E x tra cts from the lVritings ofFrench A uthors are transla ted into English, and a ll the Questions on G ramma r,Idiom, a nd Elementa ry Etymology a re fully answered . Edited by the Rev. P. H .
Ernest Brette , B.D . ,a nd Ferd ina nd Thomas D .A . , B.Sc. Crown 8vo, pp. 210,
cloth. 1 888 . 58 .mm and THOMA S.
— FRENCH EXAMINA TION PAPERS SET AT THE UNIVERS ITror LONDON . Ed i ted by Rev. P. H . E rnest Bre tte, B.D ., a nd Ferd inand Thoma s,B.A . ,
B. Sc. Pa rt IL— First B . A . (or Inte rmed ia te in A rts a nd RA . Pass E x a
minutions) ; E x amina tions for Honours (Intermed ia te in A rts a nd a ndfor Certifica tes of Higher Proficiency
— M. A . (Branch IV . and D . Litt. Crown8vo
, pp. x x . a nd 442 , cloth. 1888 . 7s.
BRITISH MUSEUu — LIST or PUBLICA TIONS or THE TRUSTEES or THE BRITISHMUSEUM, on applica tion.
BROWN .— THE D ERVISHES ; OR, ORIENTA L SPIRITUALISH . By Jobn P. Brown,
Secreta ry and Dragoman of the Lega tion of the United Sta tes of America a t ConstantinOple. Crown 8y o, pp.vi ii . and 4 16 , cloth, with 24 Illustra tions. 1868 . 1 4s.
BROWN.- SANSERIT PROSODr AND NUHERIGAL Sm ons E x PLA INED . By Cha rles
Phili Brown,M.R.A .S., A uthor of a Telugu D ictionary, Grammar, &G . , Professor
of Te ugu in the University of London. 8vo, pp.viii. and 56 , cloth. 1 869. 3s. 6d .
BROWN — Tm: ICELA NDIC D ISCOVERERS or AMERICA ; l or, Honour to whomHonour is Due . ByMa rie A . Brown, A uthor of Norway a s i t Is
,
”dtc. Crown
8vo, pp. vi ii . a nd 214,with E ight Pla tes, cloth. 1887. 7s. 6d .
BBOWNB — How To USE THE OPHTHALHOSCOPE ; be ing Elementary Instruction inOphthalmoscopy . A rra nged for the use of Students. By Edga r A . Browne , Sur
geon to the Liverpool Eye and Ear Infirma ry, Ate . Third Edition. Crown 8vo,pp. x i . and 108, with 35Figures, cloth. 1 887. 3s. 6d.
BROWNE .— A BANGALI PRIMER, in Roman Cha racter. ByJ. F. Browne , B.C.S.
Crown 8vo, pp. 32, cloth. 1881 . 2s.
BBOWNR— A HIND I PRIE ER IN ROE A N CHARACTER. ByJ. F. Browne , B.C.S .
Crown 8vo, pp . 36 , cloth. 1 882 . 2s. 6d .
BBOWNK — A N URIrA PRIHER IN ROMAN CHARACTER. By J. F. Browne , B.C.S.
Crown 8vo. pp. 32. cloth. 1882. 2s. 6d .
BROWNING SOCIETY? PAPERS — D emy 8vo, wrappers. 1881-84 . Part.L , p
1 16. 10s. Bibliogra phy of Robert Browning from 1833-81 . Pa rt IL , pp. 11011. Pa rt p 168. 10s. Part IV .
, pp. 1 48. los. Pa rt V . , pp. 104. 10s.
1 885- 86 . Pa rt VII" pp. 1 68 . 10s. Pa rt VIII . , pp. 176. 108.
BROWNING’S POEMS
, ILLUSTRATIONS To. “0 , boa rds. Parts I. and II . 10s. each.
BBUGMANN .— ELEHENTS or A COHPARA TIvE GRAMMAR or THE INDO-CRRHA N IO
LANG UA G ES . By K a rl Brugmann, Professor of Compa ra tive Philology in theQ 0 :ven uty of Leipzig. Tra nsla ted byJosepb Wright .PHD . VOL 1 . Introducti on a nd Phone tics. 8vo
, cloth, pp. x x . and 562 . 1 83.
1 2 A Ca ta logue of Importa ntWork s,BMW ELENEMS or SOUTH IND IAN PARE OCRAPHI' , from the Fourth to the
Sevente enth Century A .D . ,be ing a n Introduction to the Study of South Ind ian
Inscriptions and MSS. By A . C. Burnell. Second enla rged a nd im rovedEdition. 4 to, pp. x iv. and 1 48,Ma p and 35Pla tes, cloth. 1 878. £2 , 12s. 6
BURNELL — A CLA SSIEIED IND Ex To THE SANSRRIT MSS . IN THE PA LA CE AT
TANJORE. Prepared for theMadras Government. By A . C. Burne ll, Ph .D . ,
&c. 4 to, stiff wra pper. Part I . , pp. iv. — 80, Ved ic a nd Technica l Litera ture .
Part I I . , pp . iv. — 80, Philoso by and Law. Part III . , D rama , Epics, Puranss, andZ antras ; 1ndices. 1 879. OS . e ach.
BURTON.— HANDEOOE FOROVERLAND EXPEDITIONS being an English Ed ition of the
“Pra irie Traveller,” a Handbook for Overland Ex ed itions. \Vith Illustra tions
and Itinerari es of the Princi a l Routes between t e Mississippi and the Pacific,and aMa p. By Ca ta in R. Ma rcy (now G enera l and Chief of the Staff, A rmyof the Potomac) . Edited , with Notes, by Capta in Richa rd F . Burton. Crown
8vo, pp. 270, numerous VVoodcuts, Itinera ries, a ndMa p, cloth. 1 863. 6s. 6d.
BUTLER— E x VOTO : A N A CCOUNT or THE SA CROMONTE OR NEWJERUSA LEMA T
VARA LLO-SES IA . With some Notice of Ta ba chetti'
s rema ining ‘Vol‘k a t the
Sa nctua ry of Crea . By Samuel Butler, A uthor of A lps and Sanctua ries,”
Erewhon,"
&C. , &c. With Twenty-one Collotype Plates. Crown 8vo, pp. x iv.and 227, cloth. 1 888 . 108 . 6d .
BUTLER.— LUCK OR CUNNINC , A S THE MA IN MEANS or ORGA NICMOD IFICATION ?
By Samuel Butle r, A uthor of Life a nd Ha bit,”
Evolution, Old and New,
"
&c.
Crown 8vo, pp. x ii . and 328 , cloth. 1 886. 7S . 6d .
BUTLER.— EREWHON ; or, Over the Range . By Samuel Butler. E ighth Edition.
Crown 8vo, pp. x ii . and 244 , cloth . 1 887. 5s.
BUTLER — THE FA IRHA VEN. A Work i ii D efence of the Mira culous Element inOur Lord
‘
s Ministry upon Ea rth, both as against Ra tiona listic Impugners a nd
certa in Orthodox D e fend ers. By the la te John Pick a rd Owe n. With a Memoirof the A uthor by William Bick ersteth Owen . By Samuel Butler. Second Edition. D emy 8vo , pp. x . and 24 8
,cloth. 1873. 7s. 6d .
BUTLER.— LIPE A ND HA BIT. By Samuel Butler. Second Ed ition. Crown 8vo,
pp. x . and 308 , cloth. 1 878 . 7s. 6d .
BUTLER.
— GAVOTTES ,MINUETS , FL’
GUES, A ND OTHER SHORT PIECES FORTHE PIANO.
By S . Butler (Op . 1 . mus. and Henry Fe sting Jones (Op.
BUTLER.— EVOLUTION, OLD AN D NEW ; or, The Theories of Buffon, D r. Era smus
D arwin,a nd Lama rclr, a s compa red with tha t ofMr. Charle s D a rw in. By Samuel
Butler. Second Ed ition, with an A ppend i x a nd Inde x . Crown 8yo, pp. x ii. and430, cloth. 1 882. 10s. 6d .
BUTLER.— UNCONSCIOUSMEMORY A Compa rison between the Theory of D r. Ewa ld
Hering, Professor of Physiology a t the University of Pra gue , and the Philosophyof the Unconscious of D r. Edwa rdvon Ha rtmann. VVIth Tra nsla tions fromthese
A uthors, and Prelimina ry Che ters bea ring on“Life a nd Ha bit,
” “Evolution,
N ew a nd Old ,”and Mr. Cha r es D a rwin
’s ed ition of Dr. K rause
’s Era smus
D a rwin. By Samuel Butler. Crown 8vo, pp. viii . a nd 288 , cloth. 1 880. 7s. 6d .
BUTLER.— A LP8 A ND SA NCTUARIES or PIEDNONT A ND THE CA NTON TICINO. Pro
fusely Illustra ted by Cha rles Gogin, H . F. Jones, and the A uthor. By SamuelButler. Foolscap 4 to, pp . viii. and 376, cloth. 1882. 21 s.
BUTLER.— SELECTIONS EROH HIS PREVIOUS WORKS , with Remark s onMr. C . J.
Roma nes’recent work ,
“Menta l Evolution in A nima ls, a nd“A Psa lm of
Montre a l. By Samuel Butler. Crown 8vo, pp.viii. a nd 326 . cloth . 1 884 . 7s. 6d .
351 1 538 .— HOw E IN
'
H DA NCE . A Photograph with D escript’
xa e Xa tk evox eaa . BxB utler. Mounted on Card . 1886 . 3s .
Published by Triibner (ECo. 13
BUTLER — HUNGARIAN POEHS AND Q‘
A ELES POE ENGLISH REA D ERS . Sglected andTransla ted by E . D . Butler. of the BritishMuseum with Illustra tions by A . G .
Butler. Foolscap, pp. vi. and 88 , limp cloth. 1 877. 2s.
BUTLER.— THE LEGEND or THE WOND IIOUS HUNT. By John A rany. With a few
Miscellaneous Piece a nd Folk -Songs. Transla ted from the Magyar by E. D .
Butler,F Jrown 8vo, pp. vii i. and 70. Limp cloth. 2s. 6d.
BYRNE — GENERA I. PRINCIPLES OP THE STRUCTURE or LANGUA GE. By JamesByrne .M. A . , D e a n of Clonfert ; E x -Fellow of TrinitvCollege , Dublin. 2 vols.d emy 8vo, pp. x x x . and 504 , xviii . a nd 396 , cloth. 1 885. 368 .
BYRNB.— THE ORIG IN or GREEK, LA TIN , A ND GOTHIC ROOTS . ByJames Byrne,M.A . Demy 8vo, pp. viii . a nd 360, cloth. 1887. 18s.
CALCU'
I'
I‘
A REVIEW.— SELECTIONS PIIOH Nos. I .
- XXXVII. 5s. each.
CALDER — FOR HA PPINESS . By A le x ander Ca lder. Officer of the Order of theLegion of Honour, a nd A uthor of
“The Coming D emy 8vo, pp. iv.
a nd 340, cloth . 1 887. 7s. 6d .
CA LDWELL — A COMPARA TIVE CRA IIHAR or THE DRAVID IA N OR SOUTH INDI ANFAMILY or LA NGUA G ES . By the Rev. R. Ca ldwell, LL.D . A second , corrected ,and enla rged Ed ition. D emy 8vo, pp. 804 , cloth. 1 875.
CALLAWAY.— THE RELIGIOUS SYSTEMor THE AMA ZULU.
Pa rt I .—Unk ulunk ulu ; or, The Tra d ition of Crea tion as e x isting among the
Ama zulu a nd other Tribes of South A frica , in the ir own words, with a Translation into English, and Notes. By the Rev. Canon Ca llaway, M.D . 8vc, pp.
1 28 . sewed 1868 . 43.
Pa rt I I .- Ama tongo ; or, A ncestor-Worship as e x isting among the Amazulu, in
the ir own words. with a Transla tion into English, and Notes. By the Rev.Ca non Ca lla wa y,M. D . 8vo , pp. 127 , sewed . 1869. 4s.
Pa rt I I I .
— lzinyanga Zok ubula or, D ivina tion, a s e x isting among the Amazulu,in the ir own words , with a Transla tion into English, a nd Notes . By the Rev.Canon Ca lla wa y ,
MD . 8vc, pp. sewed . 1 870. 45.
Pa rt IV .— On Med ica lMa gic a nd W
'
itchcra ft. 8vo, pp. 40, sewed , Is. 6d .
CAMBRIDGE PHILOLOGICA I. SOCIETY (TRANSACTIONS ). Vol. L . from1872 — 1880.
8vo , pp. xvi - 420,wra ppe r. 1881 . 153. Vol. I I .
,for 1881 and 1882 . 8vo, pp.
viii .- 286 , wra pper. 1883. 128 .
CAMERINI . — L’ECO ITA LIANO a Pra ctical Guide to Ita lian Conversa tion. By E.
\Vith a Voca bulary. 1 2mo , pp. 98 , cloth. 1 860. 4s. 6d.
CANADA .— A G UID E BOOK TO THE DOMINION OI"CA NA D A . Conta ining Informa tion
for intend ing Se ttlers . with ma ny Illustra tions and Ma p. Published under theD irection of the G ove rnment of Canada . D emy 8vo, pp. x iv. - 138 , thick paper,sewed . 1885. 6d .
CANDID EXAMINATION OE THE ISM. By Physicns. Post 8vc, pp. xviii . and 1 98 ,cloth. 1 878 . 7s. 6 d.
CANTICUMCANTICORUM, re roduced in facsimile , fromthe Scriverius co y in theBritishMuseum. W
'
ith a n istorica l and Bibliogra phica l Introduction I. Pb .
Berjea u. Folio , pp. 36 , with 16 Ta bles of Illustra tions,vellum. 1 860. 52 , 2s.
CARNEGY.— NOTES ON THE LAND TENURES A ND REVENUE A SSESSMENTS or UPPER
IND IA . By P. Camegy. Crown 8vc , pp.viii . and 136 , and forms, cloth. 1 874 . 6s.
CATLm.— O-K EI-Z-PA . A Religious Ceremony ; and other Customs of theMa ndans.
By G eorge Ca tlin. ‘Vith 13 coloured Illustra tions. Sma ll “0 , pp.vi . and 52,cloth . 1 867 . 14s.
CATLIN .— THE L IP'I’ED AND SUESIDED ROCKS or h uma n, with their Influence on
the Oce anic. A tmospheric, and La nd Currents. and the D istribution of Ra ces.
By G eorge Ca tlin. With 2Maps. Cr. 8vo, pp. x ii. and 238 , cloth . 1870. 6s. 6d .
CATLIN . SHUT YOURMOUTH AND SAVE YOUR LIrE. By George Catlin, Authe t a t
Notes of Tr avels amongst the North AmericanXYIKXK BSP h e“ h e . W‘
xm‘a mxx
rktrs tione from D ra wings by the A uthor. E i ghth M i xer» ,
“mCrown 8ro, pp. 1 06 , cloth. 1882 . 2 s. 6d..
1 4 A Ca ta logue of Importa ntWork s,CAXTON.v-TERBIOGRAPHY AND TI POGEAPHT
‘OT. Se e BLADES .
W .— OUTLINE or THE EVOLUTION -PHILOSOPHT. By D r. W. E . Ca selles.
Transla ted from the French by the Rev. 0 . B. Frothingham. Crown 8vo, pp.
156, cloth . 1 875. 3s. 6d.
CBSNOLA .— SA LA IIINIA (Cyprus) . The History, Trea sures, a nd A ntiquities of S a
lamis in the Island of Cyprus. By A . Palms d i Cesnola , &c. W ith an
Introduction by S. Birch, LL D . Roya l 8vo, pp. x lviii. and 325, withupwa rds of 700 Illustra tions a ndMap of A ncient Cyprus, cloth. 1 882 . 31 8 . 6d .
CHALMBBS .— STRUCTURE OP CHINESE CHARA CTERS , under 300 Primary Forms
a fter the Shwoh-wan, 100 A .D . ,and the Phonetic St h-wan
,1833. By J.
Cha lmers.M.A . , LL .D . , A .B. D emy 8vo, pp . x . and 200, with two pla tes, limpcloth. 1 882 . 12s. 6d .
CHAMBERLA IN .— JAPA NESE GRAMMAR. See Trubner
’s Simplified Grammars.
CHAMBERLA IN — A ROHANI SED JA PA NESE REA D ER : Consisting of JapaneseA necdote s,Ma x ims, &c. , in E a sy Written Style ; with English Tra nsla tion andNotes. By B. H . Chamberla in, Professor of Ja pa nese and Philology in the Im
peria l Unive rsity of Tok yo, &c. Pa rt I . Japanese Tex t. Pa rt II . Transla tion.
art III . Notes. 1 2mo, pp. x lii. and 346 , cloth. 1 886 . 68 .
CHAMBERLAIN — THE CLA SS ICA L POETRr or THE JA PA NESE. By Basil Ha llChamberla in, A uthor of Ye igo Henk a k u, Ichira I
'
I . Post 8vo, pp . x ii . and 228,cloth. 1 880. 7s. 6d .
CHAPMAN .
- CHLOROPORH A ND OTHERA NE STHB'
I‘ICS The ir Histo and Use during Childbirth . By John Cha pma n.M.D . 8vo, pp. 51 , sewed . 859. Is.
CHAPMA N .
— D IARRH(EA A ND CHOLERA : Their N a ture , Origin, and Treatmentthrough the A gency of the N ervous System. By John Chapman, M.D . ,
8vo, pp. x ix . and 248, cloth. 7s. 6d .
CHAPMA N — MED ICA L CHARITY its A buses, and how to Remedy them. By JohnChapman,M.D . 8vo , pp. viii. a nd 108, cloth. 1 874 . 2s. 6d .
CHAPMAN.— SEA -SICENESS , A ND How To PREVENT IT : its N a ture and Successful
Tre a tment bymeans of the Spina l Ice Bag ; with the Genera l Principles of NeuroTherapeutics. ByJohn Chapman,M. D . , Second Edition.
8vc, pp.viii. and 1 1 2, cloth. 1 868. 3a .
CRAFTS
33-8 ON CHRISTIAN CATHOLICI'I'Y. By a Clergyman. 8vc, pp. 282 , cloth.
1 78 . 5s.
CHARITABALI (THE), or, Instructive Biography. By Isvarachandra V id a sa
ra . With a Vocabulary of a ll the Words occurring in the Te x t. By F .
glumhardt, Benga l Le cturer a t the University College , London. 1 2mo, pp. 174 ,
cloth. 1 884 . 5s. The Voca bula ry only, 2s. 6d .
OHARNOCK .— A G LOSSARY orTHE EssEx D IA LECT. ByRicha rd Stephen Chamock ,
Ph.D .,F .S.A . Fca p. , pp. x ii. and 64 , cloth. 1 880. 3s. 6d .
CHARNOCK — PRIENONINA ; or, The E tymology of the Principa l Christian N amesof G rea t Brita in and Ireland. By R. S . Charnock , Ph.D . , F.S.A . Crown 8vc,pp . xvi. and 1 28, cloth. 1 882. 6s.
CHATI'BBJBB. See PHILLIPS .
CHATTBRJL — THE BHA G A VA D G ITZ ; or. the Lord’s Lay. With Commentary and
Notes, a s well a s Re ferences to the Christia n Scriptures. Transla ted from theSansk rit for the benefit of those in sea rch of Spiritua l Li ht. By Mob ini M.
Cha tterji,M. A . Second Ed ition. Royal 8vo, pp. x ii . and 284 , c oth. 1888 . 10s. 6d.
CHAUCER SOCIETY.- Subscription, two gniness per annum. List of Publica tions
on applica tion.
m m .— A PAM-ENGLISH D ICTIONARY, with Sansk ri t Equivalents, and with
numerous Quota tions, E x tracts, and References. Compiled by Y» . (1 . Childers,b “Cey lon C. S . Imperia l 8vo, double columns, pp . ch ih 13“ fi nk
1 6 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,com -
3T“ POSITIVE PHILOSOPHT or A UGUgTE CONTE. Transla ted and condensedby Harri etMa rtineau. 2 vols. Second Ed ition. 8vo, cloth . Vol. I . , pp. x x iv.and 400 ; Vol. II. , pp. x iv. and 468 . 1 875. 258 .
CONTOPOULOS .- A LEx rcON orMODERN GREEK -ENGLISH A ND ENGLISH MODERN
GREEK . By N . Contopoulos. Pa rt I . Modern Gree k -English. Part I I. EnglishMod ern Gree k . 8vc, pp. 460 and 582, cloth. 1 877. 27s. '
CONWAY .
— V ERNER’
S LAW IN ITA LY : A n Essay in the History of the IndoEurope a a u Sibila nts. By R. Seymour Conway, G onville and Ca ius College ,Cambridge . W ith a D ia lectMa p Of Ita ly by E . Heawood , B. A .
, D emy8vo, pp. viii. and 1 20, cloth. 1887. 5s.
CONWAY.— THE SA CRED A NTHOLOGT : A Book of Ethnica l Scriptures. Collected
and Ed ited byMoncure D . Conway. Fifth Edition. D enny 8vc, pp. viii . and 480,cloth. 1876 . 123.
CONWAY.— IDOL8 A ND IDEA LS. With an Essay on Christianity . ByMoncure D .
Conwa y,M.A . Crown 8vc, pp. 352, cloth . 1 877. 4s.
CONWAY.— EN ERSON A T HOME A ND A BROA D . See English a nd Fore ign Philoso
phica l Libra ry.
CONWAY.-TRA VELS IN SOUTH K ENSINGTON . By M. D . Conway. Illustra ted .
8vc, pp . 234 . cloth . 1 882 . 1 2s.
CONTENTS —'l'hc South K ensingtonMuseum— Decora tive A rt and Architecture in England
— Bed ford Pa rk .
COOMARA SWAMY.—
'
I‘
HE D ATHAVANSA or, The History of the To oth Re lic ofG otama Buddha , in Pa li verse . Ed ited, with an English Transla tion,
b MutuCooma r a Swamy, F D emy 8vo, pp. 174 , cloth . 1 874 . 10s. 6d . lishTra nsla tion. W
'
ith N otes. Pp . 100. 69 .
COOMARA SWAMY.— SUTT A N IPATA ; or, D ia logues and D iscourses of Gotama
Buddha (2500 ye a rs Old ). Transla ted from the origina l Pa li. With Notes andIntroduction. ByMutu Coomara Swamy, Crown 8vo, pp. x x xvi. and1 60, cloth . 1 874 . 6s.
GOTTA — G EOLOGY A ND H ISTORY. A Popula r E x position Of a ll tha t is k nown Of the
Ea rth a nd its Inha bita nts in Pro-historicTimes. By B. Von Cotta,Prof. of Geo
logy a t the A ca demy'
ofMining, Fre iberg. 12mo, pp. iv. and 84 , cloth. 1865. 2s.
com - A SHORT INTRODUOTION To THE ORDINA ET PRA ERIT or THE SAsss T
DRA H A S. With a List Of Common Irregula r Prak ritWords. By E . B. Cowell,Professor of Sa nsk rit in the University of Cambrid e
, and Hon. LL D . Of the
Universi ty Of Ed inburgh. Crown 8vo, pp. 40, limp c oth. 1 875. 3s . 6d .
GOWELL.— PRA K RITA -PRA K A SA ; or, The Pra k rit Gramma r of Va rarucb i, with the
Commenta ry (Ma norama ) Of Bhamaha ; the first complete Edition Of the Origina lTe x t, w ithva rious Re a dings froma collection Of Six MSS . in the Bodle ian Librarya t Ox ford , and the Libra ries Of the R. A sia tic Socie ty and the Ea st Ind ia Housewith Notes, English Transla tion, Inde x Of Pra k ritWords, a nd an Ea sy Introduc
tion to Pra k rit G ramma r. By E . B. Cowell, New Ed ition,with Prefa ce , A dd i
tions, and Corrections. Second Issue . 8vc, pp. x x x i. and 204 , cloth. 1868. 1 4s.
COWBLL.— THE SARVA D A RSA NA SAMGBAHA . See Triibner
’s Orienta l Series.
COWLEY.— Pomls. By P. T. Cowley . D emy 8vo, pp. 104 , cloth. 1881 . 5s.
CRAIG .- THE IRISH LA ND LABOUR QUESTION , Illustra ted in the Histo of Ba la
hine and Co-Opera tive Fa rming. By E . T. Cra ig. Crown 8vc, pp. x ii. and 202 ,cloth. 1 682 . 2s. 6d . Wrappers, 2s.
CRANBROOK — CRED IBILIA ; or, D iscourses on Questions of Christia n Fa ith. Bythe Rev. James Cra nbrook , Edinburgh. Re issue. Post 8y o, pp. iv. and 190,cloth . 1 868 . 3S . 6 d.
M NBROOK — THE FOUNDERS or CHRISTIANITT ; or, D iscourses upon the Originof th e Chris tian Re lig ion. By the Rev. JamesCranb rook , Edinburgh. Post 8vc,PP x i i . a nd 33 1 868. 68 .
Published by 7312a <2 00. 1 7
CRAVEN.-ENGLISH HINDUSTA NI, I ND H INDUSTANI-ENGLISH D ICTIONARY. By
the Rev. C l aven,M.A . 1 8mo, pp. 430. cloth. 1881 . 3s. 6d .
CRAWFORD .— RECOLLECTIONS or TRAVEL IN NEW Z EA LA ND AND A USTRALIA . B
James Coutts Cra wford , F .G . S ResidentMagistra te , W'
ellington, &c. , A c. WitMa ps and Illustra tiop s. 8 t o, pp xvi. a nd 468 , cloth. 1880. 1 8s.
CROSLAND .— A PPARITIONS ; A n Essa y e x plana tory Of Old Fa cts and a New Theory.
TO which a re a dded Sk e tches and A dventures. By Newton Crosla nd. Crown 8vo,pp. viii. and 166
,cloth. 1873. 2s. 6d .
CROSLAND .— PITH : ESSAYS A ND SK ETCHES GRAVE A ND G AY, with some Verses
and Illustra tlons. By Newton Crosla nd . Crown 8vo, pp. 310,cloth. 1 88 1 . 5s.
CROSLAND .
— THB N EW PRINOIPIA or, The A stronomy of the Future . A n Essay
E x plana tory of a Ra tiona l S y stem of the Unive rse . By N . Crosla nd , A uthor ofPith,
”Ac Foo lsca p 8vc, pp. 88 . cloth limp elegant, gIlt edges. 1884 . 2s . 6d .
OSOMA DE KOROS .-LIFRor. See Trubner
’
s Orienta l Series.
CUNNINGHAM.
— THE A NCIENT G EOGRA PHY or IND IA . I. The Buddhist Period ,includ ing the Campa igns Of A le x a nder a nd the Travels of Hwen-Thsang.
A le x a nd er CunnInglIa In Ma jOI G e nera l, Roya l Engineers (Benga lRe tired). WiB
t‘13Ma ps. 8vo, pp . x x . a nd 590, cloth. 1870. 88 .
CUNNINGHAM.—
'
I‘
HE STUPA or (huma n : A Budd histMonument ornamented withnumerous Scul
gtuI es Illustra tive of Bu ddhist Legend a nd History In the Third
Century B. C y A Cunningham. C .S . I . , &c. Roya l 8vo, pp.vii i. and 1 44 , with57 Pla te s, cloth. 1 879. £3, 3s.
CUNNINGHAM A RCHE ILOG ICA L q URV IIJT or IND IA . Reports. By A . Cunningham,
C. S . I . ,.C I . E ,MIIjOI R.E . (Benga l Re tired ), D irector Genera l, A rchmo
logica l Survey Of Indra . ith nume rous Pla tes. Roya l 8vo, cloth, Vols. XIX"
XX . , XXI XX II a nd XXIII . 12s. each.
G enera l Ind e x to Vols. 1 . to XX III. Roya l 8vo, cloth. 12s.
CURR.— THE A USTRA LIA N RA CE : ITS ORIG IN, LANGUA GES . CUSTOE S, PLACE or
LA ND ING IN A USTRA LIA , A N D THE ROUTES DY WHICH IT SPREA D ITSELr OVER
THAT CI INTINENT . lty E dwa rd M. CuIr. A uthor Of Pure Sad d le Horses a ndRecollectIOIIs o f Sq ua ttlng in V ict oria .
”I II Four Volumes. Vols. I . , I I II I .
dem 8vo, pp. x x . a nd vi . a nd 501 , x . and 7
10, Vol. IV. la rge 4 to, pp. 46 .
Wit Ma p a nd I llustra tzons. Cloth . 1886 . £2 2
CUSHMAN .— CHARLOTTE CUSHHA N Her Letters
.
and Memories of her Life .
E dited by he r frIe IId ,Em'na S te bb ins. Squa re 8vo, pp. viii . and 308, cloth.
With Portra i t and Illustra tions. 1 879. 1 2s. 6d .
CUST.— LANGUA GES or THE E A ST IND IES. See Trilbner
’s Orienta l Series.
CUST.— LIN GUISTIC A ND ORIENTA L ES SAYS . Se e Trubner
'
s Oriental Series.
GUST — LA NGUA G ES or A PRICA . See Trubner’s Orienta l Seri es.
GUST.— MODER.N LA NGUA G ES or OCEA NIA . See Triibner
'
s Orienta l Se ries.
CUST.— PICI'URES or IND IA N I.IPE, S k e tched with the Pen from 1852 to 1881 . By
R. N . Cust , la te I .C. S . Hon. S ec. Roya l A sia tic Society. Crown 8vo, pp. x . and346 , cloth. “Ith
CUBT.— THE S HRINES OP LOURDES , Z ARA GOSSA , THE HOLY STA IRS AT Roux ,
THE HOLY HOUS E o r LoRETro A ND NA ZARETII . A ND ST. A NN AT JERUSA LEII ByR. N . Cust,Mmhe r Of Commit tees Of the ChurchMissiona ry Socie ty, a nd Britisha nd Fore ign B I IIle SOC le ty:
With Four A uto type s fromPhotographs Obta ined on
the spot. Fca II 8vc, pp. iv. a nd 63, stiff wrappers. 1 885. 2s.
DANA — A TEx T BOOK or G EO!.oov, designed for Schools and Acad emies . Bx X'a‘ us
D . D ana , LL I) , Profe ssor of G eology , k c ,atYshe N ames.“ Qm‘ \
8 7 0, pp . vi. and354 , cloth. 1876 . 10s.
1 8 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,DANA .
— MANUAL or GEOLOGY, trea ting of the Principles of the Science ,with specialReference to America n Geologica l History ; for the use Of Colleges, A ca demics,and Schools of Science . By James D . D ana , LL.D . Illustra ted by a Chart Of the
World , and overOne Thousand Figures. 8vo, pp. xvi. and 800, and Chart, cl. 2 1s.
DANA — THE GEOLOG ICA L STORY BRIEELY TOLD . A n Introduction to Geolo for
the G ene ra l Rea der and for Beginners in the Science . By J. D . D ana , D .
Illustra te d . 12mo, pp. x i i. and 264 , Cloth . 78 . 6d .
DANA .
— A SYSTEMOFMINERA LOUY. D escriptive Minera logy. comprising the mostRecent D iscoveries. By
‘J. D . D ana , a ided by G . J. Brush. Fifth E dition, re
written a nd enla rged , and illustra ted with upwards Of 600Woodcuts, with three
A ppend ix es a nd Corrections. Roya l 8vc, pp. x lvi ii. and 892 , cloth. £2 , 2s.
DANA .— A TEXT BOOK OFMINERALOGY. \Vith an Ex tended Treatise on Crysta llo
phy and Physica lMinera logy. By E . S . D ana , on the Pla n a nd with the
O~Opera tion of ProfessorJ. D . D ana . Third Ed ition,revised. Over 800Wood
cuts a nd 1 Coloured Pla te . 8vc, pp.viii . and 486 , cloth. 1 879. 15s.
DANA — MANUA L OPMINERA LOGY A ND PETROGRAPHY ; Conta ining the ElementsOf the Science OfMinera ls and Rock s, for the Use Of the Practica lMinera logist andG eologist, and for Instruction in Schools and Colleges. By J. D . D a na . FourthEdi tion, revised and enla rged . Illustra ted by numerous Woodcuts. Crown
8vo, pp. x . and 51 8, cloth. 1 887. 8s. 6
DARWIN . CHARLES D ARWI N : A Paper contributed to the Transactions of the
Shropshire A rchaeologica l Society. By Edwa rd VVOOda ll. With Portra it andIllustra tions. Post 8 yo , pp. iv.— 64 , cloth. 1 884 . 3s. 6d.
DATES A ND D ATA RELATING TO RELIGIOUS A NTHROPOLOGY A ND BIBLIGAL ARCHI
OLOGY. (Primasva l Period . ) 8vo, pp.vi ii . and 1 06 , cloth. 1 876 . 58 .
DAVID8 .— BUDDHIST BIRTH STORIES. See Triibner
’
s Orienta l Series.
DAVIES — HINDUPHILOSOPHY. 2vols . Se e Trubncr'
s Orienta l Series.
DAVIS — N ARRATIVE or THE NORTH POLA R E x PED ITION . U.S . SHIP Pola ris, Ca
ta in Cha rles Fra ncis Ha ll Command ing. BvRea r-A dmira l C. H . D avis, U.S .
Third Edition. With numerous Ste el a nd Wood Engravings, Photolithogra phs,andMaps. 4to, pp. 696 , cloth. 1 88 1 . £1 , 8s.
DAY.
— THE PREHISTOEIO USE or IRON A ND STEEL ; with Observa tions on certa inma tter a ncillary thereto . By St. John V . D ay, C.E . , Ate. 8vo, pp.
x x iv. a nd 278 , cloth. 1877 . 1 28 .
DEATH — THE BEER OP THE BIBLE (nmUQ— E A CHHETZETH) ONE OP THE
HITHERTO UNK NOWN LEAVENS or E x oDUS . (A Confirma tion of Biblical
A ccura cy) . \Vith a V isit to a n A rab Brewery. N otes on the Orienta l FermentProd ucts . Ste ,
and Ma p Of the Routes of the Ex odus. With D escription Of thed ifferent A uthors
’
Contentions. ByJames D ea th,formerly of the Ca iro Brewery .
Crown 8vo, pp. viii. a nd 1 79, cloth. 1 887. (is.
DE FLANDRE — MONOGRA IIIS OI"THREE ORMORE LETTERS , D ES IGNED AND DRAWNON STONE . By C. D e Fla ndre , F.S. A . Scot. , Edinburgh. With Ind ices. showingthe pla ce and style or period Of everyMonogram, a nd of ea ch ind ividua l Le tte r.
4 to, 42 Pla tes, cloth. 1 880. La rge pa per, £7, 7s. sma ll pa per, £3, 3s.
DELBRUCK .— INTRODUCTION TO THE STUD Y OF LA NGUA GE : A Critica l Survey of the
History andMethods Of Com a ra tive Philology of the IndO-Europe a n Languages.
By B . D e lbri ick . A uthorise Transla tion, with a Pre fa ce by the A uthor. 8vo,pp. 156 , cloth. 1 882 . OS.
DELBPIERRR— HISTOIRE I .I'IT ERA IRE DES FOUS. Par Octave D elepierre. Crown8 ro, pp . 1 84 , cloth. 1860. 58.
DM E RRE .— MAOA RONEANA A NDRA ; overumNouveaux Mélanges de LitteratureMa ca roni na . Par Octave D elepierre . Small 4to , pp . 1 80 ,
Whittingh i m
, and a ndsomely bound in the c burghe style . 1352 . “is . SO.
20 A Ca ta logue of Important Work s,DOUGLAflc— THE QUEEN or THE B ID ISLE : a n A llegory of Life and A rt. AndLOYE
’S I
'ERVEES ITT ; or, Bros and A nteros. A D rama . By Evelyn D ougla s.
Fca p . 8vo pp . fl it - 258 . cloth. 1885. 5s.
DOWBON .— D ICTIONARY or H INDUMYTHOLOGY, Arc. See Triibner
'
s Orienta l Se ries.
DOW80N.— A GRA E E ARor THE URDUOR HINDUSTANI LANGUAG E. By John D ow
son,
Professor of Hind ii sti ni , Sta ff Collegef Sanclhurst. SecondEd ition. Crown 8y o, pp. xvi. and 264 , with 8 Pla tes, cloth. 1887. 108 . 6d.
DOWSON.— A HINDUSTANI E x ERCISE BOOE ; conta ining a Series of Pa ssages and
Ex tmcts a da pted for Transla tion into Hindfistfini. By John D owson,M.R.A .
Crown 8vo, pp. 100, limp cloth. 1872. 2s. 6d .
DUK A .— THE LIFE A ND TRA VELS or A LEx A ND ER OSONA DE K OROS : A Biogra phy,
compiled ch ie fly fr omhitherto Unpublished D a ta ; lt a Brief Notice of eachof his PublIsbed“fork s a nd E ssa ys, a s well a s of his stillE x tantMa nuscripts. ByTheodore a a , M.D Eng. ; Surgeon-Ma jor, H. M. Benga lMedica lS ervice
,Re tire d , &c. Post 8vo, with Portra it, pp. x ii - 234 . cloth. 1885. 9s.
UK A — A N ESS A Y ON THE BRAHUI GRAMMA R. By D r. Theodore D uk a ,D emy 8vo, pp. 78 . paper. 1 887. 38 . 6d .
DUSAR.
— A GR“(MA Ror THE G ERMA N LA NGUAG E ; with E x ercises. By P. FriedrichD usa r, F i rst G ermanMa ster in theMilita rvD e a rtment of CheltenhamCollege .
Second Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 208. c oth. 1 879. 43. 6d .
DUSAR.
— A GRA NE ATICAL COURSE or THE G ERH AN LA NGUAGE . By P. FriedrichD usa r. Third Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. x . and 134, cloth. 1883. 3s. 6d .
DYMOCK .— THE VEG ETA BLE MATERIA MED ICA or WESTERN IND IA . By W .
Dymock , Surgeon-Ma jor Bomba y A rmy, &c. Second Ed ition,revised a nd en
la rge d . 8vo, Pa rt I . , pp . 160 ; Pa rt IL , pp. 207 ; Part pp. 200 ; Pa rt
pp. 200 ; wra ppe rs , 53. ea ch.
DYMOND and NICHOLS — PRA CTICA L VA LUE OF CHRISTIANITY. See N ICHOLS .
EARLY ENGLISH TEXT SOCIETY.— Subscription, one guinea per a nnum. E x tra
Series. Suhscri Itions— Sma ll pa per, one guinea ; la rge paper, two guinea s, perannum. List 0 publica tions on applica tion.
BASTWICK — K HIRA D A rnoz (the I llumina tor of the Understand ing). ByMaulaviHa fizu
‘
d -d in. The Hindnstani Te x t, ca re fully revised with Notes, Critica l and .
E x planatory. By E . B. Eastwick , &c. Imp. 8vo, pp. x iv. and 319, cloth .
1 867 . as.
BASTWICK — THE GULISTAN . See Trubner’s Orienta l Series.
ECHO(DEUTSCHas). THE G ERMAN ECHO. A Fa ithfulMirror of German Conversa tion. By Ludwig Wolfram. lVith a Vocabulary. By Henry P. Sk elton.
Po~t 8vo, pp. 130 and 70, cloth. 1 863. 3s.
ECHOPRANQAIS . A PRACTICA L GUID E TO CoNvERSATION. By Fr. de la Fruston.
With a comple te Voca bula ry. By A nthonyMaw Border. Post 8vo, pp. 120 and72 , cloth. 1860. 3s.
BOOITALIANO A PRACTICAL GUID E TO ITA LIA N CONVERSATION. By EugeneCamerini. With a complete Voca bulary. By Henry P. S k e lton. Post 8vo, pp .
vi. , 1 28 , and 98 . cloth . 1860. 4s. 6d .
300 DE MA DRID . THE ECHO orMADRID . A Pra ctica l Guide to Spanish Conversa tion. By J. E . Ha rtzenbusch and Henry Lemming. With a completeVoca bula ry ,
conta ining copious E x plana tory Rema rk s. By Henry Lemming.
Post 8vo, pp . x ii . , 144 . and 83, cloth. 1 860. 5s.
BDGRBN .— SA NSKRIT GRAME AR. See Triibner
'
s Collection.
BDK IN8 . CHINA'
S PLACE IN PHILOLOGY . A n a ttempt to show tha t the Lan agesoi Europe a nd A sia have a common origin. By the Rev. Joseph Edk ins. gown8vo, pp . x x iii. and 403, cloth. 1 871 . 10s. 6d .
E K IA'
E .—
'
I'
HE EVOLUTION OE THE CHINESE LANGUA GE. A s Ex emplifying theOrig in a nd Growth of Human Spe ech . By the Rev. ima m . D emy 8vo,PP . x v. a nd 95. Wi th Table . Cloth. 1 888 . As. 66 .
Published by Triibner d’
: 00.
EDK INS .— I IITRODUCTION To THE STIfiir or THE CHINESE CHARACTERS. By-J. Ed k ins,
D .D . , Pek ing, China . Roya l 8vc, pp. 340, pa per boa rds. 1876. lEDK INS .
— RELIGION IN CHINA . See English and Foreign Philosophical Library,‘
Vol. VlII . , or Trtibner’s Orienta l Series.
EDK INS.— CHI I~ESE B DDHISH. See Triibner
’s Orienta l Series.
EDMONDS.— GREER A YS , IDI LLS , LEGENDS , Are . A Se lection fromRecent and
Contempora ry Poe ts. TIa nsla ted by E. M. Edmonds. With Introduction a ndNote s. Revised a nd Enla rged Edition. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi. a nd 288. Cloth,63. 6d . Vellum,
10s. 6d . 1886 .
EDMUNDSON.— MILTON A ND VONDEL : a Curiosity Of Litera ture . By G eorge
E dmundson, M. A . , La te Fe llow a nd Tutor Of Bra senose C ollege, Ox ford , V ica r ofNortholt,Midd lese x . Crown 8vo, pp. vi. and 224 . cloth. 1 885. 6a .
EDWARDS.— MEIIOIRS or LIBRA RIES , togetherwith a Practica l Handbook of Libra ry
Economy. By Edwa rd E dwa r ds. Numerous Illustra tions. 2vols. rova l8vo, cloth.
Vol. i . pp. x xviii . a nd 84 1 ; Vol. ii . p. x x xvi. a nd 1 104 . 1859. ST, 8s.
la rge pa per, impe ria l 8vo, c oth. £4 , 4s.
EDWARDS — CHA PTERS or THE B IOGRA PHICA L HISTORY or THE FRENCH A CADm .
1 629- 1863. lVith a n A pend ix rela ting to the Unpublished Chronicle Liber deHyda .
”By Edwa rd wa r ds. 8vo, pp. 1 80, Cloth. 1864 . 6s.la rge pa per, roya l 8vo. 10s 6d .
EDWARDS.— L IBRA RIE8 AND FOUNDERS or LIBRARIES. By Edward Edwards. 8vo,
pp. x xx . and 506 , cloth. 1865. 1 8s.
D IT‘I‘
O, la rge pa r, imperia l 8vo, cloth. £1 , 10s.
EDWARDS.— FREE OWN LIBRARIES , the ir Forma tion,Management, and History in
Bri ta in, France , G ermany, and Ameri ca . Together with Brief Notices of BookCollectors, a nd of the respective Places Of D eposit Of the ir Surviving Collections.
By Edwa rd Edwa rds. 8vo, pp. xvi . and 634 , cloth. 1 869 21s.
EDWARDS — LIVES or THE FOUND ERS or THE BRITISHMUSEUH,with Notices of its
Chief A ugmentors and other Benefa ctors. 1570- 1 870. By Ed wa rd Edwa rds.With Illustra tions and Plans. 2vols. 8vo, pp . x ii . and 780, cloth. 1870. 3os.
EDWARDES .— See English a nd Fore ign Philosophica l Libra ry , Vol. XVII.
EGER.— TECHNOLOG ICA L D ICTIONARY IN THE ENGLISH A ND G ERMA N LANGUA Gm.
Ed ited by GustavEger, Professor of the Polytechnic School Of D armsta d t. a ndSworn Tra nsla tor of the G rand D ucnl Mini steria l D epa rtments. Technica llyRevised a nd Enla rged by Otto Bra ndes, Chemist. Twovols. , roya l 8vo, pp. viii.and 712 , and pp . vi i i. and 970, cloth. 1884 . £1 . 7s.
EGER and CRIME — A n Early English Romance . Ed ited from Bishop Percy’s
FolioManuscripts , a bout 1650 ByJ. \V. Ha les, Fellow of Christ’
s
College , Cambrid e , a nd F. J. Furniva ll, M. A . ,of Trinity Ha ll, Cambridge . 4 to,
large paper, ha lfhound , Rox burghe style , pp. 64 . 1867 . 10s. 6d .
EGERTON.- SUSSEx FOLK AND SUSSE x WA TS . Stray Stud ies in the Wea lden For
ma tion Of Huma n Na ture B the Rev. J. Cok er Egerton,M. A . , Rector Of Burwa sh. Crown 8vo , pp. 140
,c oth. 1884 . 2s.
momma — Se e A UCTORES S ANSERITI , Vols. IV. and V .
EGYPT EXPLORATION FUNDTHE STORE-CITY or PITNOR, and the Route of the E x odus. By Edouard N aville.
Th ird Ed ition. 4to , pp. viii . and 32 , with Thirteen Pla tes a nd Two Maps,boards. 1887. 25s.
TAN IS . Pa rt I . , 1883-84 . By W.M. Flinders Petrie . A uthor Of Pyramids a ndTemples Of G izeh.
” With 19 Pla t es a nd Plans. Roy a l 4 to, pp. viii. a nd 64 ,boa rds. 1885. 25s.
TA NIS . Pa rt I I . Nebesha , D aphne (Tahpenes). By W. M. Flinders Petrieand F. LL. G rifi th . Roya l4 to, pp.viii a nd 164. Six ty
-fourPla tes, boards. 25s.NAUKRA 'I
‘IS . I. By \V.M. Flinders Petrie , with Chapters by Cecil Smith, E . A .
gi
gging
,and B. V . Head . Roya l 4 to, pp . viii . and Wfi . “we Y\\m .
as.
Gow n . By E . NAm E. With 1 1 Plates. Roy .
W "i“
22 A Ca talogue of Importa ntWorks,Ramon— sm og READER : With Notes and Vocabulary. By H. W. Ehrlich.
1 2mo, pp. viii. a nd 125, limp cloth. 1 877. In. 6d .
EITHL.— BUDDHISM: Its Historica l, Theoretica l, and Popula r A spects. In Three
Lecture s. By E . J. Eitel, MA ,Ph.D . Third Revised'Edition. Demy 8ro,
pp. x .- 146 . 1 884. 5s.
EITEL .— FENO-SBUI ; or, The Rudiments of Na tural Scien
'
ce in China . By E . J.
Eitel,M.A . , Ph .D . Roya l 8vo, pp. vi . and 84 , sewed . 1 873. 60.
BITE — HANDBOOK TORTHE STUDENT or Gunmen BUDDHISI . By the Rev. E . J.
Eitel, of the LondonMi ssionary Society . Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 224 , cloth .
1870. 1 8s.
ELLIOT.— Mrmoms ON THE Hi sTORr, FOLK -DORE , A ND D ISTRIBUTION orm Ram
or THE NOBTH-WESTERN fi rmw are or IND IA . By the la te Sir Hen M.
K .C.B. Edited , revised ,and re arranged by John Beames, &c. In
gem
6
8m, pp. x x . ,370, and 396 , with 3large coloured foldingMaps, cloth.
1 1 s .
ELLIOT — THE HISTORY or IND IA ,a s told by its own Historians. TheMuhammsd an
Period . Edited fromthe Posthumous Papers of the la te Sir H.M. Elliot,East Ind ia Company's Benga l Civil Service . Revised and continued by ProfessorJohn D owson, Sta ff College , Sandhurst. 8y o. Vol . L — Vol. IL ,
pp. x . and 580,cloth. V ol. pp . x ii . and 627, cloth. 24s.
— Vol. IV . ,
p. x ii. and 564 , cloth. 1 8 72 . 21s.— Vol. V x . and 576 , cloth. 1 873.
ls.— Vol. VL , pp. viii. 574 , cloth. 2ls.
— Vol. V pp. viii -574 . 1877 . 21s.Vol. VI II pp. x x x i i. - 4 44 . lVith Biogra hica l. Geographica l, and Genera lIndex . 1877 . 24s. Complete sets, £8 . 8e . 01s. I . a nd 1 1 . not sold sepa ra tely.
ELLIS.— Sona cx s or m ETRUSCA N AND Ba sque LA NG UA GES . By Robert Ellis.
B.D la te Fe llow of St. John’s College , Cambridge . Pa rt I . Etruscan Numera ls.
Pa rt II . The Etrusca n Language . Pa rt III . Cauca sian Chara cter of the BasqueVerb . D emy 8vo, pp. viii. and 166, cloth. 1 886 . 7s. 6d .
ELLIS .— ETRUSCA N NUMERA LS. By Robert E llis, B.D la te Fellow of St. John'
s
College , Cambridge . 8vo, pp.52 , sewed . 1876 . 2s. 6d .
ELI — Farmer! AND GTRNA N SOOtA LTsN INMODERN Tums. By R. T. Ely . Ph.D . ,
A ssocia te Professor of Politica l Economy in the Johns Hopk ins University, Ba ltimore ; and Le cturer on Politica l Economy in CornellUniversity, Itha ca , N . Y.Crown 8vo. pp. viii - 274 , cloth. 1 884 . 3s. 6d .
EMERSON AT Hons: A ND A BROA D . See English and Foreign Philosophical Library.
EMERSON — IND IAN MYTHS ; or, Legends, Tra d itions, a nd Symbols of the A bori
gines of Ame rica , compa red with those of other Countries, including Hindostan,
Egypt, Persia , ’
A ss ria,a nd China . By Ellen Russell Emerson. Illustra ted .
Post 8vo , pp. viii. 78 . cloth. 1884 . £1 , l s.
ENGLISH DIALECT SOCIETY.— Subscription, 10s. 6d . per annum. List of publica
tions On applica tion.
ENGLISH AND FOREIGN PHILOSOPHICAL LIBRARY (THE).Post 8vo, cloth, uniformly bound.
HISTORY Ol'MATERIA LISH . a nd Criticism Of its present Importance. By Professor F. A . Lange . A uthorised Transla tion from the G erman b Ernest C.
Thoma s. In thre evolumes Vol. I . Second Ed ition, pp. 350. 1 8 8. 10s. 6d .
—
88
V0 1. viii. and 398. 1 880. 10s. 6d .— Vol. I IL , pp. viii. and 376.
l 1 .
NA
gggan
l
l
a
awsa
anEssa y in Ethics. By Edith Simcox . Second Edition. Pp.366.I s.
THE Cant o or CHRISTENDOM; its Foundations contra sted with Superstructure .
By W R. G reg. E ighth Ed ition, with a New Introduction. In two volumes,pp. cx iv.- l54 andvi . - 282 . 1 883. 15s.
Gora n '
s or THE HisTORr or RELIGION To THE SPREAD or m Ue rRsAT.RE LIGIONS. By Prof. C. P. Tiele. Translated from the D utch byJ. EstlinCa rp ente r, M.A . , with the author
’s assistance . You thmiwm Be . 1 1 . and
250. 1 888 . 7s. 6d.
24 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,ENGLISH AND FOREIGN PHILOSOPHICAL LsRRARr— contiuua t.
LB SINO : His Life and Writings. By James Sime , M.A . Second Edition.
2 vols . , pp. x x ii. and 328 , a nd xvi. and 358 , with portra its. 1879. 21s.
A N A CCOUNT or TIIE POLYNES IA N RA CE : its Origin a nd Migra tions, and the
A ncient History of the Hawa iian People to the T imes Of K amehameha I .
By A braham Fornand er, Circuit Judge of the Isla nd ofMaui , H . I. Vol.
pp. xvi . a nd 248 . 1877 . 7s. 6 d. Vol. II . . pp. viii. and 400, cloth. 1880.
100. 6 d. Vol. pp . x i i . a nd 292 . 1885. 9s.
ORIENTA L RELIG IONS , and the ir Re la tion to Universa l Religion— India BySamuel Johnson. In 2 vols. , pp. viii. and 408 ; vi ii . a nd 402. 1 879. 21 a
HRSIB ES .— FA CS IH ILROF AMA NUSCRIPT supposed to have been found in an Egyp
tian Tomb by the English sold iers la st yea r. Roya l 8vo , in ragged ca nva s covers,
with string b ind ing, with d ila pida te d edges just a s d iscovered ). 1884 . 6 . 6d .
EYTON.— DOHmD Ar STUD IES A N A NA LYSIS A ND D IG EST or TRE STA FFORD SHIRI
SURVEY. Trea ting of theMethod of Domesda y in its Rela tion to S ta ffordshire .
Etc. By the Rev. R. IV. Eyton. 4 to, pp. vii. a nd 135, cloth. 188 1 . £1 , 1 s.
PABER.— THEMIND OPMENCIUS . Se e Truliner
'
s Oi ie i i tnl Series.
FALKB.— A RT IN THE HOUSE. Historica l, Critica l, and E sthetica l Studies on the
D ecora tion and Furnishing of the Dwelling. BvJ. vnn Pailhe . Tra nsla ted a n!Ed ited ,
with Notes, by C. C. Perk ins, M. A . Roy a l 8vo, pp. x x x .-356, cloth.
Coloured Frontispiece , 60 Pla te s, and ove r 150 Illustra tions. 1 87
FARLEY.— EGvPT, CYPRUS , AND A S IATIC TURKEY. By J . L. Fa rley. author of “Tho
Resources Of Turk ey, ” &c. 8vo, pp. xvi. and 270, cloth gilt. 1 878. 10s. 6d .
PAUSBOLL.— See JA TA KA .
PEATHERMA N.— TRE SOCIA L H ISTORY or THE RA CES orMANNIND . By A . Fea the r
man. D emy 8vo. cloth V ol. I. THE: N IGRITIA NS . Pp. x xvi. a nd 800. 1885.
£1 , l1 s . 6d . Vol. II . PAPUO A ND MA LA YO MELA NES IA NS. Pp. xviii . and 508 .
1 885. £1. 5s. Vol. I II . OCEA NOMELA NES IA NS . Pp. x x x ii. a nd 420. 1888 .
£1 , 58 . Vol. V . THE A RAMB ANS . Pp. xvii . a nd 664 . 1881 . £1 , 1 8 .
FERGUSSON.
— A RCH1EOLOGY IN INDI A . \Vith especia l re ference to the work s ofBa bu Ra jendr ala la Mitra . By Jame s Fergussnn. LL ,DV .
-P &c. D emy 8vo, pp . 1 16 , with Illustra tions, sewed . 1 884 . 5s.
FERGUSSON .— T II E TEMPLE or DIANA AT EPIIESUS. With Especia l Re ference toMr. Wood
'
s D iscoveries of its Rema ins. By James F ergusson, C. I .ELL.D . , k c. D emy 4to, pp. 24 , w ith Pla n, cloth. 1883. 5s.
FERGUSSON a nd BURGESS.— THE CA VE TEMPLES or IND I A . By James Fergusson,
D .C . L., F.R. S . , a nd James Burgess, Impl. 8vo, pp . x x . and 536 , with
98 Pla te s. ha lf bound . 1880. £2 . 2s.
FERGUSSON.— CII INESE RES EARCHER. First Pa rt. Chinese Chronology andCycles. By Thoma s Fergusson, Member Of the North China Bra nch of the
Roya l A siatic Society. (‘rown 8vo, pp.viii . and 274 , sewed . 1 881 . 10s. 6d .
H URRBAOH.— TRE ESSENCE or CHRISTIANITY. See English and Foreign Philo
sophica l Libra ry.
PICH'
I'B.
— J. G . FICR'
I‘
E’S POPULAR 1VORK S The N a ture of the Schola r— The Voca
tion ofMan— The Doctrine ofReligion W'ith a Memoir by lVilliamSmith, LL.D .
D emy 8vo , pp . viii . a nd 564 , cloth. 1 873. l5a .
“CRIB — POPULARWORKS . Two vcls. See The English and Foreign Philoso
phica l Libr ary.
HgHTBu- THE SCIENCE OF RIGHTS . See The English a nd Fore ign Philosophica l
i ira ry.
f rom — CE A RA CTERISTICS or THE PRESENT A GE. By J. G Fichte . Translatedfrom the G e rma n by IV. Smith. Post 8vo . pp. x i. and 27 1 . cloth. 1847 . 6s.
17 031 3.-Ms'uom or JOHANN GOTT IJRR FIGHTS . B3wann a S a faris. Second
E d i ti on. Post 8va , pp . 1 68 , cloth .t 1 848. 4a .
Published by Tli iba er d: 00.
FIGHTS — ON THE N ATURE OT THEW OLAR, AND ITS By JohannGottlieb Fichte . Transla ted from the G erman by 1l
'
illiamSmith. Second Ed ition. Post 8vo , pp. vii. and 131 . cloth. 1 848 . 3s.
I’ICB'I‘R— N Ew E x posiTION or THE SCIENCE OT K NOWLEDGE. By J. G . Fichte .
Transla te d fromthe G erma n by A . E . K ra ger. 8vo , pp.vi. and 182 , cloth . 1 869. 6s.
FIELD -OUTLINES or A N INTERNATIONA L CODE . By D avid Dudley Field . Second
Ed ition. Roya l 8ve , pp. ii i. and 7 12, sheep. 1876 . £2.
PIGANIERE.— ELVA : A STORY OF THE D ARE A GES . By V iscount do Figaniére ,
St. Anne ,M. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. a nd 1 94 , cloth. 1 878. 2s.
YINN .— PERS IA N FOR TRA VELLERS . By A le x ander Finn, &c E BJI .
Consul a t Re sht. Oblong 32nIO. pp. x x ii. - 232, cloth. 1 884 . 50.
FIBRE — THE UNSREN WORLD , a nd other Essa ys. By John Fisk e .M.A LL .B .
Crown 8ve , pp. 350. 1 876 . 10s .
FIBER— MYTHS A ND MYTH-MAK ERS ; Old Ta les and Superstitions, interpre ted byCompa ra tiveMythology. By John Fisk e ,M.A LL.B. , A ssista nt Libra rian. and
la te Led ure r on Philosophy a t Ha rva rd University. Crown 8y o, pp. 260, cloth .
1 873. 10s.
FITZGERALD .— A USTRA LIANORCHID S . ByR. D . Fitzgera ld , F .L .S . Folio .
— Part I .
7 Pla tes — Pa rt I I . 10 Pla tes .
— Pa rt II I. 10 Pla tes.— Psrt IV . 10 Pla te s.
Pa rt V . 10 Pla tes.
— Pa rt V I . 10 Pla te s. Ea ch Pa rt, Coloured 2 1s. ; 1 la in, 108 . 6d .
— Pa rt VII . 10 Pla tes. Vol lI . , Pa rt I. 10Pla te s. Ea ch, Coloured , 25s.
FITZGERALD — A N ESS AY ON THE PHILOSOPHY OP Sew -CONSCIOUSNESS . Comprising a n A na lysis of Re a son a nd the Ra tiona le Of Love . By P. F . Fitzgera ld.
D emy 8vo. pp. xvi. a nd 196, cloth . 1882. 5s.
FITZGERALD .- A TREATISE ON THE PRINCIPLE OF SUTTICIENT REASON . A Psycho
log ica l Theory Oi Rea soning. showing the Rela tivity Of Thought to the Think er,of Recognition to Cognition, the Id e ntity of Pre senta tion and Repre senta tion, of
Perception a nd A ppe rception. ByMrs. P. F . Fitzgera ld. D emy 8ve , cloth, pp .
xvi. a nd 4 10. 1 888 . 6s.
PORJB'I'r.
- E x TERNA L EVID ENCES OT CHRISTIA NITY. By E. H. Forjett. 8vo, pp.
1 1 4 , cloth. 1 874 . 2s. 6d .
PORNANDER.
— THE POLYNES IA N RACE. See English and Foreign Philosophica l
Libra ry, E x tra Series.
FORSTER.
-POLITICA L PRmENTHENTS . By W illiam Forster. A gent-Genera l for
New SouthWa les. Crown 8vo, pp. 122, Cloth . 1 8 7 8. 4 s. 6d .
POW ERS — THE D A YA BHA GA , the La w Of Inhe rit ance Of the Sara sva ti Vilnas.The Origina l Sa nsk rit Te x t. with Tra nsla tion by the Rev. Thos. Foulk es,
F Fe llow of the University ofMadra s, &c. Demy 8vo, pp.
x xvi . and 1 94— 162 , cloth. 1 88 1 . 10s. 6d .
M EIE R — THE GREAT BATTLES or 1 870, A ND BLOOEA DE orMErz. By HenryBowles Fra nk lyn, LL.D .
, A uthor Of Navies Of the Minor Powers, ” “Milita ry&c. With la rge Fold ing Map, Sk etchMa p, and Frontispiece . 8ve
,
cloth, pp. x x iii. and 318. 1887 . 153.
PRAm m.— OUTLINES orMILITARY LAw
,AND THE LAWS or EvID ENCE. By B . B.
Frank lyn, LL B. Crown 1 6mO, pp. viii. and 152, cloth. 1 874 . 3s. 6d .
FREEMAN — ON SPEECH FORMA TION A S THE BASIS TORTRUE SPELLING . By HenryFre ema n. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 88, cloth. 1 885. 3s. 6d .
FREEMAN — LECTURES TO A E ERICA N A UDIENCES. By E. A . Freeman.
LL.D . , Honora ry Fellow Of Trinity College , Ox ford . I . The English People in
its Three Home s. I I . The Pra ctica l Be a rings Of G enera l European History.
Post 8vo. pp. VlIl. — 454 , cloth. 1 883. 80 . 6d .
FRIEDRICH. PROGRESSIVE Grams RE ADER, with mme \ \ t\
By P. Friedrich. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 66 , cloth " XSSS . “SA .
26 A Ca ta logue of Important Works,mgm E — A GRA NNATIOA I. COURSE or fi x GERIIA N LANGUAGE. See underUSAR.
PRIEDRICE — A GRA N E AR or THE GERE AN LANGUAGE, WITH Ex EEOISES. See
under DUSAR.
PRIBDLANDBR.— See the English and Fore ign Philosophical Library.
FRE E .— LIPE OP G IORDANO BRUNO, THE NOLA N. By I. Frith. Revised by
Professor Moriz Carriers. Post 8vc, pp. x ii. and 395, cloth, with Portra i t.
1 887. 1 4s.
M MBLING.— GRA D UATED G ERMA N REA D ER. Consisting of a Selection fromthe
most PopularWriters, a rrangedprogressively ; with a complete Voca bula ry for
the first
plart. By Friedrich Otto ra mbling. N inth Edition. 1 2mo, pp.viii. and
306 , clot 1 887. 3s. 6d.
PRGMBLING.— GRADUA TED Ex ERCISES TOR TRANSLATION INTO GERHAN. Consist
ing Of E x tra cts from the best English A uthors, a rra nged progressively with an
A ppend ix , conta ining Idioma tic Notes. By Fri edrich Otto Frmmbling, Ph.D .
Principa l GermanMaster a t the City of London School. Crown 8vo, pp. x iv. an322
,cloth. “(ith Note s
, pp. 66 . 1 867 . 4s. 6d . Without Notes,4 s.
N UDE — THE BOOK 0 ? JOB. By J. A . Froude ,M.A . , la te Fellow Of Ex eterGollege , Ox ford . Reprinted from the WestminsterReriew. 8vo, pp. 38 , cloth. 1 s.
FRUSTON.— ECHO FRA NQA IS. A Pra ctica l Guide to French Conversa tion. By F.
de la Frusten. With a Voca bula ry . 1 2mo, pp. vi . and 192 , cloth. 3s.PEE R — THE K HYENG PEOPLE OF THE SANDOWA Y D ISTRICT. ARA EAN . By G . KFryer,Ma jor, Deputy Commissioner, Sa ndoway . With 2 Pla tes. 8vo,pp. 44 , cloth. 1 875. 3s. 6d .
“YER — PAMSTUD IES . NO. I . A nalysis, a nd Pali Te x t Of the Subodhfl ank am, or
Ea sy Rhetoric, by Sangha ra k k hita Thera . 8vo, pp. 35, cloth. 1 875. 3s. 6d .
FURNIVALL.— E DUCATION IN EARLY ENGLAND . Some Notes used a s forewords to
a Collection Of Trea tises on Manners andMea ls in Olden Times,” for the Ea rlyEnglish Te x t So ciety. By Frederick J. Furniva ll
,M.A . 8ve , pp. 4 and 1x x iv. ,
sewed. 1 867. 1 s.
GALLOWAY.— A TREA TISE ON FUEL. Scientific and Pra ctica l. By Robert Ga llo
way, k c. With Illustra tions. Post 8vo, pp. x . and 136,cloth. 1 880. GE.
GALLOWAY.— EDUCATION : SCIENTIPIO A ND TECHNICA L ; or, How the Inductive
Sciences a re Ta ught. and How they Ought to be Ta ught. By Robert Ga llowa y,M.R. I .A . , F .C.S. 8vc, pp. xvi. and 462, cloth. 1 88 1 108 . 6d .
CARES — See A UCTORES SA NSERITI , Vol. III.Gm .
— TRE LITE AND PUBLIC SERVICE or JAHES A . G ARTIELD , TwentiethPresident Of the United Sta tes. A Biogra phica l Sk e tch. By Capta in F . H .Mason,la te Of the 42d Regiment, U. S . A . With a Pre fa ce by Bret Harte . Crown 8vo,pp. vi . a nd 134 , cloth. \Vith Portra it. 1 88 1 . 23. 6d .
GARLANDA — THE FORTUNES or WORDS . Le tters to a Lady . By Federico G a rla nds , Ph.D A uthor Of The Philosophy OfWords.
” Crown 8vo. Pp.vi . and225, Cloth. 1888 . 5s.
GARLANDA .— THE PHILOSOPHY orWORD S . A Popular Introduction to the Science
Of Language . By Fe derico G a rlands , A uthor Of“The Fortunes of IVOrds.
”
Crown 8vo. Pp. vi. and 294 , cloth. 1 888 . OS.
GARRBTr.— A CLA SS ICA L D ICTIONARY OP INDIA : Illustra tive of the Mythology ,
Philosoph Litera ture , A ntiquities. A rts,Manners, Customs, &c. , Of the Hindus.By JohnGa rrett, D irector Of Public Instruction inMysore . 8ve , pp. x . and 794 ,cloth. Wi th Supplement, pp. 1 60. 1871 a nd 1 873. £1 , 16s.
GARRETT.— MORN ING HOURS IN INDIA Pra ctical Hints On Household Manage
men 4. the Ca re a nd Tra ining of Children, k c. By “Lisb eth G arrett . Crown
Pp . x . a nd 1 24 , cloth. 1 887 . s 3s. Gd .
28 A Ca ta logue of Important Works,0008 00 SIMPLE. Stran e Surprising A dven'ures of the Venera ble G . S . and hisFive D isciples, Nood le , oodle
,Wise acre . Za ny, and Foozle adorned with Fifty
Illustra tions, dra wn on wood
,by A lfred Crowquill. A commnion Volume toMiinchha usen and Owlglass,’ba sed upon the famousTamu ta le of the Gooroo
Parama rta n,a nd e x hibiting, in the form of a sk ilfully-constructed consecutive
na rra tive , some of the finest specimens of Ea stern wit a nd humour. Elegantlyprinted on tinted paper, in crown 8vo, pp. 223, richly gilt ornamenta l cover, giltedges. 1861 . 10s. 6d .
GOTTHEII. — A TREA TISE ON SYRIAC GRAHHAR. ByMAr(i) Elia of Sch-a. Editedand Tra nsla ted fromtheManuscripts in the Berlin Roya l Library, byRichard J.
H. Gotthe il. Roya l 8vo, pp. 1 76, cloth. 1 887. 1 2s. 6d .
COUCH.— The SA RVA -D ARSA NA -SAHGRAHA . See Triibner
'
s Orienta l Series.
GOUGH.— PHILOSOPHY or THE UPA NISHA DS. See Triibner
’s Ori ental Series.
00m .— THB FOLK -SONGS or SOUTHERN INDIA . By C. E. Gover, Ma dras. Con
tents : Ca na re se Songs ; Bad aga Songs Coorg Songs Tamil Songs ; The Cora l ;Ma layalam Songs ; Telugu Songs. 8vc, pp. x xviii. and 300, cloth. 1872.10s. 6d.
GRAY.— D ARWINIA NA : Essays and Reviews perta ining to D arwinism. By A sa
G ra y. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii. and 396 , cloth . 1877 . 10s.
GRAY.— N ATURA L SCIENCE A ND RELIG ION : Two Lectures D elivered to the Theo
logica l School of Ya le College . By A sa Grav. Crown 8vc, pp. 1 1 2, cloth. 1880. 5a .
Gm .— SHA KESPEARE A ND THE EMBLEM-WRITERS : A n E x position of their S imi
la ri ties of Thought and E x pre ssion. Pre ced ed by a V iew of the Emblem-BookLitera ture down to A . D . 161 6. By Henry G ree n,M.A . In onevolume , pn. xvi .572 , profuse ly Illustra ted withWoodcuts a nd Photoli th. Pla te s, e lega ntly boundin cloth gi lt. 1 870. La rgemed ium8vc , £1 . 1 1 s. 6d . la rge impe ria l8vo, £2, 12s. 6d .
GREENE — THE HEBREWMIGRA TION PROH EGYPT. By J . Ba k er Greene . LL.B. ,M. B., Trin. Coll. , D ub . Second Ed ition. D emy 8vo, pp. x ii . and 440, cloth.
1 882. 10s. 6d .
GREG — TRUTH VERSUS ED IE ICATION. By W. R. Greg. Fcap. 8vc, pp. 32, cloth.
1 869. la .
GREG — IV!" ARE WOMEN RED UNDANT ? ByW. R. Greg. Fcap. 8vc, pp. 40, cloth.
1 869. l a .
GREG — LITERARY A ND SOCIAL JUDGNENTS . B W . R. G re Fourth Ed ition,consid era bly enla rged . 2vols. crown 8vo, pp. 10 and 288 , c oth. 15s.
GREG .
— ENIGMA S or LIFE. By lv. R. Greg. S ix te enth Ed ition, with a postscript.
Contents : Rea lisa ble Idea ls. Ma lthus Notwithsta nding. Non-Surviva l of theFittest . Limits a nd D irections ofHuman D evelopment. The
O
Sigmficance of Li fe .
D e Profund is. Elsewhere . A ppendix . Post 8vo, pp. x x n. and 314 , cloth.
1886 . 1 0s. 6d .
GREG — POLITICA L PRORLEHRFOROURA GE AND COUNTRY. B W. R. Greg. Con
tents : I . Constitutiona l and A utocra tic Sta tesmanship. l. Engla nd’
s Future
A ttitude a nd Mission. I I I . D isposa l of the Crimina l Classes. lV .
‘ReoentChange in the Cha racter of Engli sh Crime . V . The Intrinsic V i ce of Trad e
Unions. V I . Industria l and Co-Opera tive Partnerships. V II . The EcoyormcProblem. V II I . Politica l Consistency. IX . The Parliamenta rvCa reer. N
.
The
Price we pay for Self-government. XI . Vestryi sm.
.
X II . D irect U. Ind irect
Ta x a tion. X I II . The New Regime, and how to meet I t. Demy 8vc, pp. 342 ,
cloth. 1 870. 108 . Gd.
Published by Trit‘
bner (f: 00. 29
GREG .— LIISCELLANEOUS ESSA YS . By W . R. Greg. First Series. Crown 8vo,
pp. iv. — 268 , cloth. 1881 . 7s. 6d .
CONTENTS Rock s A hea d and Harbours of Refuge . Foreign . Policy of G rea tBrita in. The Echo Of the A ntipodes. A Grave Perplex ity be fore us. Obli
ga tions Of the Soil. The Right Use of a Sur ilua . The Grea t Twin
Bro thers : Louie Na poleon a nd Benjamin D isra eli . s the Popular Judgmentin Politics more Just than tha t Of the Higher Orders ? Ha rriet Ma rtineau.
Ve rify your Compa ss. The Prophetic Element in the Gospels. Mr. Frederi ck
Ha rrison on the Future Life . Ca n Truths be A pprehended which couldnot have been D iscovered ?
OBI-10 .
— MISCELLA NEOUS ESSA YS . By W. R. Greg. Second Series. Pp. 294 . 1 884 .
7S . 6d .
CONTENTS — Fra nce since 1 848 . France in Ja nuary 1 852. England as it is.
S irR. Pe el’s Cha ra cte r and Policy. Employment Of our A sia tic Forces in
Europe a n Wa rs.
GRIFFIN — TmcWORLD UND ER G LA SS . By Frederick Griflin, A uthor Of The
D estiny ofMa n,
" “The Storm K ing, and other Poems. Fca p. 8vo, pp . 204
,
Cloth g ilt. 1 879. 3s. 6d .
GRIFFIN .
— THE DESTINY orMAN ,THE STORMK ING , and other Poems. By F .
G rifiiu. Second Edition. Fca p. 8vo , p vii . - 104 , cloth. 1883. 28 . 6d .
GRIFFIS .— TRE MIIIA DO'
S EMPIRE. Boo I . History of Japan, from 660 to
1 872 A .U.
— Boo k lI. Persona l Ex periences, Obse rva tions, and S tud ie s in Ja an,1870- 1874 . liy W. E . Griflis, A .H. Second Ed ition. 8vo, pp. 626 , cloth. I us
tra te d . 1883. 2os.
GRIFFIB.
— JA P.\NES E FA IRYWORLD . Stories fromthe Wonder-Lore of Ja pan. By\V. E. G riffis. Square l6mo, pp. viii . a nd 304 , with 12 Pla tes. 1880. 7s. 6d.
GRIFFITH — THE B IRTH or THE WARGOD . See Triihner’s Orienta l Series.
GRIFFITH.— Yusur AND ZULA IERA . See Triibner
’
s Orienta l Se ries.
GRIFFITH. SCENES raon TRE RAMAYA NA , MEORA DUTA , d c. Tra nsla ted by Ra lphT. H . Grifli th,M.A . , Principal Of the Bena res College . Second Ed ition. Crown8vo. pp. xvi ii. a nd 244 , cloth. 1870. 60.
CONTENTS Prefa ce— A yodhya— Rava n Doomed — The Birth of Rama — The He ir-Appa rent
Ma ntha ra '
s Guile — lla ssra ths‘
s Oa th— The Step-mother— Mother a nd Son— The Triumph ofLove — Fa rewe ll i — The llermit’s Son- The Tria l of Truth — The Forest — The Ra e Of Sitaltama '
s Despa i r The Messenger Cloud - K humhs k arna - The Supplia nt Dove rue G loryFeed the Poor— The Wise Schola r.
GRIFFITH.
— THE RAMATAN or VALMfE I . Transla ted into En lish Verse . ByRel hT. H . G riffith,M.A . , Principa l Of the Bena res College . Vo I . , conta ining BOO s
I . and II . , demy 8vo, x x x ii . a nd 440, cloth. 1870.— Vol. IL , conta ining
Book II . ,w ith a rirlitionEfNotes a nd Inde x Of Names. D emy 8vo
, p. 504 , cloth .
1 871 .— Vol. I II demy 8vo,
pp. 390, cloth. 1 872.
-VO IV. , demy8vo, pp. viii. and 432 , cloth.
— Vol. V . , demy 8vo, pp. viii. and 360,cloth . l875 The comple te work , 5vols. £7, 7s.
OBOE - REVIEW of the Work Of Mr. JOhn StuartMill entitled Ex amina tion OfS irW
'
illiamHamilton’s Philosophy.
”By George Grote , A uthor Of the History
of A ncient Greece ,”
Pla to , a nd the other Companions Of Socra tes," &c. 12mo,
pp. 1 12 , cloth. 1868. 3s. 6d .
GROUT.— ZULU-LA ND : or, Life among the Zulu-K afirs Of Na ta l and Zulu-Lend,
South A frica . By the Rev. Lewis Grout. Crown 8vo, pp. 352, cloth. WithMap And Illustra tions. 7s. 6d .
GUBBRNATIS . Z OOLOOICA LMYTHOLOGY ; or, The Legends of A nima ls. BvAngelod e Guherna tis, Professor of Sa nsk ri t and Com a ra tive Litera ture in the Instituted i Stnd ii Superorii e d i Perfezionamento a t F onence , k c. 2vols. 8vo, pp . x xvi.a nd 432 . a nd vi i. a nd 4 42 . cloth. 1 872.Th is work Is a n im rtsnt contribution to the study of the comp
a ra tive mythologyof the IndoG erma n ic na tions. he author Introduces the d enizens Of the a r
. ea rth ,a
on! cha ra cte rs a ss igned to themin the myths and“send s at “wanna ,sma xm ms.
of th e mythologica l idea s fromthe times O! th e an“hum us use“ a ‘ N s fi ‘w ‘“
Romans, and rename. 0
30 A Ca ta logue of Important Works,0mm 1. BAZ : THEMYSTICROSE G ARDEN-or SA’
D UD D INMAHIIUD SHADreTA BI . The Persian Te x t, with an English Transla tion and Notes, chiefly fromtheCommentary ofMuhammed Bin Ya hya Lahiji . By E . H . \VIIinfield ,M.A . , Ba rrister-a t-Law, la te of 4 to, pp. xvi . , 94 , 60, cloth. 1880. 10s. 6d .
GULSHAN I . RAZ : THE D IALOGUE or THE, or, Mystica l G a rden of Roses .OfMa hmoud Sha bista ri . ‘Vith Selections from the Ruba iya't Of Omar K hayam.Crown 8vc, pp . vi. and 64 , cloth. 1 887. 3s.
(IM AGE — TREA TY RIGHTS or THE FOREIGNMERCHANT, and the Transit Systemin China . By Johannesvon Gumpach. 8vo, pp. xviii. and 421 , sewed. 10s. 6d .
m s.— CATA LOGUE or SA NSERIT A ND PA LI BOOES IN THE BRITI SHMUSEUII. By
Dr. Ernst Ha as. Printed by permission of the TrusteesOf the BritishMuseum.
4 to, pp.vi ii. a nd 1 88 , paper boards. 1 876 . 2 1s.
HABICR— VA D E-MECUII POUR LA PEINTURE ITALI ENNE D ES A NCIENS MA ITRES .
Premiere Pa rtie— G a leries I’uhliques de Pa ris, Londres, Berlin, Dresde ,Munich.
Vienne et Fra ncfort S ;'M. (Ordre par Numéros. ) Seconde Pa rtie— A brégéH is
torique des A nciensMa itres do l’Ecole Ita lienne . (Ordre a lpha bétique pa r Nomsd e Pe intures. ) Pa rG eorge E . Ha bich. 18mo, pp. x i . 96 a nd 1 1 4 . cloth. 1886 . 3s .
m 2 0? Ba lm - SELECTIONS PROII HI S POEIIs. Tra nsla ted from the Persia nh Hermann Bick nell. With Prefa ce by A . S. Biclrnell. D emy 4 to, pp. x x . a nd
printed on fine stout pla te o
pa per, with appro ria te Orienta l Bordering ingoldand colour, and Illustra tions by J. R. Herbert, A. 1 875. £2 , 2s.
Ema - See Triibner’s Orienta l Series.
HAGGARD .— CETYWA YO A ND HI S WHITE NEIGHBOUES : or, Remark s on Recent
Events in Zulula nd , Na ta l, a nd the Tra nsva a l. By H Rider Ha gga rd , A uthorOf K ing Solomon
’sMines, ” She , &c. &.c. Second Ed i tion. Revised and with a
N ew Introduction. Crown 8vo, pp. lx xvii i. and 314 , cloth. 1 888 . 68 .
HAGGARD.— See The Va zir of Lank ura n.
”
HAHN.— TS UNI IIGOA II , the Supreme Be ing Of the K hoi-K hoi. By Theophilus
Hahn, Ph.D . , Custod ian of the G rey Collection, Cape Town, t c., dtc. Post 8vo ,
pp. x iv. and 154 . 1882 . 7s. 6d .
W AK E — See SCHOPENHA UER, or English and Fore ign Philosophica l Library .
HALDEMAN.-PENNSYLVANIA DUTCH : A D ia lectOfSouth Germany with an Infusion
Of English. By S . S . Ha ldeman, A .M., Professor Of Compa ra tive Philolo
gy in the
University ofPennsylvania , Philad elphia . 8vo, pp.viii . and 70, cloth. 187 3s. 6d .
HALL — ON ENGLISH A DJECTIvES IN -A RLE, WITH SPECIALREPERENCE TORELIA BLE .
B FitzEdward Ha ll,M.A . , Hon. D .C.L. Ox on. , k c. Crown 8vo, pp.viii. a nd
sis, cloth. 1 877 . 7s. 6d .
-MODERN ENGLISH. By FitzE'
dwa rd Hall,M.A ., Hon. D .C.L. Ox on. Crown8vo, pp . xvi. and 394 , cloth. 1 873. 10s. 6d.
— SUN A ND EARTH A S GREAT FORCES IN CHEMISTRY. By T. W. Ha ll,M.D
L RC.S .E. Crown 8vo, pp . x ii. and 220, cloth. 1 874 . 38 .
— THE PEDIGREE or THE D EVIL. By F. T. Hall, With SevenA utotype Illustra tions fromD esigns by the A uthor. D emy 8vo, pp. xvi. and256, cloth. 1 883. 7s. 6d .
HALL — ARCTIC Ex PED ITION . See NOURSE.
HALL — A G ENERA L V IEW or CHINESE CIVILISATION, a nd of the Rela tions-Of theWest with China . Fromthe French ofM. Pierre Laflitte . Transla ted by JohnCarey Ha ll
,M. A . , A ssistant Ja Ianese Secretary to Legisla tion. Tok yo.
D emy 8vo, pp. x . and sewe 1 887. 3s.
m oon — Tug SPORTSMAN’S G A zEIT EER AND G ENERAL G UIDE. The G ame
A nima ls, Birds, and F ishes of North America : their Ha b its andva riousmethod sof C ap ture , .h a , Ja e . iVith a D irectory t0 the principal G ame Resorts of the00 0 13557 By Cha rles Hallock . N ew Edition. Crown Sa n, ab ih . h “Ports-mt. 1 883. 15s. s
32 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,RE NE — RIM ES or TRA VEL. Transla ted fa n the G erman of Henry Heine , byCha rles G . Leland . 7th Revised Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. 472, with Portra it,cloth. 1873. 73. 6d .
HEINE.— HEINE
’
S BOOK or SONGS . Transla ted by Cha rles G . Leland. Fcap. 8vo,pp. x iv. a nd 240, cloth. 1 874 . 4 s.
HEITZMA NN .— MICROSCOPICA L MORPHOLOGY or THE A NI II’A L BODY IN HEA LTH
givDGD
ISEA SE. By C. HEITZIIA NN ,M.D . Roya l 8vo, pp. x x .
- 850, cloth. 1 884.8 .
I ,
HENDRIK .— MEIIOIR3OP HA NS HENDRIE, THE A RCTIC TRAVELLER ; serving under
K ane, Hayes, Ha ll, a nd N a res
,1 853- 76 . “fritten by Himself. Tra nsla ted from
the Esk imo La nguage , by D r. Henry Rink . E dited by Prof. D r. G . Stephens,P.S . A . Crown 8wo , pp. 100,Map . cloth. 1878. 6d .
K ENNELL.— PRESRNT RELIGION. By Sa ra S . Hennell. Vol. I .
, crown 8vo,570, cloth. 1 863. 7s. 6d . Vol. 1 1 crown 8vo, pp. 018, cloth. 1873. 7s.Vol. crown 8vo, p. 43" 1 888 . 7s. 6d .
HBNNELL.
— THOUGHT8 IN A ID OF FA ITH . G a thered chiefly fromrecentWork s inTheology a nd Philosophy. By Sa ra S . Hennell. Post 8vo, pp. 4 28 , cloth. 1860. 63.
HENWOOD .— THE ME TALLIPEROUS D EPOS ITS or CORNWA LL A ND D EVON with A p
pe nd ices OII Subterra nea n Tempera ture the E lectricity of Rock s a nd Veins : theQuantities of Wa ter in the Cornish MInes ; a ndMining Sta tistics. By lVilliamJory Henwood , F .C .S . 8vo , pp . x . a nd 515; with 1 13Ta bles, and 12Pla tes. ha lf hound . £2 . 23.
HENWOOD .
— OBSERVATIONS ON META LLIEEROUS D EPOSITS , A ND ON SURTEREANEAETEMPERATURE . By WIlliamJory Henwood , President of theRo y a l Institution of Cornwa ll. In 2 Pa rts. 8vo, pp. x x x . ,
VII . and 91 6 ; with38 Ta bles, 31 Engravings on \Vood ,
a nd 6 Pla tes. £1 , 1 63.
HEPBURN.— A JA PA NESE AND ENGLISH D ICTIONA RY. With an English and Japanese
Inde x . By J . C. He p burn,M.D . , LL.D . Second Ed itIon. Imperia l 8vo, pp.
x x x ii. , 632 , a nd 201 , cloth. 183.
HEPBURN .-JA PANE.SE-ENGLISH A ND ENGLISH-JAPA NESE D ICTIONARY. ByJ. C.
Hepburn,MD LL.D . A bridged by the A uthor. Squa re 1 6 Ino . , pp.viii. and1034 , cloth. 1 887 . 1 43.
HEPBURN .- A JA PA NESE-ENGLISH A ND ENGLISH JA PA NESE D ICTIONARY. By J.
C . He pburn,M.D . , LL.D . Third Ed ition. D emy 8vo , pp. x x x iv. and 964, ha lfmorocco, cloth sides. 1 887. 303.
HERNISZ — A GUID E TO CONVERSATION IN THE ENGLISH A ND CHINESE LANGUA GES,for the Use of America ns a nd Chine se in Ca lifornia a nd elsewhere . By StanislasHernisz. Squa re 8vo, pp . 2 7 4
,sewed . 1 855. 103. 6d .
BERSEON.— TA LHUD ICMISCI.LLA N II. Se e Trubner
’s Orienta l Series.
HERZEN .— D C D EVELOPPEMENT D ES I IIEES REVOLUTIONNA IRES EN RUSSIE. Par
A le x a nder Herzen. 1 2mo, pp . x x iii . and 1 44 , sewed . 1853. 2s. 6d .
HERZEN .— A sepa ra te list of A . Herzeu
’
s work s in Russia n may be had on
applica tion.
HILL.—
'
I‘
HE HISTORY or THE REFORMMOVEMENT in the D enta l Profession in G re a tBri ta in during the la st twenty yea rs. By A lfred H ill, L icentia te in D enta l Surgery, Crown 8vo
, pp. xvi . a nd 400. cloth. 1 877 . 108 . 6d.
HILLEBRAND .— FRA NCE A ND THE FRENCH IN THE S ECoND HA LF OP THE N INE
TEENTH CE NTURY. By K a rl Hille bra nd . Tra nsla te d from the Third°German
Ed ition. Post 8vo , pp. x x and 262 , cloth. 1 881 . 103. 6d .
HILMY.— THE LITERATURE OF EOI PT AND THE SOUD A N . From the Ea rliest Times
to the Yea r 1885, inclusw e . A BIhliOgra plIy comprising Printe d Book s, Period ica l Writ ings and Pa pers of Le a rned Socie ties, Maps a nd Cha rts, A ncientP a py ri, Jllunuscripts, D ra wings, &c. By PLH. Prince Ibra him-H ilmy. D ed ica se d to H . H. the K hed ive Isma il. D emy 4m. V o\. I .
-L\tin. viii . and 398 ,clo th . 1 88 6. £1 , 1 13, 6d , Vol. II , (M- Z i with A ppendi x Oi A ddfi xenmw nthtoMay 1 8 8 7, pp . 459, clo th . ISQ . fins
“3: 6d .
Published by Triibner d: o 33
E NDOOMYTHOLOGY POPULARLY fi BATED . A n Epitomised D escriph'
on of theva rious He a then De ities illustra ted on the Silver Swami Tea Service resented ,as a memento of his VisIt to Ind Ia , to H.RH. the Prince ofWa les, K . by HisHighness the G a e k wa r of Ba rod a . Sma ll 4 to, pp. 42, limp cloth. 1875. 3s. 6d .
HTM L — TEE CONNERCE AND INDUSTRIES or THE PACITIC COAST or NORTHA HERIOA . BvJ . S . Hittell, A uthor of
“The Resources of Ca liforni a. 4 t9,
pp. 820. 1882. £1 , 10s.
HODG3ON.— A OAD EN I LECTURES . By J . E . Hodgson, R.A Libra ri an and Professor
of Pa inting to the Roya l A c td emy. Cr. 8vo, pp.viii. and 312 , cloth. 1 884 . 7s. 6d.
HODGSON.— ESSAYS ON THE LANGUAG ES , LITERATURE, AND RELIG ION or NEPAL
A ND TIBET . Toge the r with further Pa rs on the G eography, Ethnology, a ndCommerce of those Countries. By B. Ho dgson, la te BrItishMinister at the
Court of Nepal. Roya l 8vo. cloth, pp. x ii. a nd 276 . 1874 . 1 4s.
HODGSON . ESSA YS ON IND IA N SUBJECTS. See Triibner’s Orienta l Series.
Ram on — Tmc E DUCATION or G IRLS ; AND THE EMPLOYMENT or WOHEN or
THE UPPER CLASS ES EDUCATIONA LLY CONSID ERED . Two Le ctures. By W. B.
Hodgson,LL. D . Second Ed ition. Cr. 8vo , pp . xvi. a nd 1 1 4 , cloth. 1 869. 3s. 6d .
HODGSON .
— TURGOT : His Life , Times, and Opinions. Two Le ctures. By W. B.
Hodgson, LL.D . Crown 8vo, pp. vi. a nd 83, sewed. 1870. 2A.
HOBBNLB.
— A COMPA BATIVE GRAMMAR or THE G AUD IA N LA NGUAGES , with SpecialRe ference to the Easte rn Hind i . A ccompa nied by a Langua geMa , and a Ta ble
of A lpha bets. By A . F . Rudolf Hoernle . D emy 8vo, pp 474 , clo t . 1 880. 18s.
HOLBBIN SOCIETY.— Subscription, one guinea per a nnum. List of publica tions
on applica tion.
HOLMES FORBES .
— THE SCIENCE 01" BEA UTY. A n A na lytica l Inquiry into the
la ws of E sthe tics. By Ava ry W. Holmes-Forbes, of Lincoln'
s Inn, Ba rrister-a t
La w. Post 8vo , cloth, pp. vi. and 200. 1 881 . 6s.
BOLS‘I‘
.— THE CONSTITUTIONA L A ND POLITICA L HISTORY or THE UNITED STATES .
By Dr. H. vou Holst Tr ansla ted by J. J . La lor a nd A . B. Ma son. Roya l 8vo.
Vol. I . 1750- 1833. S ta te Sovere ignty a nd Slave ry. Pp. xvi . and 506 . 1 876 . 1 8s.— Vol. I I. 1 828— 1846 . Ja ck son s A dministra tion A nne x a tion of Te x a s. Pp .
720. 1 879. £1 , 2s.— Vol. 1 11 . 1846 - 1850. A nne x a tion of Te x a s— Compromise
of 1850. Pp. x . a nd 598 . 188 1 . 18s .— Vol. IV. 1850— 1854 . Compromise of
1 850— K a nsa S -Neb I a sk a Bill. Pp. x . 4 62. 1885. 183. Vol. V. K a nsas -Nebrask aBill— Bucha n in s E lection, pp. viIi . -4 90. 1885. 18s.
HOLYOAK E.— TRAVELS IN S EARCH or A S ETTLER
'
S G UIDE-BOOK or AHEEICA A ND
CA NA DA . By G . J. Holyoa k e . Post 8vo, pp .
,1 48, wra pper. 1884 . 6d .
HOLYOAK E.— THE H ISTORY OP CO-OPERATION IN ENG LA ND : its Litera ture a nd its
A dvoca te s. By G . J. Holyoa k e . Vol. I. The Pioneer Peri od , 1 8 12-4 4 . Crown8vo, pp. x i i. a nd 4 20, cloth. 1875. GS. — Vol I I. The Constructive Period , 184578 . Third E ditInn Crown 8 yo, pp. x . and 504 , cloth. 1885. 8s.
HOLYOAK E .— REA SONING PRO! FACTS : A Metho d of Eve
gtyday Logic. By G . J.
Holyoa k e . Fca p. , pp. x ii . and 94 , wra pper. 1877 .
HOLYOAK R— SELP-HELP BI THE PEOPLE . Thirty-three Ye a rs of Co Opera tion I II
Rochda le . In Two Pa rts. Pa rt I. , 1844 - 1 857 ; Pa rt I I. , 1857- 1877 . By G . J .
Holyoak e . N inth Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. 174 , cloth. 1883. 2s. 6d .
HOME — D . D . HOHE : HIS LITE A NDMISS ION . ByMme . D ungla s Home. Demy8vo. cloth , pp. ViIi. and 428 , with Portra It. 1 888 . 1 2s. 6d .
HOOLB‘t— THE SCIENCE A ND ART or TRA INING : A Ha ndbook for A thletes By
Henry Hoo le,M. D . (Loud . Med ica l Office r to the Sto ck E x cha nge Clerk s Pro
vident Fund . D emy 8vo, cloth, pp. xvi . a nd 124 . 1888 . 3s. 6d .
HOPK INS .
— ELEII ENTA RY GRAHIIAROP TIIE'
IURE ISRL RN GS Ram. \N m'k fi‘mEx ercises. By F. L. Hopk ins, M. A . , E c\\og a nd Xmas: o\
‘Yx
‘vnvqm s
bri dge. Crown 8vo, pp. 4 8, cloth. 1871 . Se .
34 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,BORDER — A SELECTION PROM THE 1300 1: or PRA ISE FOB CHILDREN, as Edited
by \V. Ga rrett Horder. For the Use of Jewish Children. Fca p. 8 1 0 , pp. 80,cloth. 1 883. 1 s. 6d.
HOSMBR.— THB PEOPLE AND POLITICS ; or, The Structure of Sta tes and the
S Ignifica nre and Re la tion of Politica l Forms. By G . W. Hosmer,M.D . D emy8vo. pp. viii. a nd 340, cloth. 1883. 158 .
HOWELLS — A LITTLE G IRL AMONG THE OLD MA STERS . With Introduction a nd
Comment. By lv. D . Howells. Oblong crown 8vo, cloth, pp. 66. with 54 pla tes.
1 884 . 10s.
HOLLIS — MA THEMA TICA L DRAWING INSTRUMENTS , A ND How To USE THEM. By .
F . Edwa rd Hulme , F. L. S . . F .S .A . A rt-Ma ste rofMa rlborough College , A uthor ofPri IICI le s of Ornamenta l A rt, &c. W'
ith Illustra tions. Third Edition.
Impe I iar1 6 Iuo, pp. xvi . a nd 152, cloth. 1 884 . 3s. 6d .
HUMBERT.
— ON “TENANT RIGHT. By C. F . Humbert. 8vo, pp. 20
,sewed.
1 875. I s.
HUMBOLDT.— THE SPHERE A ND D UTIES OF GOVERNMENT. Tra nsla te d from the
G erma n of Ba ron ‘Vilhe lmVon Humbold t by Joseph Coultha rd , jun. Post 8vc,pp. xv. a nd 203, cloth . 1 854 . 58 .
HUMBOLDT.— LETTERS orW ILLIAMVON HUMBOLDT TO A FEMA LE FRIEND . A com
ple te Ed Ition. Tra nsla ted by Ca therineM. A . Couper, with a Bio graphica l N oticeof the W'
rite r. 2vols . crown 8vo, pp. x xviii . a nd 592 , cloth. 1 867 . 10s.
HUNT.— THE RELIG ION or THE HEART. A Manua l of Fa ith and D uty. By Le igh
Hunt. Fca p. 8vo, pp. x x iv. and 259, cloth. 2s. 6d.
HUNT — CHEMICA L A ND G EOLOG ICA L E SSA YS . By Professor T. Sterry Hunt.S econd Ed Ition. 8vo , pp . x x ii. and 448 . cloth. 1 879. 1 2s.
HUNTER.
— T II E IMPERIA L GA ZETTEER OP IND IA . By SirWilliamWilsonHunte r,C. I .E LL.D . , A dd itiona l Membe r of the V Iceroy
’s Council, la te
D Irector-G ene ra l of S ta tistics to the G overnment of Ind ia N ew Ed ition. In
Fourte en Volumes. Ha lf morocco . lVithMa ps. 1 886 - 7 . £3, 38 .
UNTER.—
'I‘IIE I NDI AN EMPIRE : Its People , H istory, a nd Products. By S ir“fi lliam \Vilson Hunter, LL .D . , A dditiona l Member of the
V Ice roy’
s Council, la te D irector-G enera l of Sta tistics to the G overnment of Ind ia .
Second a nd Revised Ed ition, brought up to d a te , and incorpora ting the generalre sults of the Census of 1 881 . D emy 8vo, pp. x x x ii. and 748, with Map, Cloth .
1 886 . £1 , 1 s.
HUNTER — A BRIEF H ISTORY or THE IND IA N PEOPLE. By Sir WilliamWilsonHunte r, C. I .E , LL .D . , A dd itiona lMember of the Viceroy’s Council
,
la te D Irector-G enera l of Sta tistics to the G overnment of Ind ia . Fourth Edition.
(‘
rown 8vo, pp. 222 , cloth . W'
ithMap. 1 884 . 3S . 6d .
HUNTER.— THB INDIA N MUSA IMANS. By S ir WilliamWilson Hunter,
C. I . E ,LL. D . , A dd itiona l Member of the V iceroy
'
s Council , la te DirectorG enera l of Sta tistics to the Government of India . Th ird Ed ition. 8vo, pp. 219,cloth. 1 876 . 10s. 6d.
HUNTER.
— FaMINE A SPECTS OF BENGA L D ISTRICTS. A SystemofFamine Warning;By S ll
‘ lVIllIamWilson Hunter, C. I .E LL .D . , A dd itiona l Memberof the V Iceroy
’s Council, la te D irector-G enera l of Sta tistics to the Government
of Ind ia . Crown 8vo, pp. 2 16, cloth. 1 874 . 7s. 6d .
HUNTER — A STATISTICA L A CCOUNT or BENGAL. By SirWilliamWilson Hunter,E LIS L , C. I . E " LL.D A dditional Member of the V ice roy’
s Council, la teD ire ctor G enera ] of S ta tistics to the Government at Ind“. Xn 2h nah . 81 0 , ha lfmorocco. 1 877. £5.
0
36 A Ca ta logue of Important Works,INDIA OFFICE PUBLIOA
‘I'IONS— continued .
Finance a nd Revenue A ccounts of the Government Of Ind ia for 1883-4. 2s. 6d .
Gamble , Manua l of I nd ian Timbe rs. 10s.
Hunter’
s Imperia l G a ze tte er. I4vols. £3, 3s.India n Educa tion Commission, Report Of the . l2s. A ppendices. 10vols. 10s.Ja schlte’
s Tibeta n-English D ictiona ry. 30s.Liotsrd
’s Silk in Ind ia . Pa rt 1 . 2s.
Loth. Ca ta logue of A rabicMSS. 10s. 6d .
Ma rk ham‘
s A bstra ct ofReports Of Surveys. ls. 6d .
Mitre (Ra jendra la la ), Buddha G sya . 60s.
Moir, TorrentRegions of the Alps. 1s.
Mueller. Select Plants for E x tra -Tropical Countries. 8e.
Mysore a nd Coorg G azetteer. Vols. I . and II. 10s. each.
D O. do. Vol. II I . 5s.N . IV. P. Ga zetteer. Vols. I . a nd II . 105. e ach.
D O. do. Vols. III . to XL , XII I. . and X IV . 12s. ea ch.
Oudh do. Vols. I . to III . 10s. e a ch.
People of Ind ia , The . Vols I . to V III . 45s. each.
Rave rty’s N 0t on A fgha nistan and Ba luchistan. Sections I. and II . 2s.
tion III . 5s. Section IV . 38Ra jputa na G a zetteer. 3vols. 15s.Saunders
'Mounta ins and River Ba sins of Ind ia . 3s.Taylor. Ind ia nMa rine Surveys. 2s. 6d.
Trigonome tnca l Survey, Synopsis of Grea t. Vols. I . to VI. 10s. 6d . each.
Trumpp’
s A d i Gra nth. 52s. 6 d.
Wa ring. Pha rmacopoeia of Ind ia , The . 6s.
Wa tson’s Toba cco. 5s.
Wilson. Ma dras A rmy. Vols. I . and II . 21s.
INDIAN GMETTEBRS — See HUNTER, GA zE'IT EER, and INDIA Om CE PUBLICATIONS .
mGLEBY .— E SS AY8 Hr THE LATE CLEHENT MA NSPIRLD INCI ERT, M. A . , LL.D . ,
Ed ited by his son. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 328, cloth. 1 888 .
7s. 6d .
mGLEBY.— ECHOES TRON NAPLES, AND OTHER POENS. By Holcombe Ingleby.
“(ith Illustra tions by hisWi fe. Crown 8vo, boards, pp.vii . and 78. 1888 . as. Gd .
INGLEBY.— See SHAKESPEARE.
m .— N AUTICAL TABLES . D esigned for the use Of British Seamen. By theRev.James Inman, D .D . ,
late Professor a t the Roya l N ava l College , Portsmouth.
Ed ited by the Rev. H. T . Inman,M.A . New Ed ition, Revised and
D emy 8vo, pp. x xvi ii . and 548 , cloth. 1 888. l6s.
mm .— HISTORY OP THE ENGLISH A LPHA BET : A Paper read before the Liverpool
Litera r
yand Philosophical Society. By T. Inma n, M.D . 8vc, pp. 36 , sewed.
1872 . 8 .
INTERNATIONAL NUMISMA 'I‘
A ORIENTA LIA (THE).— Roya 1 4to, in pa per wrapper.
Part 1 . A ncient Ind ian IVeigbts. By E . Thoma s, F.R.S . Pp. 84 , with a Plate and
Map of the India OfMann. 9s. 6d .
— Pa rt II . Coins of the Urtuk i Turk umAns.By Sta nley Lane Poole , Corpus Christi College . Ox ford . 4 4 , with 6 Pla tes.
95, — Pa rt I I I. The Coinage Of Lyd ia a nd Persia , fromthe a rliest Timhs to theFa ll of the Dyna sty Of the A clmmenidm. By Ba rclay V . Hea d, A ssista nt-K eeper
of Coins , British Museum. Pp. viii . -56,with 3A utoty e Pla tes. 10s. 6d .
Pa rt IV . The Coins Of the Tuluni Dyna sty. By Edwa rd homes Rogers, Pp.i ra - 22, and 1 Pla te . 58 .
— Psrt V . The Parthian Coinage . By Pe rcy G a rdner,E A . Pp . iv. - 66 , and 8 A utoty
gvPla tes. 18s.— Pa rt VI . The A ncient Coina
a nd Me a sures of Ceylon. By T. Rhys D avids. Pp . iv. and 60, and I Plate .
Jam— Vo l. I . . conta ining the first six parts. as aDec'
Iheo. alcove . E DNA mmbound. £53133. 6d . a
Published by Triibner (f: 00 .
INTERNATIONAL NUIIIsIIATA 0
Vol. II . COINS or THE JEws. Being a H istory of the Jew ish Coina ge andMoneyin
.the Old and N ew Testaments. By F . W. Ma dd en, Member of the
N umisma tic Socie ty of London,&c &c. With 2 79 woodcuts and a pla te of
a lphabets. Royal 4to , pp. x ii . and 330, sewed . 1 881 . £2.
Vol. I I I Pa rt I . TE E COINs or A E A E AN , or PEcU, AND or BUEIIA . By LieutG enera l Sir A rthur Pha yre 2
C.B. , G C.MG . ,la te Commissioner of
British Burma . A lso conta ins the Ind ian Ba lha ra , and the A ra bia n Intercoursewith Ind ia in the N inth and following Centuries. By Edwa rd Thoma s, F.R.S.
goyéll 4to
, pp . viii . and 48, with F ive A utotype I llustra tions, wrapper. 1 882.8 .
Pa rt II. THE COIN S or SOUrIIEEN IND IA . By SirW. Elliot. WithMap andPla te s. Roya l 4 to, pp . viii . a nd 1 68 , pa per. 25s.
JAOOB.— HINDUPA NTE EIsu. See Triibner
’s Orienta l Seri es.
JAGmLSKL — OH MARIENBAD SPA and the D ise ases Cura ble by its Wa ters andBa ths. By A . V . Ja gielsk i,M. D Berlin. Second Ed ition. Crown 8vc, pp . vi ii.a nd 186 . WithMa p. Cloth. 1 8 4 4 . 58 .
JAMISON.— Tns LIFE A ND Tw as or BEaTa A ND DU GUESOLIN. A History of the
Fourte enth Century. By D . F . Jamison,of South Ca rolina . Portra it. 2 vols.
8vc, pp. xvi. , 287 , a ndviii . , 31 4 , cloth . 1 864 . £1 , 1s.
JAPAN -MA P or N IPPON (Ja pan) : Compiled fromNa tiveMaps, and thb N otes ofmost recent Travellers. By R. Henry Brunton. 1 880. Size ,5 feet by 4 fee t, 20 miles to the inch. In 4 Sheets, £1 , 1 s. ; Roller, va rnished .
£1 , 1 1s. 6d . ; Folded , in Case , £1 , 5s. 6d .
JASOHKB.— A TIBETA N-ENG LISH D ICTIONARY. With specia l reference to the Pre
va iling D ia lects. To which is added an English-Tibe ta n Voca bula ry. By H . A .
Jitschk e , la teMoravia nMi ssiona ry a t K yelang, British Lahoul. Imperia l 8vo, pp.
x x iv. - 672, cloth. 1 881 . £1 , 10s.
JASCHKE — TIBETAN GBAMI A B. By H . A . Jaschk e . Crown 8vo, pp. viii - 104 ,cloth . 1883. 5s.
JA ’I'
AK A (THE), together with its COMMENTARY be ing ta les of the A nterior Birthof Gotama Buddha . Now first published in Pa li, by V . Fausboll. Te x t. 8vc.
Vol. I . , p. vi ii . a nd 51 2 , cloth. 1 877. 28s.— Vol. II . , pp . 452 , cloth. 1 879,
28s.— Vol? pp . viii . and 544 , cloth . 1883. 28s. Vol. IV . , pp . x . a nd
4 49 . cloth. 1 887. 28s. Vol. V . , comple ting the work , is in prepa ra tion. (ForTransla tion see Trubner
’s Orienta l Series, Buddhist Birth
JENKINS.
— A PA LA D IN OF FINANCE : Contempora ry Manners. BvE . Jenk ins,A uthor of G inx
’
s Ba by .
”Crown 8vc, pp. iv. a nd 392, cloth. 1 882 . 78 . 6d .
JENK INS.— VEsr-POCEET LEXICON . A n English D ictionary of a ll e x cept familiar
Words. includ ing the principa l Scientific and Technica l Terms, and Fore ignMoneys, \Ve ights and Mea sures ; omitting wha t everybody k nows, a nd conta in
ing wha t everybody wants to k now and ca nnot read ily find . By Ja bez Jenk ins.
64mo, pp. 564 , cloth. 1879. Is. 6d .
JOHNSON — ORIENTA L RELIGIONS. Ind ia . Se e English and Fore ign Philosophica lL ibra zly , Ex tra Series, Vols. IV . and V.
JOHNSON.— OE IENTA L RELIG IONS A ND TE EIE RELA TION To UNIVERSA L RELIG ION .
Persia . By Samuel Johnson. \Vith a n Introduction by O. B . Frothingham.
D em 8vo, pp. x liv. and 784 , cloth. 1885. 188.
JOLLY.— Se e NA EA DIYA .
JOMINI .— THE A RT or WAR. By Ba ron de Jomini, Genera l and A ide -d e -Q ama m
the Emperor Of Russia . A New Edition ,with A “fin es‘Yu mayx tzg.
from the French. By Capta in G . H . Mend el and G ava n“ Q “a “Crown 8vo, pp . 410, cloth . 1 879. 9s.
4
38 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,JOSEPH.
— 0RET.IGION ,N ATURA L A ND REvEA LEh. A Series of Progressive Le ssons
for Jewish Youth. By N . S . Joseph. Crown 8vc, pp. x ii. - 296 , cloth. 18 79. 3s.
JUVENALIB SATIRE . WVith a Literal English Prose Transla tion and Notes.,ByJ. D . Lewis,M. A .
,Trin. Coll. Camb . Second Edition. Two vols. 8vc, pp. x ii.
and 230 a nd 400, cloth. 1 882 . 1 2s.
K ARCHER.— QUESTIONNA IRE FRA NCA IS. Questions on French Grammar, Idioma tic
D ifficulties, and Milita ry E x pressions. B Theodore K a rcher, LL B. Fourth
Ed ition , gre a tly enlarged . Crown 8vc, pp. cloth. 1879. 4s. 6d. Interle avedwith writing paper, 5s. 6d .
K ARDBC.— TE E SPmIT'
s BOOK . Conta ining the Principles of Spiritist Doctrine onthe Immorta lity of the Soul, &c.
,&c. , a ccord ing to the Teachings of Spirits of
High D egree , transmitted throughva riousmed iums. collected a nd se t in ord er byA llen K a rdec. Transla ted fromthe 1 20th thousand by A nna Bla ck well. Crown
8vc, p. 512, cloth . 1 875. 7s. 6d .
K ARD C.— TIIE MED IUM’
S BOOK ; or, Guide for Mediums and for Evoca tions.Conta ining the Theore tic Tea chings Of Spirits concerning a ll k inds OfManifestations, theMea ns Of Communica tion with the Invisible World , the D evelo cut
ofMed ia nimity, &c., k c. B A llen K a rdec. Transla ted by A nna B well.
Crown 8vc, pp. 456 , cloth. 1 76. 7s. 6d .
KARDEC.— H EAVEN A ND HELL or, the D ivine Justice V indica ted in the Plura lity
of E x istences. By A llen K a rdec. Tra nsla ted by A nna Bla ck well. Crown 8vo,pp . VIII.
.and 448 , cloth. 1 878 . 7s. 6d .
K EMP. See SOE OPENE AUER.
K ERRISON .— A COMMONPLA CE BOOE or TE E FIETEENTE CENTURY. Conta ining a
Re ligious Pla y and Poe try, Lega l Forms, a nd Loca l A ccounts. Printed fromthe
Origina lM8 . a t Brome Ha ll, Suffolk . By La dy Ca roline K errison. Edi ted , withN otes, by Lucy Toulmin Smith . With Two Fa csimiles. D emy 8vc, pp.viii. and1 76 , pa rchment. 1886. 78 . 6d .
K EYS OF THE CREEDS (TE E). Third Revised Ed ition. Crown 8vc, pp. 210,cloth . 1876 . 58 .
K INAHAN .— V A LLErs AND TE EIRRELATION To FIEEUREs, FRAcI
'UREs, A ND FAULTs.
By G . H. K inahan,M.R. 1 . A F.R.G .S I &c. D ed ica ted by permission to his
G ra ce the D uk e of A rgyll. Crown 8vc, pp. 256 , cloth, illustra ted. 7s. 6d .
K ING’
S STRATAGEM(The ) OE , TE E PEARL orPOLA ND ; A Tragedy in Five A cts.By Ste lla . Se cond Edition. Crown 8vc, pp. 94 , cloth . 1 874 . 2s. 6d .
K INGSFORD .— HISTORY OI? CA NA D A . By IVilliam K ingsford . Vol. I . Medium
8vc. pp. x iv. and 488 . cloth. 1 887. 15s.
K INGSTON .— TE E UNITY or CREATION. A Contribution to the Solution of the
Igez
ligio
gs Question. By F . H . K ingston. Crown 8vc, pp. viii. and 152, cloth .
1 4 . s.
H STNER.— BUDDHA AND HIS DOOTRINEE . A Bibliographica l Essa y. By Otto
K istner. 4 to, pp. iv. and 32 , sewed. 1 869. 2s. 6d .
ELEM — MUSCLE BEA TING ; or, A ctive and Pa ssive Home Gymna stics forHealthyand Unhea lthy People . By C. K lemm. IVith Illustra tions. 8vo, pp . 60,wra pper. 1 878 . I s.
KNOWLB8 .— FOLE -TA LEE or K A EE E IE. By the Rev. J. Hinton K nowles, F .R.G .SAte . C.M.S .Missiona ry to the K ashmiris. Post 8vc, pp. x ii.a nd 510,
clo th. 1888. 1 68 .
K oLBn— A LA NGUAG E-STUDY BA SED ON BA NTU : Or, A n Inquiry into the LawsOf Root-Forma tion. The Origina l Plura l, the Se x ua l D ua l, and the Princi les ofWord Compa rison. IVith Tables I llustra ting the Primitive Pronomina l yatsurestored in the A frican BantuFamily of Spe ech . By the Rev. F. IV. K olbe , of theLondonMissiona ry Society. D emy 8vc , pp.viii . and 100, cloth. 1888. 60.
E
l len .
— TE A VELE IN CANA DA AND TEROUcn
atns
fis'
ra
ga or
g“anYYo
‘
a xux g
a
E NN S I'
L VA N I A . B J, G , K ohl. Transla te y rs . ex es inns as 1th e A uthor. Two Tish . post 8vo ,
‘
pp . x iv. and 1 84 , d oth . max . 8333
40 A Ca ta logue of Importa ntWork s,
LATHE (a ) AND ITS USES : or, Instruction inéhe Art of TurningWood andMe tal,includ ing a description of the mostmodern appliances for the Ornamentation ofPla in and Curved Surfaces, &c. S ix th Ed ition. With add itional Chapten andIndex . Illustra ted. 8vc, pp. iv. a nd 316 , cloth. 1883. 10s. 6d .
LB-BBUN .— Ma '
rnms ss FOB Ta snsssrwo raou Enou su INTO Fa eries ; being s
short Essa y on Translation, followed by a Gradua ted Selection inProse and Van e .
By L . Lo-Brun. Seventh Ed ition Revised and corrected by Henri -Van La uri .Post 8vo, pp. x ii. and 204 , cloth. 1 882 . 4 s. 6d .
LEE — Istoarnm ons or runPnrsrow or orRELIGION. In Sections adapted forthe use of Sl hOOIB. Part I. By Henry Le e , formerly Professor ofSurgery, Roya l College of Surgeons, k c. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 108, cloth.
1 880. 3s. 6d .
LEBS.— A PRA CTICA L GUID E TO HEA LTH , A ND so me Home Tnx smznr or run
Cosmos A l l EN'rs or L IFE : “(ith a Section on Ca ses of Emergency, and H intsto Mothers on Nursing. k c. By F . A rnold Lees, E.L .S. Crown 8vo, pp. 334 ,stifi
'
covers. 1 874 . 38 .m a x — Tms Gunman Cu ssxcs. W ith a Transla tion, Critica l and E x egetical,N otes, Prolegomena , a nd cOpious Inde x es. ByJames Legge , D .D . , of the Lon.
don Missiona ry Society . In 7 vols. Roya l 8vo. Vols. L-V. in Eight Pa rts,nblished , cloth. £2 , 2s. each Pa rt.eon— Ta rm nsnCLA SSICS , transla ted into English. WithPreliminary Essaysand E x plana tory Notes. Popular Edition. Reproduced for G enera lReaders fromthe A uthor
’s work
,conta ining the Origina lTex t. By James Legge , D .D . Crown
8vo. Vol. I . The Life and Tea chings Of Confucius. S i x th Ed ition. Pp . Vi.
and 338 . cloth. 1 887 . 10s. 6d . Vol. II . The lVOrk s ofMencius. Pp. x . a nd 402,cloth, l2a .
— Vol. I II . The She -K ing ; or, The Book of Poetry . Pp. vi. and 432 ,cloth. 1 876 . 1 2s.
LBGGE .— Conrucumsn IN RE LATION TO CHRISTIA N iTY. A Pa per read be fore the
Missiona ry Conference in Shangha i, onMa y l lth, 1 877. By Rev. James Legge,DJ) LL. D . . &c. 8vo, pp. 1 2
,sewed . 1 877. 1 s. 6d .
moon— Tue N ssroma nMox unsx r or HSl-A N F0 IN Sues -Hat CHINA , Rela tingto the D iffusion of Christia nity in Ch ina in the Seventh a nd Eighth Centuries.‘Vith the Chinese Te x t of the Inscription, a. Tra nsla tion and Notes and a Lectureon the Monument, with 9. Sk e tch of Subsequent Chri stian Missions in China,and the ir Present Sta te . By James Legge , Professor of the Chinese Languageand Litera ture in the University of Ox ford . D emy 8wo, pp. iv. a nd 68 . with Pla te,sewed . 1 888 . 2s . 6d .
— A Lm sn TO Pa ornssonMa x Minn a , chiefly on the Transla tion intoEngli sh of the Chinese Terms Ti and Show: Ti . By Jame s Le g c, Professor of
the Chine se Lang ua ge and Litera ture in the University of Ox for Crown 8vo ,
pp . 30, sewed . 1 880. Is.
LEIGH.—
'
I‘
BB RELIG ION or THE ‘VORLD . By H. Stone Le igh . 1 2mo, pp. x i i . and
66 , cloth. 1 869. 23. 6d .9
man — Tm; S '
ronr or PHILOSOPHY. By A ston Le igh. Post 8vc, pp. x 1 1. and210, cloth. 1 88 1 . 63.
LELAND .— THE BREITMANN BA LLA D S . T he only authori sed Fd ition. Complete in 1
VOL, includ ing N ineteen Ba lla ds, illustra ting his Trave ls in Europe (never beforeprinted ). with Comments hy Pi itz Schwa ek enhammer. By Cha rles G . Le land .
Crown 8vo . pp. x xvi ii . and 292 , cloth. 1 8 7 2 . 6 8 . s
“La in — TunMrsw Lesson or Conrucws, a nd other Poems. By Charles G .
Leland . Fcap . 8vo, pp. viii. and 1 68 , cloth. 1 871 . 38 . 6d .
LELAND .— G A UI ) EAMUB. Humonous Poems transla te d from the German ofJo h
V ictor Schefl'
el a nd others. By C. G . Leland . l o, pp. 176 , cloth. 1872 . SI .
LELA ND .— TmsEmPTIA N SK ETCH-BOOK . ly C. G . Leland . Crown 8vo, pp. viii .
s ti r/316, clo th. 1873. 78 . 6d .
— Tm; E x ams" G IPS IES AND ma mh ummer. By commG . u ll nd .
S econd E d i tion. Crown 8vo, pp . gvi . and 260, d oth . XS’M. h as.
Published by Toi ibna’ dcCo. 4 1
LELAND . E'
u-Sa ne OE. TE E Drscovx a r or A nt ares by Chinese BuddhistPriestsin the Fifth Century. By C. G . Le land. Crown 8vc, pp. 232 , cloth . 5. 7s. 6d .
LELAND — Pmom-Bsou sn S i ne -Sosa ; or, Songs and Stories in the Chins-English
D ia lect. With a Voca bula ry. By Cha rles G . Lela nd . Second Ed ition. Crown
8vo, pp. vi ii. and 1 40, cloth. 1878 . be.
1.1mm . { I n GrrSiES . By C. G . Leland. Crown 8vc, pp. 372, cloth. 1882 .
6d .
LEOPARDL— Sec English a nd Fore ign Philosophica l Libra ry .
LEO.— Foua CHAPTERS or Nonm’
s PLUTARCH, Conta ining the Lives of Ca insMarcius, Coriolanus. Julius Cae sa r,Ma rcus A ntonius, and Ma rcus BIutus, a s Sourcesto Sha k espea re
’s Tra ged ie s ; Coriolanus, Julius Ce sa r, and A ntony and Cleo
pa trs ; a nd a rtly to Hamle t and Timon of A thens. Photolithogra phed in the
size of the d ition of 1595. Prefa ce , Notes com a ring the Te x t Of the
Ed itions of 1579, 1595, 1 603, and 1612 and Reference otes to the Te x t of the
Tra ged ies of Sha k espea re . Ed ited by Professor F . A . Leo, Ph .D Member of
the D irectory of the Germa n Sha k espe are Socie ty a nd Le cturer a t the A ca demyof Mod ern Philology a t Berlin. Folio, pp . 22 , 130 of facsimiles, ha lf-morocco.
Libra ry Ed ition (limited to 250 cOpies), £1 , 1 1 s. 6d . Ama teur Edition (50 copies
on a superior large hand-mad e pa per), £3.3s
[S Q — Sn
ax zsrnsnn-Norm. By F. A . Leo. D emy 8vo, pp. viii. and 120, cloth.
1 885.
LEONOWENS — LIn A h’
D TRAVEL IN IND IA : BeingRecollectionsof a Joufney beforethe D ays ofRa ilroad s. By A nna Ha rrie tte Leonowens. A uthor of
“The English
G overness a t the S i amese Court, ” and“The Romance of the Ha rem.
”8vo, pp.
326 , cloth. Illustra ted. 1 885. 10s. 6d .
LERMONTOPP.— THE D Euon. By Micha el Lennontoif. Transla ted from the
Russian by A . Cond ie Stephen. Third Ed ition,crown 8vo, pp . 88 , cloth. 1 886 . 5s.
LBSLBY. MA N S ORIG IN A ND D ESTINY. S k etched fromthe Pla tformof the PhysicalSciences. By . J. P. Le sley, Professor of Geology, University Of Pennsylvania .
Second Ed ition,crown 8vo, pp. vi i i. a nd 1 42 , cloth. 188 1 . 7s. 6d .
LESSING.
— LETIERS ON BIBLIOLATRY . By Gotthold bra im Le asing. Translatedfromthe G erma n by the la te H . H . Berna rd , Ph.D . vo, pp. 184 , cloth. 1 862 . 5s.
LBSSING .— See English and Fore ign Philosophica l Libra ry, Ex tra Series.
LETTERS on TE E Wa n BETWEEN G Eauanr A ND FRA NCE. ByMommsen, Strauss,Ma x Muller, and Ca rlvle . Second Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 20, cloth. 1871 . 2s. 6d .
LBWES .— PBOBLEI S or LIFE ANDMIND . By G eorge Henry Lewes. First Series
The Found a tions of a Cre ed . Vol. I . , demy 8vo. Fourth ed ition, pp. 488 , cloth.
1 884 . 12s .— Vol. IL , d emy 8vo, pp. 552 , cloth. 1 875. 1
LBWBB.— PIIOBI.EMS or LIrE a rmMIND . B G eorge Henry Lewes. Second Series.
Tux PHYS ICA L BA S IS or MIND . 8vo, w it Illustra tions, pp. 508, cloth. 1877.l6s. Contents.
— The N a ture of Life ; The N ervousMecha nism; A nima l A utoma tism; The Refle x Theory .
LBWBS .— PEOBI.EE S or LIFE A NDMnm. By Henry Lewes. Third Series.
Problem the First— The Stud y of Psychology : ts Object, Boom,and Me thod .
D emy'8vo, pp. 200, cloth. 1 879. 7s. 6d .
W ES — Psoria si s or LIE]: AND MIND . By G eorge Henry Lewe s. Third Series.
Problemthe Second — Mind as a Function of the Organism. Problemthe ThirdThe Sphe re of Sense a nd Logic of Fee ling. Problem the Fourth— The Sphere ofIntd lect and Logic of Signs. D emy 8vo, pp. x . and 500, cloth. 1 8 79. 15s.
LEWB .— See Juvmur. a nd Pan" .
LIBRARIANS, Ta a x sac
'rrons sun Paocx snmos or run Conrsa a x ca mamas“
London. October 1 877. Ed ited b Edward B Bushman“mh h u xn YJ‘Q-h k “
Imperi a l 8vo, pp. 276, cloth. 1 87 21 . 8s
42 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,LIBRARY A SSOCIATION OF THE UNITED MGBOM, Transactions and ProceedIngs of the A nnua lMe e tings of the . Imperia l 8vo, cloth. FIRST (Ox ford ,
Ed ited by the Secreta ries, Henry R. Tedder and Ernest C. Thomas .vi i i . a nd 1 92. 1879. £1 , 8s.— SECOND (Manchester, 187 Ed ited by H .
Tedder a nd E. C. Thomas . Pp. x . and 184 . 1 880. £1 , 1s.
— THIED (Ed inburgh,E dited by E . C. Thoma s a nd C. Welsh. Pp . x . an
'
d 202 . 188 1 . £1 , ls.FOURTH and F IFTH (London, 1 881 , and Cambridge . Ed ited by E . C. Thoma s.Pp. x .
- 258 . 1885. 28s. SIXTH (Liverpool, Edited by E . C. Thomas.Pp. viii. and 204 . 1 886 . 1 6s.
“BEBE — THE Li ra A Nn LETTERS or FRANCIS LI EEER. Edited by T. 8 . Perry.
8vo, pp. Iv. and 440, cloth, with Portra it. 1 882 . 1 4 8 .
LITTLE FRENCHREADER(THE ). E x tra cted from TheModernFrench Reader.
”
Thi rd Ed i tion. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 12, cloth. 1 884 . 23.
LIVERSIDGE.— THE MINERA LS OE N EW SOUTH WA LES , k c. By A . Liversidge ,M. A , Professor OfChemistry andMinera logy in the University ofSydney.
Wi th la rge coloured ma p. Roya l 8vo, pp. viii. and 328, cloth. 1888 . 18s.
LLOYD A Nn NEWTON .— PRUSSIA
'
S REPRESENTATIVE MA N. By F. Lloyd and W.
Newton, Crown 8vo, pp. 648, cloth. 1875. 10s. 6d.
LOBSCHEID .— CHINEEE A ND ENGLISH D ICTIONARr, arranged according to
ca ls. By W. Lobsche id. 1 vol. imperia l 8vo, pp. 600, cloth.
LOBBOHBm.— ENGLISH AND CHINESE D ICTIONARr, with the Punti and Mandarin
Prox
éuncia tion. By“I. Lobsche id . Four Parts. Folio, pp.viii. and 2016 , boa rds.s.
LON0.— EA STERN PROVERBS . See Trubner
’s Oriental Series.
LOVELY.— ~WHERE TO GO ron HELP : Be ing a Companion for Quick and Easy
Reference of Police Sta tions, &c. , &c. , Of London and the Suburbs. Compiledby W. Love ly, R.N . Third Edi tion. 1 8mo, pp. 16, sewed . 1882 . 3d .
LOWELL.— TIIE BIGLOW PA PERS . By James Russell Lowell. Ed ited by Thomas
Hughes, Q.C. A Reprint of the A uthorised Edition of 1859, toge ther with the
Second Se ries of First a nd Second Series in 1 vol. Fcap. , pp. lxvii i - I‘IOand lx iv.- I90, cloth. 1880. 23. 6d.
LOWELL .- CHOSON : THE LAND or THEMORN ING CA LM. A Sk etch of K orea .
B5Pe rciva l Lowe ll, la te Fore ign Secre ta ry and Counse llor to the K orea n SMission to the United Sta te s of America ,Member of the A sia tic Society of span.
With numerous Full-Pa ge and other Illustra tions, and TwoMaps. Super royal8vo , pp. x . a nd 4 12 , cloth. 1886 . 243.
LUCA8 .— THE CHILDREN
'
S PENTATEUCH : With the Ha phtamhs or Portions fromthe Prophets. A rra nged for Jewish Children. ByMrs. Henry Lucas. Crown8vo, pp. viii. and 570, cloth. 1878. 5s.
LUDEWIG.— THE LITERATURE or A HERIcA N A BORIGINA L LANGUAGES. B Hermann
E . Ludewig. \Vith A dditions and Corrections by Professor Wm. Turner.
Ed ited by Nicolas Tri‘
tbner. 8vo, pp. x x iv. a nd 258, cloth. 1858 . 10s. 6d .
LUK IN .— AMONGSTMACHINES : A D escri tion of V a riousMechanica l A ppliances
used in theManufa cture of VVOOd ,Me ta &c. A Book for Boys. By the Rev.J.
Luk in. Second ed ition. Crown8vo, pp.viii. —336 . 64 Engravings, cloth. 1878 . 3s. 6d.
LUK IN.— THE YOUNGMECHANIC. Conta ining D irections for the Use of all K inds
of Tools, and the Construction of Steam-Engines, &c. , including the A rt of
Turning inWood a ndMeta l. A Book for Boys.
.
By the Rev. J. Lukm. Second
ed ition. W'
ith 70 Engravings. Crown 8vo, pp. vi . -346 . cloth. 1886. 3s¢6d .
LUB E — THE Bor ENGINEERS : Wha t they did , and how they did it. By the Rev.L . J: Luk in. A uthor of The YoungMecha nic," k c. A Book for Boys ; 30En
Impe ria l 1 6mo, pp.viii. and 344 , cloth . 1 87 1 . Su fid .
M GOORH A Q — THB CONvERSATIomor A Sour.wi 'mGooA'Tueodaa] . 331 m“
l la cCorma c,M.D . 1 6 am, pp. xvi . and 1 44 , cloth . \%t'
l“5‘ 6d .
A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s ,m uom .
— BELISA IRE. Par Marmontel. ’ Nouvelle Edition. 12mo, pp. x ii.a nd 123, cloth . 1 867 . 2s. 6d .
MARSDEN .— NUII ISII ATA ORIENTAL IA ILLUSTRATA . TE E PLATES or TE E ORI ENTA L
COINS , A NCIENT, A ND MOD ERN, of the Collection of the la te W'
illiamMa rsd enk c. tic. Engraved from Dra wings ma de under his D irections. 4to, SI
Pla tes, cloth. 31s. 6d .
MARTIN — Br SOLENT A ND D ANUBE . Poems and Ba llads. ByW. WilseyMartin.
Crown 8vo, pp x ii . a nd 1 70, cloth. 1 885. 3s. 6d .
MARTIN .
— THE CE INES E : TE EIREDUCATION, PE ILOSOPE T, AND LETTERS . By W.
A . P. Ma rtin, D .D . , LL.D . , President of the Tungwen College , Pe k in. 8vo, pp.320, cloth. 1 88 1 . 7s. 6d .
MARTINEAU.— ESSA YS , PE ILOSOPE ICAL A ND TE EOLOG IOAL . By JamesMartineau.
2vols. crown 8vc, pp. iv. and 4 14— x . a nd 430, cloth. 1875. £1, 4s.
MARTINEA IL— LEIT ERS PROII IRELA ND . By Ha rrietMa rtineau. Reprinted fromthe D a dy N ews. Post 8vo, pp. viii. a nd 220, cloth. 1852. 6s. 6d .
MASON.
— BURMA : ITS PEOPLE A ND PRODUCTIONS ; or, N otes on the Fauna , Flora ,a nd Mine ra ls of Tena sserim, Pegu a nd Burma . By the Rev. F. Mason, D . D . ,
8m. Vol. I . G EOLOGY,MINERA LOGr, AND ZOOLOGY. V ol. II. BOTA NT.
Rewritten a nd Enla rged by W'
. Theoba ld , la te D eputy-Supe rintendent G eologica l
Survey of Ind ia . Two Vela ,roya l 8vo, pp. x xvi. and 560 ; xvi. a nd 788 and
x x xvi. , cloth. 1 884. £3.
MATHEWS .— A BRA E A II IBN EzaA
'
S COMMENTARY ON TEE CANTICLES A PTER TE E
FIRST RECENS ION . Ed ited from theMSS. , with a tra nsla tion, by H. J.Ma thews,B.A . , Ox ford . Crown 8vc, pp. x 34 , and 24 , limp cloth. 1 874 . 6d .
MATERIAMEDICA . PHYS IOLOG ICA L A ND A PPLIED . Vol. I. Contents z— A conitum,
by R. E . D udgeon,M.D . ; Crota lus, b y J. \V. Ha ywa rd . M.D . ; D igi ta lis, by F.
Black ,M.D K a li Bichromicum,byJ. J. D rysd a le , M.D . ; Nux Vomica
, by F .
la
s
i
jk, {M.D Plumbum,
by F. Bla ck , M.D . D emy 8vo, pp. x x iv. — 726 , cloth.
5s.
MAXWELL — A MA NUA L or TE EMA LA Y LA NGUAG E. ByW. E . MA x WELL. A ssistantRe sid ent. Pe ra k , Ma la y Peninsula . W i th a n Introductory Sk e tch of the Sansk ritElement inMa la y . Crown 8vc, pp. vi ii . and 182, cloth . 1 882 . 7s. 6d .
MAYER— ON TE E A RT or POTTERY : with a History of its Rise and Progress in
Liverpool. By JosephMa yer, k c. 8vo, pp. 100, boa rds. 1 873. 5s.
MAYERS — THE CHI NES E GOVERNMENT : a Ma nua l of Chinese Titles, ca tegorica llya rra nged and e x pla ined ,
w ith an A ppendi x . By “rm. Fred . Ma yers, Chine seSecre ta ry to Lega tion a t Pe k ing, Ate dtc. Second ed ition, wi th
a dd itions by G . M. H. Pla yfa ir. Roya l 8vo, pp. lx i x .— 158
,cloth. 1 886 . 15s.
M‘CRINDLB.
— A NCIENT IND IA , A S D ESCRIBED Br MEGA STE ENES A ND A RRIAN ;be ing a Tra nsla tion of the Fra gments of the Ind ik a of Mega stli enes collected
‘b’Dr. Scli wanbeck , and of the first pa rt of the Ind ik a of A rrian. By J.
M‘Crindle , M. A .
,Princi a l of the G overnment College , Pa tna , Ate . W ith
Introduction,Notes, an Map of A ncient Ind ia . Post 8vo, pp. x i. a nd 224 ,
cloth. 1877. 7s. 6d .
a
N RINDLE — TE E COMMERCE A ND NA VIG ATION OE TE E ERTTERE A N SEA . Be in
a Transla tion of the Peri lusMa ris Erytli rzni , by a n A nonymous \Vriter, a nd o
A rrian’s A ccount of the oya e e of N ea rk hos fromtheMouth of the Indus to the
Hea d of the Pe rsia n Gulf. IVith Introduction, Commenta ry, Notes, and Pnde x .
By J. “I. M‘Crindle , Post 8vo, pp. iv. a nd 238 , cloth . 1879. 7s. 6d.
l a wman — A N CIENT INDIA , A s D ES CRIBED Br K TES IA S TE E K NID IA N ; be ing a
gem of the A bridgment of his ludik a
”
{yPhetiws
iaudpgo t a t ark re served in other“I °
ters. Wit Intro a n‘
i on .Q MN “ 3k
8 1 1 . IV M.A . ,8vo , pp.viii . aud ‘s , \m . Qua .
46 A Ca ta logue of Important Work s,m LHOUSE.
— MA NUA L or ITA LIA N CONVERSAc'
iON . For the Use of Schools. ByJohnMilIhouse . 1 8mo, pp. 1 26 , cloth. 1 866. 2s.
MILNE — N OTES ON CRTSTA LLOGRA PBr A ND CRI STA LLO-rnrsws. Be ing the Substa nce Of L e ctures de livered a t Yedo during the years 1876 — 1877. By JohnMilne , F .G . S 8vo, pp. viii . a nd 70, cloth. 1 879. 33MILTON and VONDEL .
— See EDNUNDSON .
MITRA — BUD DHA G A YA : The Hermita ge of Sfi k yaMuni. By Ra jendriila lsMitra ,LL.D . , C. I .E , Si c. 4 to
, pp. xvi . a nd 258,with 51 Pla tes, cloth. 1 879. £3.
MOCATI‘A .
— MORA L BIBL ICA L G LEAN INGS A ND PRACTICA L TEACHINGS , I llustra tedby Biogra phica l S k e tche s D ra wn from the Sa cred Volume . By J. L.Moca ttn.
8vo , pp. viii . a nd 4 46 , cloth. 1 872 . 78 .
MODERN FRENCH READER (THE) . Prose . JuniorCourse . Tenth Edition. Ed itedby Ch. Ca ssa l, LL.D .
, and Theodore K a rcher,LL.B . Crown 8vo, pp. x iv. and 224,
cloth. 1 88 4 . 2s. 6d .
SENIORCOURSE. Third Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. x iv. and 4 18, cloth. 1880. 4s.
MODERN FRENCH READER — A G LOSSARY of Id ioms, G a llicisms, and other D ifli
cultic-t conta ined in the Senior Course of theModern French Render ; with ShortN otice s of the most importa nt French \Vri ters a nd Historica l or Litera ry Cha racters
,a nd hints a s to the work s to be re a d or stud ied . By Charles Cassa l, LL .D . ,
SIC. Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 104 , cloth. 1 881 . 2s. 6d .
MODERN PRENCH READER.— SENIORCOURSE AND G LOSSARY combined . 6s.
MORELET.
— TRAVELS I N CENTRA L AMERICA,including A ccounts of some Regions
une x plored since the Conquest. Fromthe French of A . N ot ele t, byMrs. M. F.
Sq i i ier. Ed ited by E . G . Squier. 8vo, pp. 430, cloth . 1 87 1 . 8s. 6d .
MORFILE.— S IMPL IPIED POLISH GRAMMA R. See Trubner
'
s Collection.
MORI-‘IT.— A PRACTICA L TREATIS E ON THE BIA NCFAC'I‘URE or SOA PB. By Cam bell
Morfit,M. D . , F .G .S . \Vith Illustra tions. D emy 8vo, pp. x ii. and 2 70, c oth.
1 87 1 . £2 , 12s. 6d .
MON TE — A PRA CTICA L TREATISE ON PURE FERTILIZERS, and the Chemica l Conversion of Rock Gua nos, Ma rlstones, Coprolites, a nd the Crude Phospha te s ofLime a nd A lumina genera lly intovariousva lua ble Products. By C . Morfit,M.D
\Vi th 28 Pla tes. 8vo, pp. xvi . and 547, cloth. 1 873. £4 , 4s.
MORRIS — A D ESCRIPTIVE A ND HISTORICA L A CCOUNT or TE E GOD AVERY D ISTRICT,IN THE PRESI DENCi
'
orMA DRA S . By HenryMorris , formerly of theMa dra s CivilService . W i th a Map. 8vo , pp. x ii . a nd 390, Cloth. 1 878 .
MOSENTHAL.
-OSTRICHES A ND OSTRICH FARN ING . By J. de Mosentha l, la teMember of the Legistive Council Of the Ca
pe Of Good Hope , (tc. , and James E.
Hurting, F .Z .S . Second Ed ition. Vith 8 full-pa ge illustra tions and 20woodcuts. Roya l 8vo, pp. x x iv. and 246 , cloth. 1 879. 108 . 6d .
MOTLEY.— JORN LOTHROP MoTLE i' a Memo ir. By Oliver Wendell Holmes.
English Copyright Ed ition. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii . and 2 75, cloth. 1 878. (is.
MUELLER.
—'
l‘iI E ORGA NIC CONSTITUENTS or PLA NTS A ND VEG ETABLE SUBSTA NCES ,
a nd the ir Chemica l A na lysis. By D r. G . C. \Vittste in. A uthorised Transla tionfrom the G erma n Origina l, enla rged with numerous A dd itions, by Ba ron Ferd.
vonMue lle r, M. Ph . D F .R.S . Crown svo, pp. xviii . and 332 ,wrappe r. 1880. 1 4 8 .
MUELLER — SELECT EXTRA -TROPICA L PLANTS REA D ILY ELIG IBLE FOR INDUSTRIA LCULTURE OR N ATURA LISATION . With Ind ica tions of the ir N a tive Countries andsome of the irUses. By F. Von Mueller, K .C.M.G M.D . , Ph.D . . 8vo,pp . x .
, 304 , cloth. 1 880. 83.
m .— EX TRA CTS FROMTHE CORAN. In the Original, with English rendering.
Comp iled by S i r lVilliamMuir, LE D -s h im“ Oi “Tbs Life ofMahome t. S e cond E dition. Cumin 8vo, pp . m and ifl,
‘h fi A .
48 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s ,
NAPIER.-.FOI.x LORE ; or, Superstitious Beliefs n the West of Scotland within
this Century. “fith an A ppe nd ix , showing the proba ble re la tion of the mod ernFestiva ls of Christma s,May D a y. St. John s D a y, and Ha llows
’
en, to ancient Sun
and Fire Worship. By James N apier, F. E. , duo. Crown 8vc, pp. vii. and190, cloth. 1878. 4s.
ARADIYA DHARMA SASTBA ; OR, TE E INe rCrEs or N A BA DA . Transla ted , forthe first time , from the unpublished Sa nsk rit origina l. By D r. JiIlius JollyUniversity ,
W'
urzburg. With a Preface , Notes, chiefly critica l, an Inde x 0
Quota tions from N a ra da in the principa l India n D igests. and a genera l Ind ex .
Crown 8vc, pp. x x xv. and 1 4 4 , cloth . 1876 . 10s. 6d .
NAVE LE PI'I‘IIOII . See Egypt Ex plora tion Fund .
NEVILL — HAND LIST or MOLLUSCA IN THE IND IAN Mussels. ByG eoffrey Nevill, &c.
, First A ssista nt to the Superintendent of theInd Ia n Museum. Pa rt I . G a stropod a , Pulmona ta , a nd Prosobra nchia -N euro
bra nchia . 8vo, pp. xvi . and 338 , cloth. 1878 . 159 .
NEW CATHOLIC CHURCH (THE). — With Thoughts on The ism,and Suggestions
towards a PublicRelIgious Service in Ha rmony withMode rn Science and Philo
fipl
é‘y’. Tenth Ed itIon, Revised and Enla rged . Crown 8vo , pp. 1 70, cloth. 1 887.
NEWMAN. T IIE 0 0m0? HORACE . Transla ted intoUnrhymedMetres, with Introduction and Notes. By F. W
'
. Newman. Second Ed ition. Post 8vo, pp . x x i.and
NEWMAN . DOC'rRINA I. AND PRACTICA L ; or, Dida cticReligiousUttern ess.
By F. “f. N ewma n. 4 to, pp. 1 84 , cloth. 1858. 4s. 6d .
NEWMAN.
— HOE ERIC TRA NSLA TION IN THEORY A ND PRACI'ICE . A Reply toMatthewArnold. By F . W. N ewman. Crown 8vo, pp. 104 , stiff covers. 1861 . 2s. 6d .
NEWMA N .
— HIAWATIIA : Rendered into La tin. lVith A bridgment. By F. W.
Newma n. 12mo, pp. vii . a nd 1 10, sewed . 1862 . 28 . 6d .
NEWMA N .
— A H Isro avor THE HEBREWMONARCE r from the A dministration of
Samuel to the Ba hylonish Captivity . By F . \V. N ewman. Third Edition. Crown
8vo, pp . x . a nd 354 , cloth . 1865. 8e . 6d .
NEWMA N.— PHA SES or FA I‘rII ; or, Pa ssages from the H istory of my Creed. By
F. W . N ewma n. New Ed ition ; w ith Reply to Professor Henry Rogers, Authorof the Eclipse of Fa ith. Crown 8vo, pp. vi ii . a nd 2 12 . cloth. 1 88 1 . 3s. 6d.
NEWMAN — A HA NDBOOK orMOD ERN A RA BIC, consisting of a Pra ctica l Gramma r,w ith nume rous E x amples, D ia logues, a nd N ewspa pe r E x tra cts, in European
Type . By F . “f. Newman. Post 8vo, pp. x x . and 192 , cloth. 1 866 . 6s.
NEWMA N .
— TRA Ns I.ArIONs or ENGLISH POE'ra r IN'
ro L ATIN VERSE. D esigned asPa rt of a N ewMe thod of Instructing in La tin. By F. W. N ewman. Crown 8vo,pp. x iv. and 202 , cloth. 1868.
NEWMAN.— THE SOUL . Her Sorrows and her A s ira tions. A n Essay towa rds the
N a tura l History of the Soul, a s the True Ba sis O Theology . By F. W. Newman.
Tenth Ed ition. Post 8vo , pp. x ii. a nd 1 62 , cloth. 1882. 3s. 6d.
NEWMAN — TE E TEx'
r or THE IGUVINE INSCRIP‘
I’
lONS . With Interlinear La tinTra IIsla t Ion and Notes. By F . \V. Newma n. 8vo
, pp . 56 , sewed . 1 868 . 2s .
NEWMAN.— MISCELLA N IES ; chie fly A ddresses, A cademics] and Historical! By F.
W. Newma n. 8vc, pp. iv. a nd 356 , cloth. 1 869. 78 . 6d .
NEWMAN .— T II E I I. lA D or HOMER, fa ithfully tra nsla ted into Unrhymed English
Metre , by F . lv. Newma n. R0} a l 8vo, pp. xvi. a nd 384 , cloth. 6d .
— A D ICI'IQNARI'
orMODERN A RA BIC. l . A nglo-A rab ic D ictionary . 2 .
A ng lo -Ambw Voca bula ry. 3. A ra ho English D ictiona ry By F. W. N ewmm.
I n 2 vols. crown 8wo, pp. xvi. and 376 cloth . XSTI . £1 , 1 s.
— HEBREW TIIKISM. By3. W . N ewman. Roysl hvo, YY N’
x'
ix . a\h“1 .
S k i wrapp ers . 18 74 . 6d.
Published by Tram cf: 00.
NEWMAN — RELIGION NorHISTOR’. By F. W. Newman. ..Foolscap, n) . 58, paperwrapper. 1 877. Is.
— MORNING PRAYEBS IN TEE HOUS-OLD or A BELIEVER IN GOD . B F.
W. Newman. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, pp. 80, limp cloth. 1 882. Is.
NEWMAN — RECRGANIEATION or ENGLISH INSTITUTIONS. A Le cture by EmeritusProfessdr F. W. N ewman. Crown 8vo, pp. 28, sewed . 1880. 6d .
NEWMAN — WHAT IS CEBISTI AN ITT WITHOUT CEBIST I By F. W. Newman.8vo,, pp. 28, stitched in wrapper. 188 1 . Is.
NEWMAN .— LIBYA N VOCABULARY . A n Essay towards Reproducing the A ncient
Numid ian La ngua ge out ofFourModern L a ngua ges. By F. W. N ewma n. Crown8vo. pp. vi . and 204 , cloth. 1882 . 10s. 6d .
NEWMA N .
— K A BA I I. VOCABULARI'. By F . W. N ewman. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 24 ,cloth. 1 887 . 58 .
NEWMAN — A CERISTIA N COEEONWEA LTE . By F. W. Newman. Crown 8vo. pp.
(30, cloth . 1 883. Is.
NEWMAN .
— CHRI STIANITY IN ITS CRA DLE . By F . W. Newman. Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, pp. vi. and 172. cloth. 1 884 . 5s. 6d .
NEWMAN .— COIIE ENTS ON TEE TEx T or E SCETLUS . By F. W. Newman. D emy
8vo, pp. x ii. and 144
,cloth. 1 884 . be.
NEWMAN .
— REBILIUS CRUSO : Robinson Crusoe in La tin. A Book to LightenTedium to a Le a rner. By F .W. N ewman.Emeritus Professor of La tin in University College , London. Post 8yo, pp . x ii . a nd 1 10, cloth . 1 884 . 5s.
NEWMAN .— LIFE A FTER D EATH ? Pa linodia . By F. W. Newman, Emeritus Pro
fessor,M.E . A .S. D emy 8vo, pp. iv. and 51 , sewed. 1886 . Is.
NEW SOUTHWALES,PUBLICATIONS or TE E GOVERNIIENT or. List on Application.
NEW SOUTH WALES.— JOURNA L A ND PROCEEDINGS or TEE ROYAL SOCIETr or.
Published a nnua lly . Price 10s. 6d.
NEWTON .
— PATENT LAw A ND PRACTICE : showing the mod e of obta ining a ndOpposing G ra nts, Discla imers, Confirma tions, a nd E x tensions of Pa tents. With a
Cha pte r on Pa tent A gents. By A . V . N ewton. Enlarged Ed ition. Crown 8vo,pp. x ii. and 104, cloth. 1879. 2s. 6d .
NEWTON — A N A NA LYSIS or TE E PATENT AND CorrEIGE T LAWS : Includ ing theva rious A cts rela ting to the Protection of Inventions, Designs, Pa intings, Photogra phs, &c. By A . N ewton. D emy 8vo, pp . viii. and 70, cloth. 1884 . 3s. 6d .
NEW ZEALAND INSTITUTE PUBLICATIONS
I . TRANSA CTIONS A ND PROCEED INGS of the New Z ealand Institute . D emy 8vo,stitched. Vols. I . to XVL , 1 868 to 1 883. £1 , 1 s. each.
I I . A N lNDEx To TE E TRA NSACTIONS A ND PROCEEDINGS of the N ew Ze a land In
stitute . Vols. I. to II . Edited by James Hector, C.M.Gu, M.D F.R.S.
D emy 8vo, 44 pp. , stitched. 1 877. 2s. 6d .
NEW gunman.— GEOLoG ICA L Se am . List of Publica tions on a pplica tion.
NICHOLS and DYMOND .— PRACTICAL V A LUE or CHRISTIA NITY. Two Prize
Essays. By the Rev. J. Broadhurst N ichols a nd Charles William Dymond ,F . S
éA. Crown 8vo, cloth, pp.vi i. and 152 . 1 888 . 38 . 6d.
NORMAN — G amma “TEEORIQCE ErPRA TIQUE DE LA LANGIIE A NGLA ISE. Par
F . B. Norman. Professeur d’A ngla is a l
’Ecole Commercia l’e do V ienna A uteur
d'
une G ramma ire A n Ia ise a l’Usage des A llemands, &c. EtMme . R . N cu w am
(née G era rd A ncien rofesseur do Franviu hMondrian. “emu‘Ba o gwe .”In —“N .
sewed. 1 887. 3s. 6d .
50 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,NOURSE.
— N ARRATIvE or TE E SECOND A RCTIC Ex TED ITION IIADE Br CHARLES F.
HA LL. His Voyage to Repulse Ba y ; Sledge Journeys to the Stra its of Fury and
Heels , and to K ing Vl'
illiam’s La nd
,and Residence among the Esk imos during
the yea rs 1864- 69. Ed ited unde r the orders of the Hon. Secreta ry Of the N avy,
byProf. J. E . Ncurse , N . 4 to, I. l. a nd 644 , cloth. Withmaps, heliotypes,stee l and wood engravings. 1 880. El, 8e.
NUGENT’
S IMPROVED FRENCH AND ENGLISH AND ENGLISH AND FRENCH PoemD ICTIONARY. Pa r Smith. 24mo, pp. 4 89 a nd 320, cloth. 1 873. 3s.
NUMISMATA ORIENTALIA ILLUSTRATA . SeeMARSDEN. and INTERNA TIONAL.
NUTR— Two TREATINES ON VERBS CONTA IN ING FEEBLE AND DOUBLE LETTERS. ByR. Jehuds Ha yug of Fez. Transla ted into Hebrew from the original Arabic byR. Moses G ik a tilia Of Cordova , with the Treatise on Punctua tion by the sameauthor,
.
tra nsla ted by A lien Ezra . Ed ited fromBodleianMSS. ,with an English
transla ti on, by J. W. Nutt,M.A . D emy 8vo, pp. 312, sewed. 1870. 50.
NUTL — A SKETCH or SAMARI‘I'AN HISTORY, BOSNIA , AND LITERATURE.
troductIon to Fragments of a Sama ritan Ta rgum.
” ByJ. W. Nutt,M.A . , to. ,&c. D emy 8vo, pp. 180, cloth. 1 874 . 5s.
OERA LINDA BOOK (THE). -Froma Manuscript Of the 13th Century, with the permission Of the propri etor, C. Over de Linden of the Holde r. The Ori ginal FrIsisn
Tex t a sverified by D r. J. O. Ottema , accompanied b an EnglIsh Vernon of D r.
Ottema ’c. D utch Transla tion. ByW
'
. R. Sandbach. vo, pp. x xv. and 254, cloth.
1876 . 5s.
«MER E — Esau SUE LA SITUATIONRUSSB. Lettres a un A ngla is. ParN . Ogarefl‘
.
12mo, pp. 150, sewed . 1862. 3s.
OLCOT'
I‘
.— A BUIIDHIST CATEOE ISII , a ccord ing to the Canon of the Southern Church.
By ColonelH. S . Olcott, President of the Theosophica l Socie ty. 24 IIIO, pp. 32. 1s.
OLLENDORFF.— METODO PARA A PREND ER A LEER, escribir y habla r ol I a glés segnn
el sistema de Ollendorfl'
. POTRamon Pa lenzuela yJuan de la Garrobo. 8vo, pp.x lvi . and 460, cloth . 1 873. 7s. 6d .
K EY to D itto. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 12 , cloth. 1 873. 4s.
OLLENDORFF.
— METODO PARA APRENDER A LEER escribir y habla r el Frances,segun elverda dero sistema de Ollendorff ; ordenado en lecciones progresiva s, consistiendo de e jercicios ora les y escrItos enriquecido de la pronunciacion figurada
como se estila en la conversacIon ; y d e un A pénd ice abra zando las reglas de la
sintax is, la forma cion de losverbos regula t es, y la conjuga cion de los irregula res.PorTeodoro S imonne, Professorde Le ngua s. Crown 8vc. Ip. 342, cloth. 1 873. 6a.K EY to D itto. Crown 8vo, pp. 80, cloth. 1 873. 3G.
OPPER‘
I‘
.— ON TIIE CLA S AI EIOATION orDA NGUAGES A Contribution to Compa ra tive
Philology . By D r. GustavOpport, Ph.D . , Profe ssor of Sa nsk rit, PresidencyCollege ,Ma d ra s . 8vo, pa pe r, pp. VIII. a nd 1 46. 1 883. 7s. 6d .
OPPERT.— L isTs or SANsx RIT MANUSCII ITTS in Priva te Libraries of Southern
Ind ia , Coml ed . A rrange d , and Inde x ed by GustavOppert, Ph. D . , Professor Of
Sa nsk rit, Presidency College , Ma dra s. Vol. I . 8vo, pp. vii. a nd 620, cloth. 1 883.
£1 , 1 s.
OPPERT.— ON TE E WEAPONS , A RMY ORGANISATION, A ND POLITICA LMu ms or
TH IS A NCIENT HINDUS ; wIth specIa l reference to Gunpowde r a nd Firea rms. ByD r. G ustavOppert, Ph.D . , Professor of Sansk rit
, Presidency College , Madra s.
8vo, pa per . pp. vi . and 1 62. 1883. 7s. 6d .
ORIENTAL SERIES — See TRCBNER'
S ORIENTA L SERIES.
OW TAL TE x T SOCIETY’S PUBLICATIONS. A listmay be had on Applica tion.
ORIENTA L CONGRESS. REroRT or TE E PROCEEDINGS or TE E SECOND INTERNATIONA L CONGRES S or ORIENTA LISTS HELD IN LONDON , ISM. Ba sal Sa c , we.wa s. and 68
, se wed . 1874 . 5a .
52 A Ca ta logue of ImportantWork s,PARm .o -TIIEODORE PAREER
’S CELEBRA TED D ISCOURSE ONMA TTERS PERTA ININ G To
RELIG ION . People'
s Ed ition. Cr. 8vo, pp. 35L 1 872 . Stitched , 1 s. 6d . ; cl. , 2s.
PARKER.— THE COLLECTED WORK S OP THEODORE PARERE ,Minister of the Twenty
e ighth Congre tiona l Society a t Boston, U.S . Conta inin his Theologica l,Polemica l, a n Cri tical \Vritings Sermons, Spe eches, ~ eu A ddresses and
Lite ra ryMiscella nies. In 1 4 vols. 8vo , cloth. 6s. e ach.
Vol. I . D iscourse onMa tte rs Perta ining to Religion. Preface by the Editor,a nd Portra it of Pa rk er froma med allion by Saulini. Pp . 380.
Vol . II . Ten Sermons and Pr ayers. Pp . 360.
V ol. I I I. D iscourses of Theology. Pp. 318.Vol. I V. D iscourses on Politics. Pp. 312 .
Vol. V . D iscourses of Slavery . I . P 336 .
Vol. V I . D iscourses of Slavery . I I . 323.
V ol. V II. D iscourses of Social Science . Pp. 296Vol. V I II. Miscellaneous Discourses. Pp. 230.
Vol. IX . Critical Writings. I . Pp. 292 .
Vol. X . Critical lVritings. I I . Pp. 308 .
Vol. X I . Se rmons of The ism,A the ism
, and Popular Theology . Pp. 257 .
VOL XI I. A utob iogra phica l andMiscella neous Pieces. Pp. 356 .
Vol. XI I I . H istoric America ns . P 236 .
Vol. XIV . Le ssons from the WOT d of Ma tter and the IVorld ofMan. Pp.
352 .
PABK BB .— MALA G ASY GRAMMAR. Se e Trubner
’
s Collection.
PARRY.— A SHORT CHAPTER ON LETTER-CHA NGE , with E x amples. Be ing chiefly
an a ttempt to reduce in a simple ma nne r the pri ncipa l cla ssic al and cogna te wordsto the ir primitive meanings. By J. Pa rry , B .A . , formerly Schola r of Corpus
Christi College , Cambridge . Fcap. 8vo, pp. 1 6 , wrapper. 1884 . Is.
PATERSON .
— NOTES ON MILITARY SURVEYING A ND RECONNA ISSANCE. By LieutColone l Pa te rson. Six th Ed ition. IVith 1 6 Pla tes. D emy 8vo, pp. x ii.a nd 1 46 , Cloth. 1 882 . 7s. 6d .
PATERSON.— TOPOGRAPRICA L EXAMINATION PAPERS. By Lieut.-Col. W. Peterson.
8vo, pp. 32, with 4 Pla tes. Boa rds. 1 882 . 2s.
PETERSON — Tau ru s ON MILITARY D RAWING . With a Course of ProgressivePla tes. By Capta in \V. Pa terson, Profe ssor ofMilita ry D r awing a t the Roya lMilita ry College , Sa ndhurst. Oblong 4 to , pp. x ii. and 31 , cloth. 1 862. £1 , 1s.
PATERBON.— THE OROMETERPOE H ILLMEA SURING , combining Sca les of D istances
Protra ctor, Clinometer, Sca le Of Horizonta l Equiva lents, Sca le of Sha de, andTa ble of G ra d ients. By Capta inWilliamPa terson. On ca rdboa rd . 1 s.
PATERSON.— CENTRA L AMERICA . By W . Pa terson, the Merchant Sta te sman.
Froma MS. in the BritishMuseum, 1701 . With a MAp. Edited by S . Bannister,M.A . 8vo, pp. 70, sewed . 1 857. 2s. 6d .
PATON.— A HISTORY or TRE EGYPTIAN REVOLUTION,
fromthe Period of theMamsluk es to the D ea th OfMohammed A li ; from A rab and EuropeanMemoirs, OralTra dition,
and Loca lResearch. By A . A . Pa ton. Second Ed ition. 2vols. demy8vo, pp. x ii. a nd 395,vii i. a nd 4 46, Cloth. 1870. 7s. 6d .
PATON.— HENRY BEYLE (otherwise D E A Critica l and Biographical
Study, a id ed by Origina l D ocuments a nd Cu rublished Le tters fromthe Private
Papers of the Fam'
y of Beyle . By A . A . a ton. Crown 8vo, pp. 340 cloth.
1 874 . 7s. 6d.
C
1 4 1 7 017. — THB' DEATH or D EATH ; or, A Stud of God’s Holiness in Connection
wi th th e Ex istence of Evil, in so far a s Intel igent and Responsible Beings are
C once rne d . By a n Orthodox Layman \J0111 1M.Patter“. B ummfi en , use“8vo
. pp . x vi . a nd 252, cloth. 1 881 . 6s.
Published by Triibner cf: Co. 53
PAm .— Su oN DEMONTrORT, EA IR. OP LEIOESTER, the Crea tor of the House of
Commons. By Reinhold Pauli . Transla ted by Una M. Goodwin. With Introduction by Ha rrietMartineau. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi . and 340, cloth. 1 876 . (is.
PBTRIB.— TA NIS A ND NAUERATIS. See Egyptian E x plora tion Fund , p. 21 .
I’m - A Smsos‘m Ram . 1 887. By W. M. Flinders Petrie , A uthor or
“Pyramflis and Temples of G izeh,
”&c., 810. With 32 Pla tes. 4 to, pp. 42, boards.
1 888. 12s.
— TnsRELATION or TEE A IRTOTE E OLOTEES WE WEAR, TEE HOUSIWE LIVE IN , AND TE E SOILws DWELL ON . By D r.M. Von Pettenk ofer. A bridged
wah a
zfslgdted by A . Hess,M.D . , are . Crown 8vo, pp.viii. and 96, limp cloth.
m ucm .— PRELIE INA IRES D E LA QUESTION BOEA INE DEM. ED . A BOUT. Par
F. Petruccelli de la Ga ttina . 8vo, pp. xv. and 364 , cloth. 1 860. 7s. 6d .
PH I L— A BYAN PHILOLOGY,according to the most
‘
recent researches (GlottologiaA ria Recentissima ). Remark s Historica l and Critical. By D omenico Pezzi.
Transla ted by E . S . Roberts,M.A . Crown 8vo, pp. xvi. and 200, cloth. 1 879. 6s.
m 3.— WOI EN A ND WORK. An E ssa y on the Rela tion to Health and Physi
ca lDevelopment Of the Higher Educa tion of G irls, and the Inte llectua l ormoreSystema tical Effort Of Women. By Emily Pfe ifi er, author of G eragd
'
sMonument,
”M. Crown 8vo, pp. 186, cloth. 1 887. 6s.
PHANTASMS OF THE LIVING — By Edmund Gurney,M.A . ,late Fellow of Trinity
College, Cambridge FredericW. H.Myers,M.A ., la te Fellow of Trinity Colle 9
,
Cambridge ; and Fra nk Podmore . M.A . (Published with the sa nction of 0
Council of the Society forPsychica l Resea rch). 2vols. demy 8vo. pp. lx x x iv. and574 and x xviii. and 734 , cloth. 1 886 . 2 1s.
PRAYER— A HISTORY'
OP BURMA . SeeMDner’s Oriental Series.
PRAYER— TEE COINS OP A EA E AN . or PEGU, A ND or BURMA . By Sir A rthur
Phayre , C.B. , la te Commissioner of British Burma . Royal4to, pp. viii - 4 8 , with A utotype Illustra tive Pla tes. \Vra pper. 1 882. 88 . 6d.
Pm .— THE DOCTRINE OP A DDAI , TE E A POSTLE , now first ed ited in a com
lete form in the Original Syriac, with English Transla tion a nd Notes. Byrge Phillips, D .D . . President Of Queen
’
s College , Cambridge . 8vo, pp. xv.and 52 and 53, cloth. 1 876. 7s. 6d .
Pm .— K OPA L-K UND ALA : A Ta le of Benga li Life . Tra nslated from the Ben
of Bunk imCha ndra Cha tterjee . By H . A . D . Phillips. Benga l Civil Service .
wn 8vo, pp. x x x - 208 , cloth. 1 885. Ba.
PHILOLOGIOAL SOCIETY, TRANSACTIONS or, published irregularly. List of publi
ca tions Ou applica tion.
PIOCIO'I'I‘Q — SEETOE ES or A NGLO-JEWISE HISTORY. ByJames Picciotto. Demy
8vc, pp. x i. and 420,cloth . 1 875. l 2a.
PICK — MEMORY A ND ITS DocrORS . By D r. E. Pick , A uthor of “On
I‘
3zm8'118’
88md1the Ra tiona lMe ans Of Improving It.” 18mo, cloth, pp. vi. and
m e! (law n — CERES PAPERS AND PROBLENS . By James Pierce,M.A . , andW.
‘
Timbrell Pierce . Crown 8 170 , cloth, pp. 226 . 1 888. 6s. 6d .
PIESSR- Gm mrnr is run Sum o-Room be ing the subgta nce of a Oourss ofLessons to Practica l Brewers. With Ta bles of A lcohol, E x tra ct , a nd
‘
Qfi
-sk
Sn
Ft’ISBy
Charles 11 . Please , PubYIc hunks“. RSEQ A VQ . am .“k s
a t 7 58 .
54 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,PLAYl-
‘
AIBI — TE E CITIES AND TOWNS OP CHINA . A G eogra phical Dictiona ry.
By G . M. H. Playfa ir, Of HerMa jesty’s Consular Service in China . 8vo, pp.
506, cloth. 18 79. £1 , 5s.
PLINY.— TE E LETT ERS OP PLINr TE E YOUNGER Transla ted b
yJ. D . Lewis,M.A . ,
Trinity College , Cambridge . Post 8vo, pp. m . and 390, clot 1 879. be.
PLUMPTRB.— K ING
’S COLLEGE LECTURES ON ELOCUTION ; on the PhyIIiOlogy and
Culture of Voice and Speech and the E x pression of the Emotions by Language ,
Countenance , a nd Gesture . TO which is adde d a Specia l Lecture on the uses
a nd Cure of the Imped iments Of Spe ech. By Cha rlesJohn Plumptre , Lectureron Public Rea d ing and Spe a k ing a t K ing
’
s College , London, in the EveningCla sses D epa rtment. D ed ica ted by permission to H .R.H . the Prince Of Wales.
{ganhig
rea tly Enla rged Illustra ted , Edition. Post 8vo, pp. xviii. and 494, cloth.
s.
PLUMPTRE — TE E RIGHT MODE or RFSPIRA TION IN REGARD TO SPEECH, SONG,A ND HEA LTH. By Cha rlesJohn Plumptre , A uthor Of
“K i ng
's College Lectures
on Elocution. Fourth Edition. D emy 8vo, pp. iv. and 1 6, wra pper. 1 886 . 1a.
PLUMPTRB.— G ENERA L SEETCE OP TE E HISTORY OP PA NTEEISM. By C. E
Plumptre . Vol. I . ,from the Ea rliest Times to the A ge Of Spinoza ; Vol. II. ,
from the A ge of Spinoza to the Commencement of the 1 9th Century. 2vols.
d emy 8vo, pp. viii. and 395; iv. and 348, cloth. 1 881 . 1 8s.
POLE — TE E PE ILOSOPE Y orMUSIC. See English and Fore ign Philosophica lLibrary.
POOLE — A N INDEx TOPERIODICA L LITERA TURE . ByW. F. Poole , LL.D . , Librarianof the Chica go Public Library. Third Ed ition, brought down to January1 882 . Roya l 8vo. pp. x xvi ii . and 1 442, cloth. 1 883. £3, 13s. 6d .
PRACTIOAL GUIDESFRANCE , BELGIUM, HOLLA ND , AND TE E RE INE. 1 8. — ITA LIA N LA KES . 1 s.
— W IN
TERING PLACES or THE SOUTE . 2s.— SWITZERLAND , SA VOY, A ND NORTH ITA LY.
2s. 6d .— G ENERA L CONTINENTAL GUID E. 5s.
— GENEVA . 1 s.— PARIS . la — BER
N ESE OBERLAND . la. — 1TA LY. 4s.
PRATT — A GRAMMAR A ND D ICTIONARY or TE E SAMOAN LA NGUA GE. By Rev.G eorge Pra tt, Forty Ye ars a Missionary of the L ondon Missionary Society inS amoa . Second Ed ition. Edi ted by Rev. S . J. Whitmee , Crown8vo, pp. viii. and 380, cloth. 1 878 . 1 88 .
PRINSBP.
— RECORD OP SERvICES OP TE E HONOURABLE EA ST IND IA CONPANY'S
CIVIL SERVA NTS IN TE E MA DRA S PRES IDENCY, from 174 1 to 1858. Compileda nd Ed ited fromRecords in the Pos’session of the Secreta ry of Sta te for Ind ia .By Cha rles C. Prinsep, Sta tistica lReporter, and la te Superintendent OfRecords,Ind ia Cflice . Post 8vo , pp. x x xvi . a nd 2 12 , cloth . 1 885. 1 0s. 6d.
PSYCHIC“. RESEARCH, PROCEEDINGS OP TE E SOCIETY FOR. Published
Post 8vo, cloth. Vol. I . , pp. 338 . 1884 . 108 . Vol. II ., pp. 356 .
Vol. pp. 510. 1 885. 10s. Vol. Iv. . pp. 614 . 1 887. 8s.
PUBITZ .— CODE-BOOE OP G YMNA STIC EXERCIS ES . By La dwig Pa r
-its. D uel-uteriI
l
i no
éga nd J. lv. Macqueen. Illustra ted . 32a m, pp. x x iv.- 292 , boards.
S.
rim— Sonora“HAND ICRA I-‘r. AManual OfSurgica lManipula tions,MinorSn.gorya nd other ma tters connected with the work of House Surgeons and Su calD re ssers . By Wa l er Pye , Surge on to St. Ma ry '
s Hospita l and to theVrctorra Hosp ita l for Sick Children, la te E x aminer in Surgery in theUn ivers i ty , 650. IVith 233I llustra tions on \\I e ed . S econd E NNI S“8 7 0. pp . x x . a nd 54 6
, cloth . 1 886 : 1 0s. ea .
A,Ca ta logue of Important Works,
RBDHOUBE .— ON Tux B IsToar, SrsTau, ANIL V Aa IImns or Tunx rsu Pom r.
Illustra tefl by Selections in the Origina l and in English Para hra se , with a Notice
of the Islamic D octrine of the Immorta lity of Woma n‘
s So in the Future Sta te .
By J. 11V. Redhouse , Esq . , 8vo, pp. 62, cloth, 2s. 6d . ; wrapper, 1s. 6d.
1 879.
REDHOUSE.— A TnNTATIvn CHRONOLOG ICAL SrNorsIs or Tni HIsTOBT or A RABIA
A ND ITs Ns ioanouns from (2 ) to A .D . 679. 1
92J. W. Re dhouse ,
C.M. G . , Litt.D . Cambridge ,M.R.A . S . , k c. D emy 8vo, pp. paper. 1887. Is.
m a ma — A Ca rrIcAL Ren ew or An a IOA N POLITIcs. By C. Be emelixi, ofCincinna ti, Ohio. D emy 8vo, pp. x x iv. and 630, cloth. 1881 . 1 4s.
RELIGIOUS PROGREBB.— TrmPRA CTICAL 0xim or CumsT. Demy Bro,
pp. vi. and 124 , cloth. 1 885. 2s. 6d .
mm.— PII ILosOPnI0A L D IA Loouss AND Fa Acc Ts. From the French of
E rnest Renan. Transla ted , with the sanction of the Author, by Baa BihariMuk harji. Post 8vo, pp. x x x ii . and 1 82 , cloth. 1883. 7s. 6d.
smut — A N EssAr ON THE A ss AND A NTIOUITT or m Boox or NABATmsANA GRICULTURE . To which is added an Inaugura l Le cture on the Position of the
Shemitic N a tions in the History of Civilisa tion. By Ernest Renan. Crown 87 0,pp. xvi. a nd 1 48, cloth. 1862. 30. 6d .
W AR— fin: LIFE or JESUS . By Ernest Renan, Member of the Institute Of
Fra nce . A uthorised English Tra nsla tion. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii. and 312. 1887.
Pa per covers, la. cloth ls. 6d .
REPORT or A GENERAL CONFERENCE or LIBERAL h umans, for the discussionof ma tte rs perta ining to the religious ne eds Of our time , and the methods ofmeeting them. Held June 13th and 14 th
, 1 878, a t South Place Chapel, Finsbury,London. 8vo, pp. 77, sewed . 1 878. Is.
RHODEB.— UN IvnnsAL Cunvn TAsLns ros FACILITATING ms LAYING OUT or
CIRCULAR A a cs ON THE GROUND roa RA ILWArs, CA NA Ls, Arc. Together with
Table of Ta ngentia l A ngles andMultiples. By A lex ander Rhodes, C.E. Oblong18mo, band , pp . ix . and 1 04 , roan. 1881 . 5s.
Ema — Lacrosse! ON WELSH PmLonocr. By John Rhys, M.A . , Professor ofCe ltic a t Ox ford , Honora ry Fellow of Jesus College , etc. , 8m. Second Ed ition,Revised and Enla rged. Crown 8vo, pp. x iv. and 467 , cloth. 1879. 158.
RICE — Mrsoa s AND COORG . A G a zetteer compiled for the Governmentof India .By Lewis Rice , D irector of Public Instruction, Mysore a nd Coorg. Vol. I .Msore in G enera l. With 2 Coloured Maps. Vol. II. Mysore , by Districts.
ith 10 Coloured Maps. Vol. II I . Coorg. With a Map. 3vols. ro a l 8vo,pp. x ii. 670 and xvi . 544 and x x ii. and 427 and x xvii . , cloth. 1 878 .
RICE — Mu cus INBCRIPTIONS . Transla ted for the Government by Lewis Rice .
8vo, pp . x cii . and 336- x x x . ,with a Frontispiece andMap, boards. 1879. 3m.
BIG-VEDA -SANHITA . A Collection of A ncientHindu Hymns. Constituting the 1stto the 8th A shta k a s, orBook s of the Rig-Veda ; the Oldest authority for the Religions and Socia l Institutions of the Hindus. Transla ted from the Original Sausk rit. By the la te H. H. Wilson,M.A . , Arc.
Vol. I. 8vo, pp. lii. and 348, cloth. 21s.
Vol. I I . 8vo, pp. x x x . and 346 , cloth. 1854. 21 8.Vol. I II. 8vo
, p x x iv. and 525, cloth. 21s.Vol. IV . Ed it by E . B. Cowell,M.A . 8vo, 21 4 , cloth. 1 866 . Ms.
E dited by E. B. Cowell, M.A . , and F. Webster, M.A . 8vo,pp . vi. a nd 443. 1888. 21 15.
In the press.
Published by Tm'
ibner (f: 00 .
BILBY.— MED LEVAL CHRONICLES Cram: CITY or LONDON . Chronicles cubeMayors
and Sherifi'
s of London, a nd the Events which happened in theirD a ys, from the
Year A . D . 1 1 88 to A .U. 1 274 . Transla ted from the original La tin of thef ‘
Liber
de Antiquis Le gibus (published by the Camden Socie ty), in the ossession of the
Corpora tion of the City of London ; a ttributed to A rnold Fitz bedma r, A lderman of London in the Re ign of Hen 1 11 .
— Chronicles of London, and of the
Marvels there in, betweenthe Yea rs 44 enry III . , A . D . 1260, and 1 7 Edward
A . D . 1343. Transla ted from the origina l A nglo-Norman of the
“Croni ues de
London,”
prese rved in the Cottonia n Collection (Cleopa tra A . iv. ) in the ritishMuseum. Tra nsla ted ,
with co ions Notes and A ppendices, by Henry Thomas5333, h
l
l
éA q Cla re Ha ll, Cambri ge , Ba rrister-a t-Law. 4to, pp. x ii. and 319, cloth.
s.
RIOLA .— How To LEARN RUSSIAN : aManua l for Students of Russian,
based upon
the Ollendorfii a n System of Te aching Languages, and a dapted for Self-Instruotion. By Henry Riola , Tea cher of the Russian Language . With Prefa ce byW.R. S. Ra lston, M. A . Third Edition. Crown 8vo , p. 576 , cloth. 1 887. 12s.K EY to the a bove . Crown 8vo, pp. 126 , cloth. 1885. 5s.
RIOLL — A GRA D UA TED RUSSIA N REA DER, with a Voca bulary of all the RussianWords conta ined in it. By Henry Riola , A uthor of “How to Lea rn Russian.
”
Crown 8vo, pp. viii . a nd 314 . cloth. 1 879. 10s. 6d .
ROCHE — A FRENCH GRAMMAR, for the use Of En lish Students, adopted for thePublic Schools by the Imperi a l Council Of Pub °
c Instruction. By A . Roche .
Crown 8vo, pp. mi. and 176, cloth. 1 869. 3s.
BOOBR PROSE AND POETRY. Select Pieces from the best English A uthors, for
Re ading, Composition, a nd Tra nsla tion. By A . Roche . Second Ed ition. Fcap.
8vo, pp.viii . and 226 , cloth. 1 872 . 2s. 6d .
ROCKHILL — UDAN AVARGA . See Triibner'
s Ori ental Series.
Rom — THE LIrE or THE BUDDHA . Se e Triibner’s Orienta l Series.
Bonn— TunBIRDS or CORNWA LL A ND THE SCILLY ISLA NDS . By the la te EdwardHea rle Rodd . Ed ited . with an Introduction, A ppend ix , and Memoir, by J. E.
Ha rting. 8vo, pp. lvi. and 320, with Portra it andMa p, cloth. 1 880. 1 4s.
ROGERS .— GRA II IIAR A ND LOG IC or THE N INETEENTH CENTURY , A s SEEN IN SYN
TACTICA L A NA LYS IS or THE ENGLISH LANGUA GE. By J . W. F . Rogers, InspectorOf Schools, Sydney , N .S .W. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi. and 212 , Cloth. 1883. 5s.
ROSING.— ENGLISH-D AN ISH D ICTIONARY. By 8 . Boeing. Crown 8vo, pp. x . and
722 , cloth. 8e . 6d .
” 88 .— A LPHABETICA L MA NUA L or BLoe rs A NA LYS IS showing a ll k nown
Methods, Old a nd New. B; Lieut.-ColonelW. A . Rose, la te B .A . , Member of
the G erma n Chemica l Soci ety (A uthor of Pyrology, or Fire ChemistryCrown 8vo, pp . x i i. and 1 48 , cloth. 1880s 5s.
8 088 .— PYROLOGY, ORFIRE CHEII ISTRY a Science interesting to the G eneral Philo
sopher, and an A rt of infinite importance to the Chemist,Meta llurgist, Engineer,&C. , 850. B lv. A . Ross. la tely aMa jor in the Roya l A rtillery. Sma ll 4 to, pp.
x xviii . and 6 , Cloth. 1 875. 360.
8 088 .— CELERRITIES orTHE YORRSHIREWow s. By Frederick Ross, Fellow of the
Roya l Historica l Society. 1 2mo, pp. 202 , cloth. 1 8 78. 4s.
— a‘HE E ARLY HISTORY or LAND HOLD ING AMONG THE G ERHA ss. By Denman
W. Ross. Ph.D. 8vo, pp. viii. and 274 , cloth. 1883. 1 2s.
8 088 .— COREA N PRIIIER be in Leasons in Corean On a ll Ord ina ry Subjects. Trans
lite izted on the principles 0 the Manda rin Primer,” by the same author. By
Rev. JohnRoss, N ewchwang. 8vo, pp. 90, wrapper. 1 877. 10s.
Rosa — Homes ORSHA K E ? By R. S . Ross. 8vo, pp. 183. R78 . Cloth. 3s. 6d.
paper, 2s. 6 d.
Rosa - 4 1mm“. or THE INDIAN TROORS Tonu ns. B : 3.3mm.paper. 1 878. 1s. 6d.
58 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,ROSS — THC MONK 0 ! ST. G ALL. A D rama fic A d apta tion of Scheflel
’s“Eldre
ha rd.
” By R. S . Ross. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii. and 2 18. 1 879. 5s.
ROSB.
— A RIA DNE IN N AXOS . ByR. 8 . Ross. Squa re 16mo.pp. 200, cloth. 1 882 . 5s.ROTH.
— THE ANIMA L PARA S ITES or THE SUG ARCA NE. By H. LingRoth, la te Hon.
Sec. to theMaick ayPlanters’
A ssocia tion. D emy 8vo, pp. 16, wra pper. 1885. I s.
BOTH.— NOTES ON CONTINENTA L IRRIGATION. By H. L. Roth. D emy S70, pp. 40,
with 8 Pla tes, cloth . 1882 . 55.ROUGH NOTES or JOURNEYS made in the years 1 868— 1 873in Syria , down the °
gris,Ind ia , K a shmir, Ceylon, Japan, Mongolia , Siberia , the United Sta tes, the andwich Islands, and A ustra lasia . D emy 8vc, pp. 624 , cloth. 1 875. 1 4s.
BOUSTAINO.— THE FOUR GOSPELS EEPLA INED RY THEIR WRITERS . W ith an
A ppend ix on the Ten Commandments . Edited by J. B. Ronsta ing. Tra nsla tedby \V. E. K irby. 3vols. crown 8vo, pp. 440- 456 -304 , Cloth. 1881 . 15s.
BOU'
rLBDGE — ENGLISH RULE A ND NATIVE OPINION IN IND IA . FromNotes ta k enin 1 870— 74 . By JamesRoutledge . 8vo, pp. x . a nd 338 , cloth. 1 8 78 . 1 0s. 6d .
ROWBO‘
I‘
HA ll — A H ISTORY OF MUSIC. By John Fred erick Rowbotham,la te
Schola r of Balliol College , Ox ford . 3vols. demy 8vo, p . x x . a nd 342 , cloth.
V ol. I . 1885. Vol. I I. 1 886 . Vol. I II . 1 887. E a ch Vo ume , 18s.
ROWBOTHAM.— THE D EATH orROLAND . A n Epic Poem. Rowbotham’
s Series ofPoe tica l Romances
,No. I . By John Frederick Rowbotham, A uthor of
“The
Historyp fMusic.
”4 to, pp. vi . and 176, cloth. 1 887 . 10s.
ROWE.— A N ENGLISHIIAN
’S V IEWS ON QUESTIONS or THE D AY IN VICTORIA . ByC. J. Rowe , M.A . Crown 8vo, pp. 1 22 , cloth. 1882 . 4s.
ORNITHOLOG ICALMISCELLANY. By George D awson F .Z .S.
Vol. I . Pa rt 1 , 15s.— Pa rt 2 , 2os.
— Part 3, 15s.— Part 4 , 208.
Vol. I I. Part 5, 2os.
— Part 6, 2os.— Part 7, 108 . 6d .
— Part 8, 10s. 6d .— Part 9,
10s. 6d .- Part 10, 1 0s. 6d .
Vol. I II . Part 1 1 , 1 0s. 6d.— Part 1 2, 10s. 6d .
— Part 13, 10s. 6d .— Part 14, 2os.
BOY.— THE LYRICS or IND . By D ejeudra La la Roy,M.A .
,M. &C. , Author
of “The A rya nMelod ies. Crown 8vo, pp . viii . and 80, Cloth. 1886 . 2s. 6d.
RUNDALL .
— A SHORT A ND EASY WA Y To WRITE ENGLISH A S SPOKEN . MéthodeRapids et Fa cile d
’
Ecrire ls Franca is comme on le Pa rle . K urze und Le ichte'We ise D eutsch zu Schre iben wie man es Spr
icht. By J. B . Rund a ll, Ce rtifica tedMember of the London Shorthand Writers A ssocia tion. 6d . e a ch.
RUSSELL — THE WA VE or TRANSLA TION IN THE OCEA NS or WA TER, A IR, AND
ETHEB. By John Scott Russell,M.A L . and E . D emy 8vo, pp. 318,
with 10 D iagrams, Cloth. 1885. l2a . 6d .
BUTHBRFORD.— MARRRUTHERFORD’
S D ELIVERA NCE : Be ing the Second Part of hisA utobiogra phy . Ed ited by his friend, Reuben Shapcott. Crown 8vo, pp. viii.and 210. boa rds. 1 885. 5s.
RUTHERFORD .— THE REVOLUTION IN TANNER
’
S LANE. By Ma rk Rutherford.
fid
dled
gyl
e
i
ils Friend Reuben Shapcott. Crown 8vc, pp. vii i. and 388, boa rds.
s.
“CHAR— Amaranth IND IA . A n A ccountof the Re ligion, Philosophy , Litera ture,Chronology, A stronomy, Customs, Laws, and A strology of Ind ia . a bout A .D . 1030.
Ed ited in the A rabic Origina l by Dr. Ed wa rd Sa chau, Professor in the RoyalUniversity of Berlin. With an Index of the Sansk rit Word s. In 1 dbl. 4 to
,
cloth, pp. x li. and 371 . 1 887 £3, 3s.A n ENGLISH ED ITION , conta ining 9. Preface , the Transla tion of the A rabic Tex t,N otes, a nd Ind ices, is a lso published in Two Vols, Post 8vo, cloth, SeeTrubner
’s Orienta lSeries, page 71 .
“MAVIDHANABRAHMANA (THE) (being the Third Brfihmana ) of the SAma Veda.Ed ited , together with the Commentary of SAyana , an English Transla tion, Introd uction, a nd Inde x ofWord s
,by A . 0. Burnell. Vol. I. Te x t and Commentary,
wi th Introduction. D emy 8vo, pp. x x xviii. and 104 , cloth. 1873. 12s. 6d.
60 A Ca ta logue of Important. Works,SCHULTZ. 1
-UNIVERSA L INTEREST AND GENEIQ L PERCENTAGE TA BLES. On theD ecima l System. IVith a Trea tise on the Currency of the “f orld , and numerouse x amples for Se lf-Instruction. By C.W. H. Schultz. 8vo, cloth. 1 874. 1 0s. 6d .
SCHULTZ — ENGLISH G ERMAN E x CEANGE TA BLES . By C. W . H. Schultz. With a
Trea tise on the Currency of the World. 8vo. boards. 1 87 5s.
SOM NDLER.— INSTRUCTIONS FORTESTING TELEGRA PE LINES , a nd the.Technica l
A rra ngements in Offices. \Vritten on beha lf of the Government of India , und erthe Orde rs of the D irector-G enera l of Telegraphs in Ind ia . B Louis Schwen
dler. Vol. I demy 8vc , pp. 248 , cloth. 1 878 . l2a. Vol. H . , emy 8vo, pp. x i.and 268 , cloth. 1 880. 98 .
8000NES .— FA UST. A Tragedy. By Goethe . Translated into English Verse, by
Willi amD a lton Scoones. Fca p. , pp.vi. and 230, cloth. 1 879. 5s.
SELL — TE E FA ITH or ISLAM. By the Rev. E. Sell, Fellow of the University ofMadra s. D emy 8vo, pp. x iv. and 270, cloth. 188 1 . 68 . 6d .
SELL — IRN-I-TAJWID ; OB, A RT OP REA D ING TE E QURAN . By the Rev. E . Sell,B.D . 8vo, pp. 48, wra ppers. 1 88° 23. 6d .
SELSS.— GOETIIE
’
SMINORPOEMS . Se lected , A nnota ted , and Rea rranged . By A lbertM. Selss, Ph. D . Crown 8vo, pp. x x x i. and 152, cloth. 1 875. 3s. 6d.
SERMONS NEVERPREAc By Philip Phosphor. Crown 8vo, pp. vi . a nd 1 24 ,010th. 1878. 2s. 6d.
sm -QREPORT ON THE AMARAVATI TOPE, and E x cava tions on its Site in 1877.
By Robert Sewell, of the Ma dra s O.S . , &0. With four pla tes. Roya l 4 to, pp.70, boa rds. 1880. 3s.
SEYPPEL.— SE ARP
,SHA BPER, SE ARPEST : A HumorousTa le of Old E t Penned
down and D epicted in the Yea r 1315A . 0. By C. M. Seyppel, Court s inter a ndPoe t La ure a te of H isMa jesty K ing Rhampsinit a nd done into the English
tongue by TwoMummies of the Old Dyna sty. Memphis, 35,Mummies A rcade .
(Ring three times). Imperia l 8vo, pp. 42 . in ra gged canvas cover, with dila pida tededges, and string binding (2 just as d iscovered ), price 6s.
SHAK ESPEARE — TE E BANKSID E SHA KESPEA RE The Comedies, H istories, and
Tra ged ies ofMr. “filliamSha k espea re , as resented a t the Globe and Black fria rs
The a tres, circa 1591 — 1623. Be ing the te x t nrnished the Pla yers, in pa ra llel pages
with the 6 1 st revised folio te x t,with Critica l Introductions. 8vo.
[In prepara tion.
SHAK ESPEARE — A N EW STUDY or SHA KESPEARE : A n Inquiry into the connectionof the Pla ys and Poems, with the origins of the Cla ssica l D rama , a nd with thePla tonic Philosophy , through the Mysterie s. D emy 8vo, pp. x ii. and 372 , withPhotogra ph Of the S tra tford Bust, cloth. 1 884 . 103. 6d .
SHAK ESPEARE’S CENTUBIE or PRA I SE‘
, be ingMa teria ls for a History of Opinionon Sha k espea re and his Work s, culled from lVriters of the First Century a fter
his Rise . By C. M. Ingleby. Med ium8vo, p x x . and 384 . Stifi cover. 1874.£1 , 1s. Large paper, fca p. 4 to
,boa rds. £2 ,£1.
SHAKESPBA EB’
S CYMBELINE — The Te x t Revised a nd A nnota ted . By C. M.
Ingleby . M. A . , LL.D . , Honora ry Member of the D eutsche Sha k espe a re Gesell
scha ft of lVe ima r and of the Sha k espea re Society Of N ew York . Foolsca p 4to,
pp. x x . and 214 , ha lfmorocco, Rox burgh. 1886 . 1 03. 6d .a
SHAKESPEARE — HERE ENEUTICS ; OR, THE STILL L ION . Be ing an Essa towardsthe Restora tion of Sha k espea re
’s Tex t. By C. M. Ingleby, M.A . , .D . , of
Trinity College , Cambridge . Sma ll 4 to, pp. 168 , boa rds. 1 875. 6s.
SHAK ESPEARE — TE E MA N A ND THE BOOK. By C. M. Ingleby , M.A LL.D .
Sma ll 4to. Pa rt pp. 172, boards. 1 877. 6s.
SHAKESPEARE — OCCAS IONA L PA PERS ON SE AEESPEARE ; be ing the Second Partof “Sha k espea re : the Man and the Book .
” By C. M. Ingleby, M.A . , LL.D . ,
721 21 1 8 11 4. Sma ll 4 to, pp. x . and'194, pa per boards. 6s.
Published by Triibner d: 00.
SHAKESPEARE‘
S BONES — The Pfi posa l to D isinter them, considered in rela tionto the ir possible bea ring on his Portra iture : Illustra ted b insta nces of Visits ofthe Living to the D ea d . By C.M. lngleby, LL.D V.P. .S .L. Fcap. 4 to , pp.
viii . a nd 48 , boa rds. 1 883. ls. 6d.
SHAKESPEARE — A NEW VARIORUE ED ITION OP SHA KES PEARE Ed ited by Horace
Howa rd» Fumess. Roya l 8vo. , cloth. Vol. 1 Romeo and Juliet. Pp. x x iii.and 480, 1 871 . 18s.
— Vol. I I. Ma cbe th. Pp. x xx . and 492 . 1873. 1 8s.— Vols.
II}. and IV . Hamlet. 2vols. pp. x x . and 4 74 and 430. 1 877. 36s.— Vol. V .
1
K
8
‘
8
n
6g Le ar. Pp. vi . and 504 . 1 880. 18s. Vol. VI . Othello. Pp. viii . —472.
1 85.
SHAKESPEARE — CONCORD A NCE TO SHA KESPEARE’S POEIIS . ByMrs. H. H . Fur
ness. Roya l 8vo, cloth. 1 8s.
SHAK ESPEARE NOTES. By F . A . Leo. D emy 8vo, pp.viii. and 120,cloth. 1 885. 67.
SHAK SPERE SOCIETY(THE NEW). — Subscription, One Guinea per annum. List ofPublica tions on applica tion.
BHERRING .— THE SA CRED CITY or THE HIND US . A n A ccount of Benares in
A ncient and Modern Times. By the Rev. M. A . Sherring, MA ., LL.D . ; and
Prefaced with a n Introduction by FitzEdwa rd Hall, D .C.L. WVith Illustra tions.8vo, pp. x x xvi. and 388 , cloth. 2 1s.
” Raul — HIND U TRIBES AND CASTES ; together with an A ccount Of theMohamed an Tribes Of the North-B’
est Frontier and of the A boriginfll Tribes ofthe Centra l Provinces . By the Rev. M. A . Sherring, M. A . ,
LL.B. , Lond . , &c.4 to. Vol. 1 1 . Pp. lxviii. and 376 , cloth . 1 879. £2, 8s.
— Vol. with Inde x of3vols . Pp. x ii . a nd 336 , cloth. 1 881 . 32s.
s mG.— THE H INDOO PILGRIIIS . By Rev. M. A . Sheri-ing, M. A . , LL.D .Crown 8vo, pp. 1 26 , cloth. 1 878 . 55.
“BREE — THE GREA T A FRICA N I SLAND . Chapters on Mad aga scar. A PopularA ccount of the Physica l G eography, (tc.
, of the Country, its N a tura l H istory,the Origin, Customs, Language , Re ligious Be lie fs, &c. , of. the D ifferent Tribes,W i th Illustra tions of Scripture from N a tive Hab its and Missiona ry E x pe rience .
By the Rev. James Sibree , jun. , GIG. 8vo, pp. x ii. a nd 272 , with Physica l and Ethnologica lMaps and Four Illustra tions, cloth. 1 879. 10s. 6d .
SH EER— POEMS : includ ing Fancy,
"
A Resting Pla ce , k c. By John Sibree,M.A . , London. Crown 8vo, pp. iv. and 134 , cloth. 1 884 . 4s.
W OOL — EPISODES IN THE LIVES OPMEN ,WON EN
, A ND LOVERS . By Ed ith Simcox . Crown 8vo, pp. 312. cloth. 1 882 . 7s. 6d.
SH OCK — NA TURA L LAW. See English and Fore ign Philosophica l Library.
sm — LESSING . Se e English and Foreigli Philosophica l Libra ry , E x tra Series.
SIMPSON-SAME.— THE DRAMATIC UNITIES IN THE PRESENT D AY. By E . Simpson
Ba ik ie. Third Ed ition. Fcap. 8vo, pp . iv. and 108 , cloth. 1878 . 2s. 6d .
SIMPSON-Bum — THE INTERNATIONAL D ICTIONARY forNa tura lists and Sportsmenin English, French, and G erman. By Edwin Simpson-Ba ik ie . 8ro, pp. iv. and284 , cloth. 1 880. 15s .
SINCLAIRS OP ENGLAND (THE ). Crown 8vo , pp. viii. and 41 4 , cloth. 1 887 1 2s.
SINCLAIR — HUI A NITIES . By Thoma s Sincla ir,M. A .
, author of Quest," Godde ss Fortune ,
” &c. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii. and 21 2. cloth. 1 885. 3s. 6d .
SINCLA IR— THE MESSENGER : A Poem. By Thoma s Sincla ir, M.A . Foolscap
8vo , pp. 174 , cloth. 1875. 5s.
SINCLA IR.— LOVES
'
S TBILOGY : A Poem. By Thomas Sincliiir,M.A . Crown 8vo,pp . 150, cloth. 1 876. 5s.
SINCLAIR — THEMOUNT : Speech fromits English He ights. By Thomas Sincla ir,M.A . Crown 8vo, pp. viii. and 302, cloth. 1 877. N I .
62 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,SlNCLAIRe — GODDESS FORTUNE : A Novel. B y Thoma s Sincla ir, M.A . 3vols.post 8vo, pp.viii —302 , 302 , 274 , cloth. 1884 . 31s. 6d .
SINCLAIR — QUEST : A Collection of Essays. By Thomas Sincla ir,M.A . Crown8vo , pp. 184 , cloth. 1885. 2s. 6d .
BmGEB .— HUNGARIAN GRAMMAR. See Trubner
’
s CollectionSINNETT.
— THE OCCULT WORLD . By A . P. Sinnett. Fourth Ed ition: With an
A ppend ix of 20 pages, on the subject OfMr. K iddle’s Charge of Plagia rism. 8vo,
pp. x x . a nd 206 , cloth. 1884 . 3s. 6d .
m .
— THE D IVINE GOVERNMENT. By S. Smith,M.D . Fifth Edi tion. Crows8vo, pp. x i i . and 276 , cloth . 1 866 . 68 .
SMITH — THE RECENT DEPRESSION 01" TRA D E. Its N ature , its Causes. and theRemed ies which have been suggested for it. By Wa lter E . Smith, B.A .
, N ew
College . Be ing the Ox ford Cobden Prize Essay for 1 879. Crown 8vo, pp. vi. a nd108 , cloth . 1 880. 35.
SMITH — HYDRAULICS . The Flow of Wa ter through Orifices, over Weirs, andthrough Open Conduits and Pipes. By Hamilton Smith, jun. ,
MemberAm. Soc.
of C. E . a nd Am. Institute of M.E . With 17 I llustra tive Pla te s. Roya l 4 to,pp. x ii. a nd 362 , cloth. 1 886. 308 .
BE TTE — {IRE A RORIG INES or V ICTORIA. With Notes rela ting to the Habits ofthe N a tive s Of other Pa rts of A ustra lia and Tasmania . Compiled fromvarioussource s for the Gove rnment Of Victoria . By R. Brough Smyth,&c. , k c. 2vols. roya l 8vo, pp. lx x ii. — 484 and Vi. —456 ,Maps, Pla tes, and Woodcuts. cloth . 1878 . £3. 3e.
SNOW.— A THEOLOG ICO-POLITICA L TREATISE. By G . D . Snow. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 80,
cloth. 1 874 . 4s. 6d .
SOLLING .
— D IUTISK A A n Historica l and Critica l Survey of the Litera ture of G ermany , fromthe Earliest Period to the D ea th of Goethe . By GustavSolling. 8vo,pp. xviii. and 368 . 1863. 10s. 6d .
BOIL ING — SELECT PA SSAGES TRON THEWORKS OF SHA KES PEARE . Transla ted and
gollected. G erman and English. By G . Solling. 1 2mo, pp. 155, cloth. 1 866 .
s. 6d .
SOLLING .— MACBETH. Rendered into Metrica l German (with English Te x t ad
joined ). By GustavSolling. Crown 8vo, pp. 160, wrapper. 1 878 . 3s. 6d.
SONGS or THE S EE ITIO IN ENGLISH VERSE. By G . E. W. Crown 8vo, pp. iv. and134 , cloth. 1877 . 5s.
BOW L — THE EPOCH OP THE MA IiIIOTH AND THE A PPARITION OPMA N UPONEARTH. By James 0. Sontha ll, A .M. , LL.D . Crown 8vo, pp. x ii . and 430,cloth.
Illustra ted . 1878 . 108 . 6d .
SPANISH REFORMERS or Two CENTURIES FROM1520 ; The ir Lives and Writing,a ccond ing to the la te Benjamin B. Wiflen’
s Plan, and with the Use Of HisMa teria ls. D escribed by E . Boehmer, D . D .
, Ph.D . Vol. I . lVith B. B . \Vifl'
en’s
N a rra tive Of the Incid ents a ttend ant upon the Republica tion of Re formistasA ntiguos Espanoles, a nd with a Memoir Of B. B. “Mi en. By Isa lIne CWiffen.
Roya l 8vo, pp . xvi . a nd 2 16 , cloth . 1 874 . 12s. 6d . Rox burghe , him— Vol. 11 .Roya l 8vo , pp. x ii —374 , cloth. 1883. 1 88 .
SPEDDING.— THB LIFE AND TIMES OF FRANCIS BACON. E x tracted fromthe Bl ition
of h is Occa siona l“iritiugs, by James Spedding. 2vols. post 8vc, pp. x x .- 710 and
010 th . 1 878. 215e
'mYO? A .-BEN E D ICT D E S PINOZA his Lite , Com atofl mw .
“15“WSW BY3Wd lw
, M. D . 8 ro, pp . x liv. and 04s, cloth . ISIS. an .
66 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works ,TOLHAUSEN.
— A SYNOPSIS OP THE PATENT LAwS orVARIOUS COUNTRIES . By A .
Tolha usen,Ph.D . Third Edition. 1 2mo
, pp. 62, sewed . 1 870. l a. 6d.
TONSBBRO.— N ORWAY. I llustra ted Ha ndbook for Travellers. Ed ited by Charles
Tonsberg. IVith 134 Engravings on IVOOd , 1 7Maps, and Supplement. Crown8vo, pp . lx x . ,
4 82 , a nd 32, cloth. 1 875. l8s.
TORCEANU. ROUMA NIA N GRAMMAR. See Triibner’s Collection.
TORRENS.
— EMPIRE IN A S IA : How we came by it. A Book of Confessions. ByIV. M. Torrens,M.P. Med . 8vo, pp. 4 2 6 . cloth. 1 872. l4a.
TOSCANI .— ITA I.I A N CONVERSATIONA L COURSE. A New Method of Teaching the
Ita lia n L anguage,both Theoretica lly and Pra ctica lly. By G iovanni Toscani,
fessor of the ta lian Language and Lite ra ture in Queen’s Coll. , London, &c.
Fourth Ed ition. 1 2mo, pp. x iv. and 300. cloth. 1 872 . 5s.
T080ANI .
— ITA LIAN REA D ING COURS E. By G . Tosca ni. Fcap. 8vo, pp. x n. and1 60. IVith table. Cloth. 1 875. 4s. 6d .
TOULON.-ITS A D VA NTAGES A S A WINTER RESIDENCE POR INVALID S AND OTHERS.
By an En lish Resident. The proceeds of this pamphlet to be devoted to theEnglish C urch a t Toulon. Crown 8vc, pp. 8 , sewed . 1 873.
TBADLEG .
— A SON OF BELIAL. A utobiogra phica l S k etches. By NitramTradleg,University of Bosphorus. Crown 8vo , pp. viii. - 260, cloth. 1 882 . 5s.
TRIMEN.— SOUTH-A PRICA N BUTTERPLIES ; a Monograph of the E x tra -Tropical
Specie s. By Roland Trimen, F Z .S. ,k c , Cura tor of
the South -A frica n Museum, Ca pe Town. A ssisted by James Henry Bowk er,Re tired Colone l in Cape Colonia l Forces ; la te Comma nd ant
of the Frontier A rmed andMounted Police . With Twelve Coloured Pla te s anda Pla te of Wing Neura tion, &c. 3vols. demy 8vc
, pp. xvi . and 356, vi. and
242 (Vol. I II . prepa ring), cloth. 1 887. £2 , 1 2s. 6d .
TBUBNBR.— TRURNER
’
S BIBLIOGRAPHICAL G UIDE TO AMERICAN L ITERATURE
A Cla ssed List of Book s published in the United Sta tes of America , from 1 817to 1 857 . Bibliogra phica l Introduction, Notes, a nd A l habetical Inde x .
{38
0
5mpiled a nd Edited by N icola s Triibner. In 1 vol. 8vo, h bound, pp. 750.9. 1 8s.
TRUBNER'
S CATA LOGUE OP D ICTIONARIES AND GRAMMARS or THE PRINCIPALLA NGUA GES A ND D IA LECTS OF THE WORLD . Considera bly Enla rged a nd Revised,with a n A lpha betica l Ind e x . A Guide for Students and Book sellers. SecondEd ition, 8vc, pp. viii. and 170, cloth. 1 882 . 5s.
TBUBNBR'
S COLLECTION or SIMPLIPIED GRAMMARS OP THE PRINCIPA L A SIATIG
A ND EUROPEA N LANGUAGES. Ed ited by Reinhold Boat, LL .D . , Ph.D . Crown8vo, cloth, uniformly bound .
L — H INDUSTA NI . PERSIA N , A ND ARABIC. By E . H. Palmer, M.A .
S econd Ed ition. Pp. 1 1 2. 1 885. 53.
II .— HUNG ARIAN . By I . Sing e r. Pp. vi. and 88. 1 882. 4s. 6d.
I II . — BA SQUE. By“1 . Va n Eys. Pp. x ii . a nd 52 . 1883. 3e. 6d.
IV .— MA LAG ASY. By G . W. Pa rk er. Pp. 66 , with Pla te . 1883. 50.
V .- MOD ERN GREER. By E .M. Gelda rt
,M.A . Pp. 68 . 1 883. 2s. 6d.VI .
— ROUMANIAN. By R. Torce anu. Pp. vii i . and 72 1883. 5s.
V IL — TIBETAN GRAMMAR. By H. A . JA SUHK E . Pp . V im— 104 . 1 883. 51 .VII — D AN ISH. By E . C. Otte Pp. viii. and 66 . 1 884 . 2s. 6d .
IX .
— TURKISH. ByJ Pp . x ii. and 204 . 1884. 10l .6d.
X — SWFD ISH. By E. C . Otte. Pp. x ii . - 70. 1 884 . 2s. 6d .
XL — POLISH. ByW. R.Morfill,M.A . Pp. viii. - 64 . 1 884 . 3s. cd.X II .
— PA LI. By E .Mliller. Pp . xvi. - 1 44 . 1 884 . 7s. 6d .
X I II .— SA NSKRIT. By H. Edgren. Pp. x ii.- 178. 1 885. 10s. 6d .
X IV .— GRAMMA IRE A LEANA I SE . Pa r. P. W. Pp. x . a nd 1 70. 1 887. 7s. 6d.
X Vo—
IIA PAMBO B B. H. Chamberla in. Pp. viii. and 108. 1886. 50.X VI . — SERBIAN . By R. Pp.viii . and 72. 1 887. 4s. 6d.
X VI I . — LAN G UA GES or THE CUNEIPORII i nseam-nous . B ; G eorge Bertram,
Pp.viii . and 1 1 8 . 1 888 . be .
Published by Trtibner (CCO.
TRURNER'S ORIENTAL SERIES 2
Post 8vo, cloth, uniformly bound.
ESSAYS ON TE E SA CRED LA NGUA GE, WRITINGS , AND RELIGION or
THE PARS I S . By Ma rtin Ha ng, Ph.D . , la te Professor of Sansk rit andCompa rative Philology a t the University ofMunich . Third Ed ition.
Ed ited and Enla rged by E . \V. ‘Vest, Ph .D . To which is a lso a dd ed , A
Biogra phica lMemoir Of the la te D r. Hang. By Professor E . P. Evans.
Pp. x lviii. a nd 4 28 . 1884 . 168 .
TEXTS FROM THE BUD DHIST CANON , commonly k nown as Dhammaad a . \Vith A ccompanying N a rra tives. Transla ted from the Chinesey S . Be a l
,B .A . ,Trmity College , Cambridge , Professor of Chinese , Uni
versity College . London. Pp. Vlll. and 1 76 . 1 878 . 7s. 6d.
THE H ISTORY OF IND IA N LITERA TURE . By Albrecht Weber. Transla ted from the G erman by J. Mann.M.A . , and D r. T. Z acha riae , withthe A uthor
'
s sanction and a ssista nce . 2d Ed ition. Pp . 368 . 1882 . 10s. 6d .
A SEETCE OF TE E MOD ERN LANGUA GES or TE E EAST IND IES. A ccompa nied by Two La ngua ge Ma ps, Classified List of Languages andD ia lects, and a List of A uthorities for each Langua ge . ByRobert Cust,la te Of a nd Hon. Libra rian of B .A .S . Pp. x ii . and 198.1 878 . 7s. 6d .
TE E BIRTH OR THE WAR-GOD : A Poem. By K AIidass. Transla tedfrom the Sansk rit into English Verse , by Ra lph T. H . G ri‘iths,M.A . ,
Principa lof Bena res College . Second Ed ition. Pp. x ii . and 1 16 . 1879. 5s.
A CLAS S ICA L D ICTIONARY OP HINDU MYTHOLOGY A ND HISTORY,GEO
GRA PHY A ND LITERATURE. By John Dowson, la te Professorin the Sta ff College . Pp. 432 . 1 879. 1 68 .
METRICA L TRA NSLAT IONS FROMS A NSERIT WRITERS ; with an Introduction
, ma ny Prose V e rsions,a nd Pa ra llel Pa ssa ges from Classica l
A uthors . By J. Muir, Pp. x liv. -376 . 1 879. 1 4s.
MOD ERN IND IA A ND TE E IND IA NS : be ing a Series of Impressions, Notes,and Essays. By S irMonie rMonier-\Villiams, Hon.
LL. D . Of the University of Ca lcutta , Bod en Professor Of Sansk rit in theUniversity of Ox ford Fourth Ed ition. With Index
,I llustra tions,
andMa p, pp. viii . and 378 . 1 887. 14s.
THE LIFE OR LEGEND OF G A L'
DAMA , the Buddha of the Burmese. WithA nnota tions, the \Va ys to N e ibba n, a nd Notice on the Phongyies, or
Burmese Monk s. By the RightRev. P. Biga ndet, Bishop of Rama tha ,
V ica r A postolic of Ava and Pegu. Third Edition. 2vols . Pp. x x .-368
and viii . -326 . 1880. 213.
MI SCELLA NEOUS ESS A YS , rela ting to Ind ian Subjects. By B . H . HodgI
ic
gébla t§8BritIshMinister a tMpa l. 2vols. , pp. vii i — 408 , andviii . -348.
s.
SELECTIONS FROMTHE K ORA N . By Edwa rd WilliamLane , A uthor of an“A ra bic-English Le x icon
,
” &c. A N ew Edi tion, Revised ,wi th an
Introduction. By Sta nley Lane Poole . Pp. cx ii . and 174 . 1 879. 98 .
CHINESE BUDDHI SM. A Volume Of Sk etches, Historica l and Cri tica l.By J. Ed k ins, D .D .
,A uthor Of China '
s Pla ce in Philology, ” “Religionin China , &c. , &c. Pp . lvi. and 454 . 1 880. 1 8s.
TE E G ULISTA N ; OR, ROSE G ARD EN OP SE EK E MUSE LIU'
D -D IN SAD I OPSHIRA Z. Tra nsla ted for the first time into Prose and V erse , withPre fa ce a nd a Life Of the A uthor, from the A tish K a dah , by E . B .
Eastwick , 2d Ed ition. Pp. x xvi . and 244. 1880. 10s. 6d .
A TA LMUD ICMISCELLANY or, One Thousand andoOne E x tra cts from theTa lmud
,theMidrashim, and the K a bba lah. Com iled a nd Tra nsla ted
by P. J. Hersbon. \Vith a Pre fa ce by Rev.E .W . m m mx wa gc a m
011
3151 in in Ordinary to Her hga iesty , and. C a mp . elk W
Wi Notes and Copious I nde x es . Pp . x x a'
x‘
ix .
XS SS .
58 I 1
TRUBNER‘
S ORIENTA L SERIES —
Low l a nd .
THE H ISTORY OF ESARII A DDON (Son of Sennacherib), K ing of A ssyria ,68 1 - 668 . Transla ted from the Cune iform Inscri ptions u n
Cylind ers a nd Ta ble ts in the British Museum Collection. Toge t er
Wi th Origina l Te x ts, a Gramma tica l A na lysis of ea ch word , E x plana
tions of the Ideogra phs by E x tra cts from the Bi-Lingua l Sylla ba ries,and List of Eponyms, &c. By E . A . Budge , B. A . ,M A ssyrian
E x hib i tioner. Christ’
s College , Cambridge . Post 8vo, pp. x ii . and
164 , Cloth. 1 880. 10s . 6d .
BUD DHIST BIRTH STORIES ; or,Jata k a Ta les. The oldest Collection of
Folk -Lore e x ta nt : be ing the Jma k a tthavanna na , for the first timeed i ted In the origina l Pa li. b
y,V . Fa usb
'
o'
ll, and transla ted by T. W.
Rhys D avids. Transla tion. 01. I . Pp. cxvi. and 348 . 1 880. 188 .
THE CLA SS ICA L POETRY 0 1“THE JA PA NESE . By Ba sil Chamberla in , A uthor
of Ye igio Henk a k u, lchiran. Pp. x ii. and 228. 1 880. 7s. 6d .
LINGUISTIC A ND ORI l-NTA L E SSA YS . Written from the yea r 184 6- 1878 .
By R Cust, A uthor Of The Modern Langua ge s of the Ea st Ind ies."
Pp. x 1 1 . a nd 484 . 1 880. 108 . 6d .
LINGUISTIO A ND ORIENTA L E SSA YS . Written from the year 1847- 1887 .
By R. N . Oust. LL . D . \Vi th S ix Maps. Second Series, pp. x iv. a nd848, cloth . 1 887 . £1 , l s.
IND IA N POETRY . Conta ining a N ew Edition of“The Indian Song of
Songs, fromthe Sansk ri t of the G ita G ovind a Of Ja ya deva ; Two Book sfrom “
The Ilia d of Ind i a (Ma habhara ta ) ; Prove i hia l fromthe Shlok a s Of the Hitopsdésa , and other Orienta l Poems. By EdwinA rnold , &c. Third Ed ition. Pp.viii. and 270. 1 884 . 7s. 6d .
TE E RTLIG IONS OE IND IA . By A . Ba rth. A uthorised Translation byRev. J. \Vood . Pp. x x . and 310. 1 881 . 1 6s.
HINDU PHILOSOPHY . The Sank hya K i rik a of Iswara K rishna . A n
E x position Of the Systemof K aplla . W'
ith a n A ppend ix on the Nya yaa nd V a ise shik a Systems. By John D avies. M.A M.B .A S . Pp.vi .and 151 . 188 1 . (is.
A MA NUA L OP HIN DU PA NTHRISII . The Vedantasa ra . Transla ted withCopious A nnota tions. By Ma '
or G . A . Ja cob, Bomba y Sta ff Corps,Inspe ctor of A rmy Schools. ith a Pre fa ce by E . B. Con ell, M. A
P I ofe ssor Of Sa nsk rit in the Unive rsity of Cambridge . Pp. x . a nd 130.
1 88 1 . 6s.
C
THEMESNEVI (usua lly k nown a s theMe sneviyi She-I if. or HolyMesnevi’)ofMevlanii (Our Lond )Jeh’
d u-’d -D inMuhammed , Er-Ri
'
Imi . Book the
F irst. Toge the r “ith some A ccount of the Life a nd A cts o f the A uthor,
of his A ncestors , a nd of his D escend a nts. Illus tra te d by a selection
of Cha ra cte ristic A necdotes a s collected by the i r Historian MevlfinfiShemsu d -D in A hmed , E l Efiak i El A I ifi . Tra nsla trd , a nd the Poe tryV ersifie d by Jame s \V. Re dhouse , &c. Pp. xvi . a nd 136 ,vi . a nd 290. 1 881 . £1 , l a . s.
EA STERN PROVERBS A ND EMBLEMS ILLUSTRATING OLD TRUTHS. By the
Rev. J . Long, Member of the Benga l A sia tic Socie ty, Pp.
xv. a nd 280. 1 881 . 6s. 9
THE QUA TRA ENS OR OMAR K HAYYAM. A New Transla tion. By E . H .
1 t fie ld , la te Of H .M. Benga l Civil Service . Pp. 96 . 1 88 1 . 5s. “as.
THE QUA TIIA INS OF OMAR K HA I'
YAM. The Pe rsian Te x t. with a n English
LVerse TI ensla tion. By E .
‘H.Whinfield . Pp . x x x ii . -335. 1 883. 10s. 6d .
70 A Ca ta logue of Important Worles,TEURNER'
s-ORIENTAL SERIES — continued .
RELIG ION IN CHINA , conta ining a brief A ccount of the Three Reli'
ons ofthe Chinese ; with Observa ti ons on the Prospects of Christian ouvereion amongst tha t Pe ople . By Joseph Ed k ins, D .D .
,Pe k ing. Third
Ed ition. Pp. xvi. a ndOUTLINES OI THE HISTORY OFRELIG ION To THE SPREAD orTHE UNIVERSA LREL IG IONS . By Prof. C. P. TIELE. Tra nsla ted from the D utch by J.
Ratlin Ca rpente r,M. A . ,w ith the A uthor
’s assistance . Fourth Ed ition.
Pp . x x . and 250. 1 888 . 7s. 6d .
SI -YU-X I . BUD DHIST RECORD S OP THE WESTERN WORLD . Transla tedfromthe Chi nese cf Hiueu Tsa ing (A .U. By Samuel Bea l, Professorof Chine se , University College , London. 2 vols. ,
with a specia lly prepa redMa p. Pp. cvii i. - 242 and Vi ii. —370. 1884 . 24 8 . D edica ted bype rmission to H .R.H. the Prince of ‘Va les.
THE L INE or THE BUD DHA , A ND THE EARLY HISTORY or Hi s ORD ER.
D erived fromTibe tan lVorlrs in the Bk a h Hgyur and the Bstan Hgyur.followed by Notices on the E a rly Histoty of Tibet and K hoteu. By W.
\V. Rock hill. Pp . x ii . a nd 274 1884 . 10s. 6d.
THE SA NRHYA A PHORISE S OP K A PILA . With Illustra tive E x tracts fromthe Commentaries. Transla ted a nd Ed ited by J . R. Ba lla ntyne , LL. D . ,
a te Principa l of Beua res College . ThiI d Edition , now entirely Redi ted by F itzedwa rd Ha ll. Pp . viii . and 464 . 1885. 1 6s.
THE ORDINA NCES OF MANU. Transla ted from the Sa nsk rit. With an
Introduction by the la te A . C. Burne ll. Ph.D C . I .E . Com le ted andEd ited by Edwa rd W'
. Hopk ins. Ph. of Columbia Co ege , N ewYork . Pp . x liv. a nd 400. 1 884 . 12s.
THE LIFE A ND “forms or A LEx A NDER CSOIIA D E K OROS between 1 819a nd 1842 . With a Short Notice of a ll his Published a nd Unpublished“f
ork s and E ssa ys . FromOrigina l and for the most pa rt UnpublishedD ocuments. By T. D uk a ,M. I ) , F R.C.S. (Eng . Surgeon-Ma jor H.M. I
Benga lMedica lService , Re tired, &c. Pp. x ii . - 234 . 98 .
A N
CIENT PROVERRS A ND MA x I IIS PROMBURMESE SOURCES ; or, The NitiL i te ra ture of Burma . By James G ra y, A uthor of Elements of PaliGramma r,
”Ate. Post 8vo, pp. x ii. and 180. 1 886 .
MANA VA DHA RIIA CA STRA : The Code ofMann. Origina l Sansk rit Te x t,w ith Critica l Notes. By J . Jolly , Ph.D . , Professor of Sa nsk rit in theUniversity of Wurzbui ug la te Ta gore Professor cf Law in the University of Ca lcutta . Pp. viii. and 346 . 1 887. 108 . 6d .
MA SNA VI IMA ’NA YI : The Sp ii'ltua l Couplets of Ma ulitna Jslélu-’d Din
Muhamma d I Rfimi. Tra nsla ted and A bridged . By E. H. Whinfield,M.A . , la te ofH .M. Benga l Service . Pp. x x x i i. and 7s. 6d .
LEAVES FROMMY CHINESE SCRA P-BOOK. By F . H . Ba lfour, A uthor ofW
'
a ifs and Stra ys fromthe Fa r Ea st, &c. Pp. 78 . 6d .
MISCE LLA NEOUS PA PERS RELA TING To INDo-CHINA . Reprinted for theStra its Branch of the Roya l A sia ticSociety , from D a lrymple
’sOri enta l
Repertory , ” “A sia t ick Re se I ’
Irche s. and the“Journa l of the A sia tic
Society of Benga l. ” Two Vols. pp . x ii . -318 andvi.- 1 1 2 . 1 886. 2 1s .
MISCELLANEOUS ESSA YS ON SUBJECTS CONNECTED WITH THE MA LA YPENINSULA A ND THE IND IAN A RCHIPELAGO. From the
“Jourmls ”
of the Roya l A sia tic, Benga l A sia tic, and Roya l G eographica l Societies ; the
“Transactions
”and
“Journa l ” of the A sia tic Societ ofBa tavia , and the
“Ma layan Mi scellanies.
"Ed ited by R. Rost, b .
D . drc. &c. , Libra rian to the India Office . Second Series. 2vols. Pp.
vii i . a nd 308, and 314 . With five pla tes and a map. 1887. £1 , 5s.
Published by Triibner of: Co.
TEiiBNER's ORIENTAL SERIES— centia ucd .
THE SA TA RA S OF BHARTRIHARI . Transla ted fromthe S a nsk rit. By theRev. B. H a le W'
ortham, Rector of Eggesford , North D evon.
Pp. mi. a nd 72. 1 886 . 58 .
A LBERCNTS IND IA . A n A ccount Of the Religion of Ind ia : its PhilosophyL ite ra ture
, G eogra phy, Chronology , A stronomy, Customs , La w , a n
A strology , a bout A .U. 1030. English Ed ition, conta ining a Pre fa ce , theTra nsla tion of the A ra bic Te x t, Notes a nd Ind ices. By Edwa rd S a cha u,Ph. D . , Profe ssor in the Roya l University of Berlin. In the press.
Thiswork is a lso published . in the A rabic origina l. One VOL, 4 to, cloth.
£3, 38 . See SA CHAU, p. 58.
THE FOLK-TA LES OP K ASHMIR. By the Rev. J . HintonK nowles,M. ILA . S . , &0. Pp. x ii. a nd 510. 1 888 . 1 68 .
MEDI IEt'A L RESEARCRES PROII EA STERN A S IA TIC SOURCES . Fragmentstowa rds the K nowledge of the Geography and History of Centra l andR
'
estern A sia fromthe 13th to the 1 7th Century . By E . Bre tschne ider,M.D . ,la te Physician to the Russian Lega tion a t Pe k In.
TURNER— THE ENGLISH LA NGUA GE. A Concise History of the English La nguage ,with a G lossa ry show ing the D e riva tion a nd Pronuncia tion of the English \Vords.
By Roger Turner. InG erman and English on opposite pages. 1 8mo, pp.viii . - 80,sewed . 1884 . Is. 6d .
fl RRELL — TS E TON IC TREA TMENT OP EPILEPSY A ND K INDRED NERvUCS A rPECTIONS. By“fa lter Tyrre ll,M.E .C.S . Crown 8vo, pp. vi. and 170, cloth . 1887.
W ORK — A SHORT CUT To READ ING The Child’s First Book of Lessons. Part I .
ByW. H . Unger. Fourth Ed ition. Cr. 8vo, pp. 32 , cloth. 1 873. 5d .
SEQUEL to Pa rt I . a nd Pa rt I I . Fourth Ed ition. Cr. 8vo, p. 64 , cloth . 1 873.6d. Pa rts I . and I I . Third Ed ition. D emy 8vo, pp . 76, cIoth. 1 873. 1 8 . 6d .
In folio shee ts. Pp. 44 . Se ts A to D , 10d . each set E, 8d . 1 873. Comple te , 1 s.W ORK — W. H. UNGER’
S CONTINUOUS SUPPLEMENTARYWRITINGMOD ELS, de signedto impa rt not only a good business hand , but correctness in transcribing. Oblong8vo, pp . 40, stiff covers. 1 8 74 . 6d .
W GHB .— THE STUIIENT
'
S BLUE BOOK : Be ing Se lections from Official Corres ndence , Reports , &c. ; for E x ercises in Rea d ing and Coming Ma nuscn
’
pts,riting, Orthogra phy , Punctua tion, D icta tion, Précis, Inde x ing, and D igesting,
and Ta bula ting A ccounts and Re turns. Compile d by IV. H . Unger. Folio, pp.
100, pa per. 1 8 75. 2s.
W ORK — Twp HUNDRED TESTS IN ENGLISH ORTROGRA PIIY, orWord D icta tions.Compiled by \V. H . Unger. Foolsca p ,viii. and 200, cloth . 1877. Is. (id . pla in,
2s. 6d . interle aved .s
WHORE — THE SCRIPT PRmER : By which one of the rema ining d ifficulties ofChildren is e ntirely removed in the first sta ges. and , a s a consequence , a consider
a ble saving of time will be effected . In Two Pa rts. B W . H . Unger. Part I .
1 2mo, pp. xvi . and 44 , cloth. 5d . Pa rt IL, pp . 59
, cloth. 5d .
W GER.— PRELIMINARY WORD D ICTA TIONS ON THE RULES POE SPELLING . By W.
H . Unger. 18 Ino, pp. 44 , cloth. 4d .
W OOI OHEA .—MA POTECA COLOIIS IA NA : Ca talogo de To dos los Mapas, Planes,
Vista s, &c. , rela tivos a la America -Eslmuola , Bra sil, e Isla s adya cente s. A rre
lada cronologicamente i preced id a de una introd uccion sobre la historia ca rtogra
os de América . Por e l Doctor EzequielUricoechea , de Bog6ts, N ueva G rana da .
ave!pp. 232, cloth. 1860. 6s.
M UHART.— E LECTRO-MOTORS . The Means a nd A ppa rltus employed in the
Transmission of E lectrica l Energy and its Conversion into Motive-power. ByJ. IV. Urquha rt. Crown 8vo, pp. 190, illustra ted , cloth. 1882 . 7s. 6d .
vAITANA SUTRA — See A sm a ra si ssx am: Vol. III.
A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Work s,—_Lrves or TE E TWIN BROTHERS, Jmist AND A LTONSO D E VA LDES. By E.
Boehmer. D .D . Transla ted by J. T. Be tts. Crown 8vo, pp. 32,wra ppe rs.
1 882. Is.
VALDES.
— SEVENTEEN OPUSCULES . By Jufin de V a ldés. Transla te d from the
Spanish a nd Ita lian. and edited by John T. Be tts. Cro.wn 8vo, pp. x i i . and
1 88 , cloth . 1 882. 6s.0
VALDES .— JUAN DE VA LDES
’ COMMENTARY UPON TE E GOSPEL OE ST. MATTE Ew.
IVith Professor Boehmer’s “Live s of Jun and A lfonso de Va ldes. N oyvfor
the fi rst time tra nsla ted fromthe Spa nish ,a nd never be fore published in English.
By John T. Betts. Post 8vo , pp. x ii. and 512-30, cloth. 1882. 7s. 6d .
VALDES.— SPIRITUA L MILK ; or, Christian Instruction for Children. By Jui n do
V a ldés. Tra nsla ted from the Ita lia n, edited a nd published by John T. Be tts.
'
Wi th Lives of the twin brothe rs, Jmi n a nd A lfonso de Va ldés. By E . Boehmer.D .D . Fca p. 8vo, pp. 60, wrappers . 1 882. 2s.
VALDES.— SPIRITUAL MILK. Octa glot. The Ita lian origina l, with transla tions
into S anish, La tin, Polish, G e rman, English, French, a nd Enga d in. With a
Critic and Historica l Introduction by Edwa rd Boehmer, the Ed itor of Spa nish
Re formers. 4 to, pp. 88, wra ppe rs. 1884 . 6s.
VALDES.— THREE OPUSCULES an E x tra ct fromValdes' Seventeen Opuscules. By
Juén de Va ldés. Tra nsla ted , ed ite d , a nd published by John T. Be tts. Fca p. 87 0,pp. 58 , wra ppers. 1 8 . 6d .
VALDES.— JUAN DE VA LDES
'
COE E ENTARY UPON OUR Loan'
s SERMON ON TE E
MOUNT. Tra nsla ted and edited by J. T. Betts. With Lives of Judn andA lfonso de Va ldés. By E. Boehmer, D .D . Crown 8vo, pp. 1 1 2 , boa rds.
1 882 . 2s. 6d.
VALDRs.
— JUAN D E VA LD IES’ COMMENTARY UPON THE EPISTLE To TE E ROE ANB.
Ed ited by J . T. Betts. Crown 8vo, pp. x x x ii . a nd 296 , cloth. 1883.
VALDES — JUAN D E VA LDES’ COMMENTARY UPON ST. PA UL’
S F IRST EPISTLE To
TE E CEURCE A T CORINTE . Tra nsla ted a nd ed ited by J. T. Betts. W ith Live sof Juan a nd A lphonso de Va ldés. By E . Boehmer. Crown 8vo, pp. 390, cloth.
1 883. GS .
VAN CAMPEN.— THE DUTCE IN TE E A RCTIC SEA S . B
ySamuel Richa rd V an
Campen,a uthor of
“Holland’s S ilver Fea st. ” 8vo. ol. I . A D utch A rctic
E x ped itIon and Route . Third Ed ition. Pp. x x xvii. and 263, cloth. 1877. 10s. 6d.
Vo l. II . in prepa ra tion.
VAN DEWEYER.— CEOIx D
’OPUSCULES-PE ILOSOPE IQUES , HISTORIQUES , POLITIQUES
ET LITTERA IRES de Sylva in V an de II'
pyer , Precedes d’Avant pro )0 8 de l
’
Ed iteur.Ro x burghe style . Crown 8vo. PREMIERE SERIE. Pp. 374 . 1 3. 10s. 6d .
D LUx IEE E SERIE. P 502 . 1 869. 1 28 .
— TROIS IEME SEEIE. Pp. 391 . 1 875.
10s. 6d .— QUATRIEIIE gERIE . Pp . 366 . 1 876 . 103. 6d .
VAN EY8 .— BA 8QURGRA II IIAR. Se e Triibner
’
s Collection.VAN PB AAGH.
— LESSONS POR TE E INSTRUCTION or D EA F A ND D UNE CE ILDREN,
in Spe a k ing, Lip-re a d ing, Re a d Ing, a nd Writing. By IV. Va n Pra agh, D irector
of the School a nd Tra ining College for Te a chers of the A ssocia tion for the Ora lInstruction of the D ea f and D umb , OfIICIer d ’
A ca d emie , France . Fcap. 8vo,Pa rt I .
, pp. 52 , cloth. 1884 . 2s. 6d . Pa rt II. , pp. 62, cloth. Is. 6d .
VARDHAMANA’S GANARATNAMAHODADHI . See A UCTORES SANSERITI , Vi . W .
7 4 2 13 01’ LA NK UMN A Persian Pla y . A Tex t-Book of Modern 0011 ui a lP ers ia n. E d ited , with G ramma tical Introduction ,
Transla tion, Note s, and ow .
b ulnry ,by IV. H . Hagga rd , la te of H .M. Legafi on
’m'h h erau ,mh
CmWu 8vo, pp . 230, cloth. 1 882 .
-r 10s . ea .
A Ca ta logue of Important Works,K L — TEA ,
COPPER, A ND COCOA . A Psa ctica l Trea tise on the A na lysis ofTe a , Co cc, Cocoa , Chocola te ,Ma te (Pa ragu ay Tea ) , 610 . By J . A . lVa nk lyn,Crown 8vo, pp .viii. a nd 60, cloth. 1 874 . 5s.
WANK LYN and COOPEB .
— BREA D A NA LYS IS . A Pra ctica l Trea tise on the E x amina tion Of Flour and Brea d . By J. A lfred Wank lyn a nd W. J . Cooper. Uniformin size and price WIth
“Milk A na lysis,
” “Wa te r a nd“Te a , Coffee,
and Cocoa A na lysis.
”A d apted to the requirements Of the genera lpubli8. Crown
8vo, pp. viii. a nd 78 , cloth. 1 886. 5s.
WANK LYN and COOPER — A mA NA LYSIS . A Pra ctica l Trea tise on the E x amination Of A ir. With A ppendix on Coa lGas. By J. A . Wa nk lyn and lv. J . COOper.
Crown 8vo. [In prepa ra tion.
WARD — ICE : A Lecture delivered before the K eswick Literary Society, and publishe d by rwuest. TO which is ap
gnded a Geologica l D ream on Sk iddaw. By
J. Clifton a rd , F .G .S. 8vo, pp. sewed. 1 870. Is.
WARE — ELEMENTARYN ATURA L PHI LOSOPHY be ing a Course of N ine Lectures, specia lly ad apted for the use of Schools and Junior Students. By J. Cli fton lVard
,
F.G .S . Fcap. 8vo, pp.viii. and 216, with 154 Illustra tions, cloth. 1871 . 38 . 6d .
WARD .
— ELEHENTA RY GEOLOGY : A Course of N ine Lectures, for the use of Schoolsand Junior Students. By J. Cli ftonWa rd , F.C .S. Fcap. 8vo, pp. 292, wi th 1 20Illustra tions, cloth. 1872. 4s. 6d .
WATSON .- 1NDEX TO TEE NATIVE AND SCIENTIFIC NAMES or IND IA N AND OTHER
EASTERN ECONOMIC PLANTS AND PRODUCTS . origina lly prepa red under the autho
rity of the Secre ta ry of Sta te for Ind ia in Council. By John Forbes Wa tson,
M.D . Imp. 8vo, pp. 650, cloth. 1868. £1 , l lc. 6d .
WATSON .— SPA NISE A ND PORTUGUESE SOUTE AMERICA DURING TE E COLONIA L
P
8
1
81
410D
2By R. G . lVATSON. 2 vols. post 8vo, pp. xvi.—308, vi ii .-320, cloth.
1 1s.
WEBER — TE E HISTORY or IND IAN LITERATURE. By A lbrechtWeber. Transla tedfromthe Second G erman Ed ition, by J.Mann,M.A . ,
and T. Z acha ra ia e , Ph . D .,
with the sanction of the A uthor. Second Edition, post 8vo, pp. x x iv. and 360,cloth. 1882 . 10s. 6d .
WEBSTER — See RIG -VEDA SANE ITA .
WEDGWOOD.— TE E PRINCIPLES OF GEONETRICA LD EMONSTRATION , reduced fromthe
Origina l Conception of Space and Form. By H . lVedgwood ,M.A . 1 2mo, pp. 48 ,
cloth. 1 844 . 2s.
WEDGWOOD .-ON TE E D EVELOPE ENT or TEE UNDERSTAND ING . By H. Wedgwood ,
A .M. 1 2mo, pp. 133, cloth. 1 848. 3g.9
WEDGWOOD.— TE E G EOMETRY OP TEE T REE FIRST BOOKS or EUCLID . By D irect
Proof fromD efinitions A lone . By H . edgwood , M.A . 1 2mo, pp. 104 , cloth.
‘
WEDGWOOD .— ON TE E ORIGIN or LANGUA GE. By B . Wedgwood, M.A . 12mo,
pp. 1 65, cloth. 1 866. 3s. 6d.
WEDGWOOD .— A D ICTIONARY or ENGLISE ETYE OLOGY. By B . Wedgwood .
Third Edition, revised and enlarged. With Introduction on the Origin ofLanguage . 8vo, pp. lx x ii . and 746 , cloth. 1 878 . £1 . 1 s.
m GWOOD .— CONTESTED ETYIIOLOGIES IN TE E D ICTIONARY OF TE E REv. W. W.
SKEA T. By B . Wedgwood . Crown 8vo, pp. viii. a nd 194 , cloth. 1 882. 5s.
WRISBACH.— THEORETIOA LMECHANICS : A Manual of theMechanics of Engine er
ing and of the Construction ofMachines with an Introduction to the Ca lculus.
D esigned as a Te x t-book for Technica l Schools and Colleges, and for the use Of
Engineers, A rchitects, &o. By Julius We isba ch, Ph.D . , Oberbergra th, and Professer a t the RoyalMining A ca demy at Freiberg, Arc. Tra nsla ted fromthe G erma n b Eck ley B. Cox e, A .M.
,Mining Engineer. D emy 8vo, with 902 woodcuts,pp . 1 1 cloth. 1 877. 31s. 6d .
Published by Tmbner (f: 00 . 75
83.— A N IMPROVED D ICTIONARY ; English and French, and Frenc and EngBy E . WVeller. Roya l 8vo, pp. 384 and 340, cloth. 1864 . 7s.
iI.-DON .— A NGLING RESORTS NEAR LONDON : The Thames a nd the Lea . By J .
Vheeldon. Pisca toria l Correspondent to“Bell
’
s Life .
” Crown 8vo, pp. viii .21 8 . 1 878 . Pa per, ls. 6d .
“Br -THE H I STORY or INDIA FROMTE E EARLIEST A GES . By J. Ta lboys
eeler. D emy 8vo , cloth. Vol. 1 . conta ining the Ved ic Period a nd the Ma hata . W ithMa p . Pp. lx xv. a nd 576 , cl. 1 867 , O. p. Vol. II. The Ramayana ,
the Bra hma nic Period . Pp. lx x xviii. and 680, with 2 Ma ps, cl. 2 18 . Vol.
Hindu, Budd hist, Bra hma nica l Reviva l. Pp . x x iv. -500. With 2 Ma s,
01. 1874 . 18s. Thisvolume may be ha d as a complete work with the Ol
ng title ,“History Of Ind ia ; H indu,
Buddhist, and Brahma nical. Vol
Part 1 .Mussulma n Rule . Pp. x x x ii .-320. 1 876 . 1 4 8 . Vol. IV . Pa rt II.
pleting the H istory of Ind ia down to the time of the Moghul Empire .
x xviii . and 280. 1 88 1 . 1 28 .
ERR — EARLY RECORDS or BRITISH IND IA : A History of the English Settleltfl in India , as told in the Government Records, the work s of old Travellers,otherContempora ry D ocuments, fromthe e a rliest period down to the rise Of
.ish Power in Ind ia . By J . Tulboys t eeler, la te A ssista nt Secreta ry to the
:mTSe'il
B
t of Ind ia in the Fore ign D epartment. Roya l 8vo, pp. x x x ii. and 392 ,15s.
m .— THE FORE IGNER IN CHINA . By L. N . Wheeler, D .D . Wi th Intro
tion by ProfessorW. C. Sawyer, Ph.D . 8vo, pp. 268,cloth . 1 881 . 68 . 6d .
ARE — A COMPREE EN S IVE COMMENTARY TO TE E QURA N . To wh ich is prefix ed
3'
s Prelimina ry D i scourse,w ith a dd itiona l Notes and Eme nd a tions. Together
h a comple te Ind e x to the Te x t, Prelimina ry D iscourse . and Notes. By Rev.iI . Wherry M.A . , Lod ia na . Post 8vo, cloth. Vol. 1 . Pp. x ii. a nd 392 . 1 882 .
6d . Vol. II . Pp . vi. a nd 408. 1 884 . 128 . 6d . Vol. III . Pp. viii . - 4 14.5. 1 2s. 6d . Vol. IV . Pp. vii i. -340. 1 886 . 10s. 6d . 0
YIELD .— QUA TRA INS or OMAR K HA YYAM. See Triihner
’s Orienta l Series.
FIELD — See G ULSHA N 1 . RM.
T.— SE ORT RULES FORMODERN WRIST, E x tra cted from the Qua rte
gliiew Of Ja nua ry 1 871 . Printed on a Ca rd , fold ed to fit the Pock et. 1878.
‘
E .— SPINOZA . Se e English and Fore ign Philosophica l Libra ry .
'
NEY.— LA NGUA GE A ND TE E STUDY or LANGUA GE : Twelve Lectures on the
Iciple s Of Linguistic Science. By W. D . \Vhitney. Fourth Ed ition, augIted by n A na lysis. Crown 8vo, pp. 1 11. and 504 , cloth . 1 884 . 10s. 6d .
'
NE'
Y. A NGUA GE A ND ITS STUDY, owith especia l re ference to the Indo'
opea n Family of Languages . Seven ectures by W. D . Whitney, Instructorl odern La nguage s in Ya le College . .d ited with Introduction, Notes , Tables,and an Ind e x ,
by the Rev. R. Morris, M.A . , LL.D . Second Ed ition.
wn 8vo, pp . x x ii . and 318 , cloth . 1 880. OR.
NEE — Orienta l and Linguistic Stud ies. ByW. D . Whitney. First Series.
wn 8vo, pp. x . and 420. cloth . 1 874 . 1 25. Second Se ries. Crown 8vo, pp. x ii.434 . cha rt, cloth. 1 874 . 128 .
NEE — A SA NSKRIT G RAMMAR,includ ing both the Cla ssica l Language and the
irvia lects of V ed a and Bra hmana . ByW. D .Whitney, Professor of Sansk rit.Pp . viii. and 786, cloth. 1 879. 1 2 3.
WELL — IRON SMELTER’
S POCKET A NA LYSIS BOOK. By Thoma s Whitwell,shei8%f
7
the
5Institution ofMechanica l Engineers, arc. Oblong 12mo, pp. 152 ,
I. o 8 .
N EON .
— THE SA INT’
S TRA VEL To TE E LA ND or CA NAAN. Wherein are dis:red Seventeen Fa lse Re sts short Of the Spiritua l Coming Of Christ in theIt] , with a Brief D iscovery of wha t the Owning of Christ in the Spirit is.Wilk inson. Printed 1648 ; reprinted 1 874 . Fca p. 8vo, pp. 208, cloth. ll .
0 Q
76 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works.
WILLIAMS.— A SYLLA S IC D ICTIONARY or THE CHINESE LANG UA G E ; a rra nged st
cord ing to the \Vu-Fang Yuen Yin, with the pronuncia tion of the Cha ra cten s
hea rd in Pe k in, Canton, Amoy, and Shangha i . By S. Wells Williams, LIED4to
, pp. 1336 . 1 874 . £5.5s.
WILLIAMS — MODERN IND IA AND THE INDIAN S . See Trubner’s Orienta l Series.
m om— WORKS or TE E LATE HORA CE HAYMAN WILSON,M.A . ,Ace.
Vols. I . a nd II . Essays and Lectures chiefly on the Religion of the Hindus, hthe la te H . H. \Vi lson,M.A . , Collected and Ed i te d by D r.
’Robhold Boat. 2 vols. demy 8vo, pp. x iii . and 399, vi . and 4 16, cloth. 2 1 s.
Vols. I II. , IV . , and V . Essays A na lytical, Critica l, and Philologica l, on Sub '
ee
connected with Sansk rit Litera ture . Collected and Ed ited by D r. Re in 01
Boat. 3vols. demy 8vo, pp. 408, 406 , and 390, cloth. 36s.Vols. V I . , VII . ,
VIII . , IX. , and X . (2 pa rts). V ishnu Puraué, a SystemOf HindMythology and Trad ition. Transla ted from the origina l Sansk rit, a nd Illu:
tra ted by Notes derived chiefly fromother Pa rt'
inas. B the la te H . H . W ilsOIEdited by FitzEdwa rd Ha ll,M. A .
, Ox on. ols. I . to V . (2 partsD emy 8vo
, pp. cx l. and 200, 344 , 346 , 362, a nd 268 , cloth. £3, 4s. 6d .
Vols. XI . and XII . Select Specimens of the Thea tre of the H indus. Transla te
from the origina l Sansk rit. By the la te H H. Wilson, M.A . , F.R. S . Thir
corrected Edition. 2vols. demy 8vo, pp. In n. and 384 , iv. and 4 1 8 , cloth. 211
WILSONf
— RUSSIA N LYRICS IN ENGLISH VERSE . By the Rev. C. T. Wilson.M. A
la te Chapla in, Bomba y. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi . and 224 , cloth. 1 887. 6s.
WISH— COMMENTARY ON TEE H IND U SYSTEMor MED ICINE . By T. A . Wis
M.D . 8vo, pp. x x . and 432 , cloth. 1 845. 7s. 6d.
WISE — REVI EW or TE E HISTORY OF MED ICINE. By Thomas A . Wise . 2 volodemy 8vo, cloth. Vol. L , pp. x cviii. a nd 397. Vol. H . , pp. 574 . 108 .
WISH — HISTORY OE PA GA NISMIN CA LEDONIA . By T. A . Wise ,M.D . , arc. D em4to, pp. x xviii. - 272, cloth, with numerous Illustra tions. 1 884 . 15s.
WITHERS.— TEE ENGLISE LA NGUA GE A S PRONOUNOED . By G . Withers. Roy:
8vo, pp. 84 , sewed. 1874 . I s.
WO0D .— CHRONOS . Mother Ea rth’
s Biography. A Romance of the New Schoo
{38y7r
’a
gace Wood ,M.D . Crown 8vo, pp. xvi. and 334, with Illustra tion, clotls.
WOMEN . THE RIGHTS orWOMEN. A Comparison of the Re la tiveL ega l Sta tus n
the Se x es in the Chief Countries OBWestern Civilisa tion. Crown 8vo, pp. 10
cloth. 1875. 2s. 6d. e
WOBSAAR— TEE PER-HISTORY or TE E NORTE , BASED ON CONTEMPORARY MlHOMA LS. By the la te Chambe rla in J . J . A . Worsa a e , D r. Phil Hon. F . S . AF . S . A Soot ,
M. I . A . , &C. &c. Transla ted, with a brief Memmr of t}A uthor, by H. F . orla nd Simpson, M.A . Crown 8vo, pp. x x x . a nd 206 , clotlwithMap and Illustra tions. 1 886 . 6s.
WRIGHT.— F
'
EUD ALMA NUA LS or ENGLIS E H ISTORY, a series of Popular Sk etches a
our N a tiona l H istory compiled a t d ifferent eriods, fromthe Thirte enthC entui
to the F ifte enth, for the use Of the Feud al ntry and Nobility . Now first ed itsfrom the Origina lManuscripts. By Thoma sW
'
right,M.A ., &C. Snia
4 to, pp . x x ix . and 184 , cloth. 1872 . 15s.O
WRIGHT.— THE HOMES or OTHER D AYS. A History Of D omesticManners an
Sentiments during the Middle A ges. By Thomas “fright,M.A .,F .S. A . “Til
Illustra tions from the Illumina tions in Contemporary Manuscripts a nd otlic
Sources. Drawn and Engraved by F. W. Fa irholt, E.S.A . Med ium8vo, 32512, cloth: 1871 . 21s.
7S
ENGLIS IQVOMAN s REVIEW, ..mImmm ) q nthly ,
GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE, orMonthly Journal of G eology, l s. 6d . A nnua l Sub
scription, 1 8s. Post free .
GLASGOW, GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF (TRA NSACTIONS — Irregula r.
INDEXMED ICUS.— A Monthly Classified Record of the CurrentMedicid Litera ture
of the W'
orld. A nnua l Subscription, 5os. Post free.
INDIAN ANTIQUARY.-A Journa l of Orienta l Research in A rchaeology, Hi story,
Lite ra ture , La ngua ges, Philosophy. Religion, Folk lore , GIG. A nnua l Subscription, £2 . Post fre e .
INDIAN EVANGELICAL REVIEW.— A nnual Subscription, 10s.
LIBRARY JOURNAL.— OfiicinlOrga n of the Libra ry A ssocia tions of America a nd of
the United K ingdom. Monthly, 2s. 6d . A nnua l Subscription, 203. PCst free .
MATHEMATICS (AMERICAN JOURNAL OIL— Quarte rly, 7s. 6d. A nnual Subscrip
tion,24s. Post free .
ORIENTA LIST (THE ) . — Monthly. A nnua l Subscription, 1 2s.
ORTHODox CATHOLICREVIEW.— Irregular.
PHILOLQGICAL SOCIETY (TRANSACTIONS A ND PROCEED INGS or). — Irregul
PSYCHICAL RESEARCH (SOCIETY OP).— PROCEED INGS .
PUBLISHERS’ WEEKLY.— THE AMERICAN BOOK-TRADE JOURNA L. A nnua l Sub
scription, 1 8s. Post free .
PUNJAB NOTES AND QUERIES.— Monthly. A nnua l Subscription, 10s.
REVUE INTERNATIONALE .
— Issued on the loth and 25th of ea chMonth. A nnualSubscription, includ ing postage , 363.
SCIENTIFIC AMERICAN — WEEKLY. A nnual subscription, 1 8s. Post free .
SUPPLEMENT to d ata — WEEKLY. Annua l subscription, 2i s. Post free .
SCIENCE AND ARTS (AMERICANJOURNA L or) . — Monthly, 2s. 6d . A nnual Subscription
,303.
SPECULATIVE PHILOSOPHY (JOURNAL or). -Quarterly, 4s. A nnua l Subscription,1 68 . Post fre e
, 178 .
e
SUNDAY REVIEW.— Organ of the Suritlay Society for Opening Museums and A rt
G a llerie s on Sunda y.— Quarte rly , 1 s.s A nnua l Subscription, 4 s. 6d . Post free .
TRUBNER’S AMERICAN , EUROPEAN,
A ND ORI ENTA L LITERARY RECORD .— A Register
of the most Importa nt \Vork s Published in North and South America , E urope ,A frica , a nd the East. With occa siona l Note s on Contempora ry Litera ture .
Ri-monthly, sma ll 4 to , 1 s. per number. A nnua l Subscription, 5s. Post free .
The object of the Publishe rs in issuing this publica tion is to give a full and pa rticula r a ccount of every publica tion of imlvorta nce issued in America and the E a st.
TRUENERa coreMomma LIST of New a nd Forthcoming Work s, Ofllbial andother A uthorised Publica tions, and New American Book s. Post free .
WESTMINSTERREVIEW.— Monthly, 2s. 6d . A nnual Subscription,30s. Post free.
WOMAN’
S SUFFRA GE JOURNAL.— Monthly, 1 d .
YORK SHIRE NOTES: AND QUERIES, with the York shire Genea logist, York shireB ibliogra pher, a nd York shire Folk
-Lore Journal . With separa te pa“
na tion fore a ch subj e ct. E d ited by J. B erni e.“Turuer. Qumran ,
Xs . m udS ubscrip tion in a dvance , 58 .
TRUBNER cons CATAL O GUE S.
A ny of the following Ca talogues sent per Post on receipt of Stamps.
A frica ,Work s Re la ting to th e Mod ern L angua ge s of. 1d .
A g ricultura lWork s . 2d.
A me rica , N orth , South , and th e W est Ind ies, Book s rela ting to .
I s .
A ra b ic, Persian , a nd Turk ish Book s , printed in the East. Is.
A ssyri a a nd A ssy riology . ls.
B eng a l a nd th e B eng a l i L a ngua ge , Book s on. 1d .
B ra zil , A ncient a nd Mod ern B ook s rela ting to. 23. 6d .
BritishMuse um,Pub lica tions of Trustees of the . 1d.
B urma a nd th e Burmese , Book s on . 1d .
Ceylon a nd its Products , Book s on . 1d .
Chi na a nd Ja pa n . Book s on. 1d .
D iction a rie s a nd G ramma rs of Princip a l L a ngua ge s and D ia lectsof th e W orld . 53.
D ravi d i a n (Ca na re se , Ma la y a lim, Tamil , Telugu ) L angua ges,B ook s on . 1d .
Ed uca tiona lWork s (E urope a n L angua ges) . 1d.
E gyp t a nd E gyptology . ls.
G erman N e wsp a ers a nd Periodica ls. ls.
Gui d e Book s . 1d?Guj a ra ti a nd Ma ra th i L a ngu a ges , Book s on . 1d .
H indi L a ngua ge ,Book s on . 1d .
H industan L a ngu a g e ,Book s on . 1d .
Importa ntWork s , published by Triibner Co. 2d .
Inglis and N e ighbouring Countriu ,
Book s of interest rela ting to.
Ja pan a nd th e Ja pane se , Book s on . 1 d .
L ibra ry A pp lia nce s , H a nd book s for Libra ria ns , &c. 1d.
Linguistic a nd Orienta l Pub lica tions . 2d .
Maps , &c., of I nd i a a nd oth e r pa rts of A sia . 1d.
Ma ra thi L a ngua g e , Book s on. 1d .
Med ica l , Surgica l , Ch emica l, a nd D enta l Pub lica tions. 2d.
Mod ern G erma n B ook s .
"
1d .
Monthly L ist of N ew Pub lica tions . Gra tis.
Pa li. Pra k rit , a nd B ud dhist L ite ra ture . ls.
Portuguese L a ngua ge , A ncient a nd Mod ern Book s in the . 6d .
Sansk rit Book s . 2s . 6d .
S cientific W ork s . 2d .
Tamil a nd Tel eg u, Book s on . 1d .
TRUBN E R
CO LLECTION OF SIMPL IFIED GRAMMARSOF THE
PRI NCI PAL ASIATIO AND EURO PEAN lANGUAGES.
ED ITED BY REINHOLD ROST, LL D ., FILD .
The obj ect of this Series is to provide the learner with a concise but
pra ctica l Introduction to the various Langua g es, and a t the same time tofur nish Students of Compara tive Philology with a clear and comprehensiveview of their structure . The a ttempt to adapt the somewha t cumbrous
gramma tica l systemof the G reek and La tin to every othertongue ha s introduced a grea t de a l of unnecessary difficulty into the study of La nguages.
Instead of ana lysing e x isting locutions and endeavouring to d iscover theprincipleswhich regula te them,
writers of grammars have for the most partconstructed a framework of rules on the old lines
, a nd tried to ma k e thelanguage Of u hich they were trea ting fit into it. Where this proves impossible , the d ifficulty ismet by lists of e x ceptions and irregula r forms, thusburdening the pupil
’
smind with a mass of deta ils of which he can ma k eno.practica l use .
In these G rammars the subject isviewed from a different standpoint
the structure of each language is ca refully e x amined,and the principles
which unde rlie it a re ca refully e IIpla ined ; while apparent d iscrepa ncies
and so-ca lled irregula rities are shown to be only na tura l euphonic and
other Changes. A ll technica l terms are ex cluded unless the ir meaningand a pplica tion is self-evident ; no arbi tra ry rules a re admitted the old
classifica tion into declensions, conjuga tions, &c.
,and even the‘nsua l p a ra.
digms and ta bles, a re omi tted . Thds reduced to the simplest principles,the A ccidence and Synta x ca n be thbroughly comprehended by the studenton one perusa l. and a few hours
’diligent study will enable him to a na lyse
any sentence in the lgnguage .
For Li st of Volume s a lrea dy pub lished , see pa ge 69.
LONDON : TRURNER a LUDGA TE HILL.
l
PRINT ED DY BA LL A IV I VA R, HA N SON A ND CO.
E D INBURGH A N D LONDON .
L.
A Ca ta logue oj'
Impm'
ta nt Works,or THE TWIN Ba orii sa s, JUh AND A troNso ns V a LD its. By E.
gi
ggimer. D .D . Transla ted by J. T. Be tts. Crown 8vo, pp. 32 , wrappe rs.
ls.
VALDEB.— SsvnNTssN OPUSCULES . By Juan de V a ldés. Transla ted from the
Spanish a nd Ita lian. a nd edited by John T. Be tts. Cro.wn 8vo, pp. x ii . a nd
1 88 , cloth. 1 882. 6s.
VALDES .— JU£N Ds V a nnss
’
CouusNra a r UPON Tm: GosrsL or ST. MATTHnw.
lVith Professor Boehmer’s
“Lives of Judn and A lfonso d e V a ldés. N ay for
the first time transla ted fromthe Spanish ,a nd never before published in English.
By John T. Betts. Post 8vo , pp. x ii. a nd 51 2—30, cloth. 1882. 7s. 6d .
VALDES.— SPIRITUA L MILK ; or, Christia n Instruction for Children. By Judn d e
V a ldés. Tra nsla te d from the Ita lia n, edited a nd published by John T. Be tts.
W'
i th Lives of the twin brothe rs, Jnan a nd A lfonso do Va ldés. By E . Boehmer.D .D . Fca p. 8vo, pp. 60, wra ppe rs . 1 882. 29.
VALDES.— S.PIRITUAL MILK. Octa glot. The Ita lian origina l, with transla tions
into S anish, La tin, Polish, G e rma n, English, French,a nd Enga d in.
”
With a
Critic and H istorica l Introduction by Edwa rd Boehmer, the Ed i tor of Spanis h
Re formers. 4 to, pp. 88, wrappers. 1 884 . 68 .
VALDBS.— THREE OPUSCULES an E x tra ct fromV a ldés
’
Seventeen Opuscules. ByJudn de V a ldés. Tra nsla ted , ed ited , a nd published by John T. Betts. Fcap. 8vo,pp. 58 , wra ppers. 1 88L ls. 6d .
VALDESn — JUAN DB VA LDss'
ConunNTs a r UPON OUH Loan'
s SERMON ON THE
MOUNT. Tra nsla ted a nd ed ited by J. T. Betts. With Lives of Juan and
A lfonso de V a ldés. By E. Boehmer,D .D . Crown 8vo, pp. 1 1" boards .
1 882. 2s. 6d .
VALDES .- JUAN ns Va LD rEs
' COMMENTARY UPON Tits EPIsTLs To THE Rons .
Ed ited by J . T. Betts. Crown 8vo, pp. x x x ii . a nd 296 , cloth. 1883. (is.
VALDES .— JU I(N m; VA Lnts’
CominNTARr UPON ST. PAUL’s FIRST EPIsTLr. To
THE CHURCH A‘
l‘ CORINTH. Tra nsla ted a nd ed ited by J . T. Betts. W ith Live s
pf Juan a nd A lphonso d e Va ldés. By E . Boehmer. Crown 8ro, pp. 390, cloth .
883. 68 .
VAN CAMPEN.— THE D UTCH IN THE A ncrio Sa ss. By Samuel Richard V an
Campen,a uthor of
“Holland’s S ilver Fe ast. 8vo. Vol. I . A D utch A rctic
E x ped ition a nd Route . Third Ed ition. Pp. x x xvii . and 263, cloth. 1 877. 108 . 6d .
Vol. II . in prep a ra tion.
VAN DBM IL — CHOU; D ’OPUSCUt.I H i sTORIQUns, POI.tTIQUi~.s
ET L ITTEBA IRES de Sylva in V an de W'
cyer , Précédés d’Ava nt pro we d e l
'
Ed iteur.Rox burghe style . Crown 8vo. PREMIERE SERIE. Pp. 374 . 1 3. 103. 6d .
D strx i imn Sta in. Pp. 502 . 1 869. l2a .
— Tammimn seam. Pp. 391 . 1 875.
10s. 6d .— QUATBIEME Sta in. Pp. 366 . 1 876 . 10s. 6d .
VAN BY8 .— BASQUE GRAMMAR. See Trfibner
’
s Collection.VAN PRAAGH.
- La ssoNs FOR THE INSTRUCTION or D ea r A ND D UMB CHILImHN,
in Spe a k ing. Lip-re a d ing, Re a d ing, a nd Wri ting. By \V. V a n Pra a gh, D irector
of the School and Tra ining College for Te a chers of the A ssocia ti on for t he Ora lInstruction of the D ea f a nd D umb, Officier d
’
A ca demie , France . Fcap. 8vo,Pa rt I . pp. 52 , cloth. 1 884 . 28 . 6d . Part IL , pp. 62 , cloth. l s. 6d .
VARDHAMANA ’S GANABATNAMAHODADHI . See A UCTOiins Ss x nITI , Vol. IV.
VA ZIR OP LANKURRN : A Persian Pla y . A Te x t-Book of Modern Colloquia lPe rsia n. Edited , wi th G ramma tica l Introduction,
Transla tion, Note s, and Voca
b ula ry ,by W. H . Hagga rd , la te of H .M. Lega tion in Teheran, and G . 10 Strange .
C'
ro Wl l 8vo, pp . 230, cloth. 108 . 6d .
74 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works,WAKE] . — TEA ,
Corr-ER, A ND COCOA . A Pba ctica l Trea tise on the A na lysis 0
Te a , Co ee , Cocoa , Chocola te ,Ma te (Pa raguay Tea ) , k c. By J . A . \Va uk lyn
arc. Crown 8vo, pp.viii. a nd 60, cloth. 1 8 7 4 . 5s.
WANK LYN and COOPER.— BREA D A NA LYS IS . A Pra ctica l Trea tise on the E x ami
na tion Of Flour a nd Bread . By J. A lfred Wa nk lyn a nd W. J . Cooper. Unifornin size and price with
“Milk A na lysis, ” “Wa te r A na lysis.
”a nd “
Te a, Coffee
a nd Cocoa A na lysis.
”A d apted to the requirements of the general publiB. Crow:
8vo, pp. viii. a nd 78 , cloth. 1 886 . 5s.
WANK LYN and COOPER— A IR A NALYSIS . A Pra ctica l Trea tise on the E x a iflination Of A ir. With A ppendix on Coa lGas. By J. A . Wank lyn andW
'
. J . Coope r.
Crown 8vo. [In prepa ra tion
WARD .— IGE : A Lecture delivered before the K eswick Litera ry Society, and pub
lishe d by re uest. TO which is ap ended a G eologica l D ream on Sk iddaw. B3J . Clifton a rd , F .G .S. 8vo, pp. sewed. 1 870. la.
WARD — ELEMENTARYN ATURA L PHILOSOPHY being a Course ofN ine Le ctures, specia lly a dapted for the use of Schools and Junior Students. By J. Cli ftonWa rd
F.G .S . Fca p. 8vo, pp.vi ii. and 216, with 154 Illustra tions, cloth . 1 871 . 3s. 6d .
WARD — ELEMENTARY GEOLOGY A Course of N ine Lectures, for the use Of Schooli
and Junior Students. By J. CliftonWa rd , F.G .S . Fca p. 8vo, pp. 292, with 1 2(
Illustra tions, cloth . 1 872 . 4s. 6d .
WAN ON .‘ IND EI TO THE N ATIVE AND SCIENTIFIC N AMES or IND IAN AND OTHEI
EA STERN ECONOMIC PLANTS A ND PRODUCTS , origina lly prepa red und er the autho
rity Of the Secretary of Sta te for Ind ia in Council. By John Forbes lVa tson,M.D . Imp. 8vo, pp. 650, cloth . 1 868. £1 , 1 ls. 6d .
WATSON .— SPA NISH A ND PORTUGUESE SOUTH AMERICA DURING THE COLONIAI
PERIOD . By B . G . lVA TSON . 2 vols. post 8vc, pp. xvi .-308 , Vlll. —320, cloth.
1 884 . 21 s.
W EE — THE HISTORY or IND IAN LITERATURE. By A lbrechtWeber. Transla tedfromthe Second G erman Edition, by J .Mann,M.A . ,
a nd T. Z a cha ra ia e , Ph . D . ,
with the sanction Of the A uthor. Second Edition, post 8vo , pp. x x iv. and 360,cloth. 1 882 . 1 0s. 6d .
WEBSTER — See RIG -VEDA SANE ITA .
WEDGWOOD .— THE PRINCIPLES or GEOEETRICA L D EMONSTRATION. reduced fromthe
Origina l Conce tion Of Space a nd Form. By H . Wedgwood ,M.A . 1 2mo, pp. 48,
cloth. 1844 . gs.
WEDGWOOD .— ON THE D EVELOPMENT or THE UNDERSTAND ING . By B . Wedgwood ,
A.M. 1 2mo, pp. 133, cloth. 1 848. 33.WEDGWOOD .
— THE G EOMETRY or THE Tiara s FIRST BOORS or EUCLID . By D irect
Proof fromD efinitions A lone . By H . edgwood , M.A . 1 2mo, pp. 104 , cloth.
WEDGWOOD .— ON THE ORIGIN or LANGUA GE. By R. Wedgwood , M.A . 1 2mo,
pp. 165, cloth. 1 866 . 3s. 6d .
WEDGWOOD .— A D ICTIONARY or ENGLISH ETYMOLOGY. By H. Wedgwood .
Third Edition, revised and enlarged. With Introduction on the Origin Of
Language . 8vo, pp . lx x ii. and 746 , cloth. 1 878 . £1 . 1 s.
WEDGWOOD .— CONTESTED ETYMOLOGIES IN THE D ICTION ARY or THE REV. W. W.
SEEA T. By H . Wedgwood . Crown 8vo, pp . viii. a nd 194 , cloth. 1 882. 58 .
m 8M03.— THEORETICA LMECHA NICS : A Manual of theMecha nics of Engineer
ing and Of the Construction ofMa chines with an Introduction to the Ca lcd us,
D esigned a s a Tex t-wok for Technica l Schools a nd Colleges, a nd for the use ofE ng ine ers, A rchi tects, &c. By JuliusWeisbach, Ph.D . , Oberbergra th, a nd Prof e asor a t the Roya lMining A cad emy at Freiberg, k c. Traua\a ted fromthe Ger.
ma n b E ck ley B . Cox e , A .M. Mining Engineer. D emySa c ,GRAN T) .w e a k en“.
PP 1 1 2, cloth. 1 877. 31 s. 6d .
Published by Trubne'r (f: 00.
m um— A s IMPROVED D ICTIONARY ; English and French, and Fremzdw d Eng
E . lVeller. Roya l 8vo, pp. 384 and 340, cloth. 1864 . 7s.
LONDON : The Thames and the Lea . By J .
Pp. x xvii i. a nd 280. 1 881 . 1 2s .
ments in India , as told in the Government Records, the work s Of old Travellers,a nd other Contempora ry D ocuments, from the e a rliest period down to the rise Of
British Power in Ind ia . By J . Ta lboys Whe eler, la te A ssista nt Secreta ry to theG overnment of Ind ia in the Foreign D epa rtment. Royal 8vo, pp. x x x i i. and 392
,
cloth. 1 878 . 153.
WHEELER — THE FOREIGNER IN CHINA . By L. N . Wheeler, D .D . Wi th Introduction by Profe ssorW. C. Sawyer, Ph.D . 8vc, pp. 268, cloth. 1 881 . (is. 6d .
WHERRY.— A COMPREHENSIVE COMMENTARY TO THE QURAN . To which is prefix ed
Sa le'
s Pre limina ry D iscourse , w ith a dd itiona l Notes and Emend a tions. Together
w ith a comple te Ind e x to the Te x t, Pre limina ry D iscourse , and Notes . By Rev.E . M. t e rry M.A . . Lod ia na . Post 8vo, cloth. Vol. I . Pp. x ii. a nd 392 . 1 882 .
Pp. viii - 4 14.
ntsl Series.
ed from the Qua rtegllfit the Pock et. 1 8 78.
a l Libra ry.
Twelve Lectures on the
— IRON SMELTER’
S POCKET A NA LYSIS BOOE . By Thoma s Whitwell,Member of the Institution OfMechanica l Engineers, &c. Oblong 12mo, pp. 152 ,roa n. 1 877. 5s.
0M SON .
— TB E SA INT’S TRA VEL To THE LA ND or CANAA N. Where in are dis
covered S evente en Fa lse Rests short Of the Spiritua l Coming of Christ. in the
Mo ts. with a Brief D iscovery of wha t the Cm’
mg Oi Ch in“‘
m 3&E . Wi lk inson. Pn
'
nted 1 648 ; reprinted 1 874 . Fcap. Sw ,v9 “MQ Q
76 A Ca ta logue of Importa nt Works.
WILLIAMS.— A SYLLARIC D ICTIONARY or THE CHINESE LANGUA G E ; a rra nged
cord ing to the Wu-Fang Yuen Yin,with the pronuncia tion Of the Chara cter:
hea rd in Pe k in, Ca nton, Amoy, and Sha ngha i . By S. Wells lVi lliams, LL4 to
, pp. 1336. 1874 . £5.5s.
WILLIAMS .
— MOD ERN IND IA A ND THE IND IAN S . See Trubner’s Orienta l Serie
m om- WORKS or THE LATE HORACE HAYMAN WILSON ,M. A . ,
F.RS k c.
Vols. I . a nd II . Essays and Lectures chiefly on the Religion Of the Hindus,the la te H . H . \Vi lson,M.A .
,8m. Collected a nd Ed i ted by D r.
’Bi
hold Boat. 2 vols. demy 8vo, pp. x iii . and 399, vi. and 4 16 , cloth. 2 1s.
Vols. I II. , IV a nd V . Essays A na lytical, Critica l, and Philologica l, on Sub '
i
connected w ith Sansk rit Litera ture . Collected and Ed ited by Dr. Re inBoat. 3vols. demy 8vo, pp. 408, 406 , and 390, cloth. 36s.
Vols. V I . , VII . ,V III . , IX. , and X . (2 parts). V ishnu Puri na, a Sy stemof Hi i
Mythology a nd Tra d ition. Transla ted from the origina l Sansk rit, and Illtra tad by Note s derived chiefly fromother Puranas. B the la te H . H. W ilsEd ited by FitzEd wa rd Ha ll,M. A .
, Ox on. ols. I . to V . (2 parD emy 8vo
, pp. cx l. a nd 200, 344 , 346, 362, and 268 , cloth. £3, 4 8 . 6d .
Vols. XI. a nd XII. Se lect Specimens Of the Thea tre of the Hindus. Translafrom the original Sansk rit. By the la te H . H . lVilson, M. A . , F.R. S . Tl
comcte d Edi tion. 2 vols. demy 8vo, pp . lx x i. and 384 , iv. and 4 18 , cloth.
WILSONf— RUBSIA N LYRICS IN ENGLISH VERSE . By the Rev. C. T. Wilson ,M.
la te Cha pla in, Bomba y. Crown 8vo, pp. xvi . and 224 , cloth. 1 887. 68 .
WISE — COMMENTARY ON THE H INDU SYSTEMOP MED ICINE. By T. A . WM.D . 8vo, pp. x x . and 432
,cloth. 1 845. 7s. 6d .
WISE — REVI EW OP THE H ISTORY or MED ICINE By T homas A . Wise . 2 vdemy 8vo, cloth. Vol. I. , pp. x cviii. and 397. Vol. I I . , pp. 574 . 1 08 .
WISE — HISTORY or PA GA NISMIN CA LEDONIA . By T. A . Wise ,MD , t o. D e4 to, pp. x xvi ii. - 272, cloth, with numerous Illustra tions. 1 884 . 153.
WITHBRS.
— THE ENGLISH LA NGUA GE A S PRONOUNCED . By G . Withers. RI8vo, pp. 84 , sewed. 1 874 . 1 a .
WOOD .— CHRONOS . Mother Earth’
s Biography. A Romance of the New Schi
B
SyQ'QVa
ggme Wood ,M.D . Crown 8vo, pp. xvi. and 334
,with Illustra tion, clc
l
WOMEN . THE RIGHTS orWOMEN. A Comparison of the Rela tiveL ega l Sta tuthe Sex es in the Chief Countries Ofi'Western Civilisa tion. Crown 8vo
, pp. 1cloth. 1 875. 28 . 6d. a
WORSA AE — THE Pa s -HISTORY OP THE NORTH,BASED ON CONTEMPORARY l
MORIA IAS. By the la te Chambe rla in J . J . A . VVorsa a e , D r. Phi l Hon. F . S .
E . S . A Scot ,M. I . A . ,
&c. &c. Transla ted , with a brie f Memo ir ofA uthor, by H . F . orla nd Simpson,
M.A . Crown 8vo, pp . x x x . a nd 206, 010
wi thMap and Illustra tions. 1 886 . 6s.
WRIGHT.— FEUD A LMA NUA LS OP ENG LISH HISTORY, a series of Popula r Sk etches
our N a tiona l History compiled a t d ifferent i eriods, fromthe Thirte enthC ent
to the Fifteenth, for the use Of the Feud a l i i try and Nob ility . Now first ed ifrom the Origina lMa nuscripts. By Thoma s lVi 'ight,M.A .
, k c. S i i4 to, pp. x x ix . a nd 1 84 , cloth. 1 872 . 15s.
WRIGHT — THE HO Es OF OTHER D AYS . A Historvof D omesticMa nne.rs l
S en timents during the Middle A ges. By Thoma s “fright,M.A . , P.S. A . WI llus tra tions from the Illumina tions in Contemporary Manuscripts a nd otSources. D ra wn and Engraved by F . W . F a irli e“,
F .S . A . Ni edmmSa n,
Wood cuts, pp . x v. a nd 51 2 , clotlf. 1 871 .
78 Periodica ls.
ENGLISW OMAN’S REVIEW.
— Social and InQustrial Que stions. Monthly, 6d .
GEOLOGICAL MA GAZINE, orMonthly Journa l of G eology, 1 s. 6d. Annua l Sub
scription, 18s. Post fre e .
GLASGOW,GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF (TRA NSA CTIONS — Irregula r.
INDEXMEDICUS.— A Monthly Classified Record of the CurrentMedici Litera ture!
of the W'
orld. A nnua l Subscription, 50s. Post free .
INDIAN ANTIQUARY.— A Journa l of Orienta l Research in A rchaeology, E atery,
Lite ra ture , La ngua ges, Philosophy, Religion, Folk lore , &c. A nnual Subscription, £2 . Post free .
INDIAN EVANGELICAL REVIEW.— A nnua l Subscription, 10s.
LIBRARY JOURNAL.— Officia l Organ of the Libra ry A ssocia tions of America and of
the United K ingdom. Monthly, 2s. 6d . A nnual Subscription, 209. Post free. i!
MATHEMATICS (AMERICAN JOURNAL or).— Quarterly, 7s. 6d. A nnua l Subscription, 24s. Post free .
ORIENTALIST (TRAIL— Monthly. A nnua l Subscription, 1 2s.
ORTHODOX CATHOLIC REVIEW.— Irregula r.
PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY (TRANSA CTIONS AND PROCEED INGS or). — Itragu1
PSYCHICAL RESEARCH (SOCIETY OP).— PROCEED INGS .
PUBLISHERS’ WEEKLY — THE AMERICAN BOOK-TRA DE JOURNA L. A nnual Sub
scription, 18s. Post free .
PUNJAB NOTES AND QUERIES — Monthly. A nnua l Subscription, 10s.
REVUE INTERNATIONALE — Issued on the loth and 25th of e achMonth. A nnual
Subscription, includ ing postage , 368 .
SCIENTIFIC AMERICAN — WEEK LY. A nnual subscription, 1 8s. Post free .
SUPPLEMENT to da ta — WEEK LY. Annual subscription,24s. Post free .
SCIENCE AND ARTS (AMERICANJOURNA L os) . — Monthly, 2s. 6d . A nnual Subscription,
308.
SPECULATIVE PHILOSOPHY (JOURNA L GEL— Quarte rly, 43. A nnual Subscription,1 68 . Post fre e , 178 . Q
SUNDAY REVIEW.— Organ of the Surfli ay Society for Opening Museums and A rt
G a lleries on Sund ay.— Qua rterly , A nnua l Subscription, 4 s. 6d. Post free .
TBUBNEB'
S AMERICAN , EUROPEAN , A ND ORIENTA L LITERARY RECORD .-A Register
of the most Importa nt \York s Published in North a nd South America , Europe ,A frica , a nd the East. With occasiona l Notes on Contempor Litera ture .
Ri-monthly, sma ll 4 to,1 s. per number. A nnua l Subscription, 5s. Ost free .
The object of the Publishers in issuing this publica tion is to give a full and particula r a ccount of every publica tion of importa nce issued in America and the Ea st.
TRUBNERat CO.
’S MONTHLY LIST of N ew and Forthcoming Work s
, OM andother A uthorised Publica tions, and New American Book s. Post free .
WESTMINSTERREVIEW.— Monthly, 2s. 6d . A nnual Subscription,30s. Post free.
WOMAN’S SUFFRA GE JOURNA L.
— Monthly, 1 d.
YORK SHIRE NOTES“AND QUERIES, with the York shire G enea logist, York shire
B ibliogra pher, a nd York shire Folk -Lore Journal . With separa te pfiipa tion for
e a ch subj e ct. E d ited by J. Hon ia ll Turner. Quarter“,h . M IRA
S ubscrip tion in a dvance , 50.
I RUBNER CATALOGUES.
A ny of the following Ca ta logues sent per Post on receipt of Stamps.
A frica , W ork s Re la ting to th e Mod ern L angua ge s of. 1d .
A gricultura l W ork s . 2d.
America ,N orth ,
S outh , and the W est Indie s, Book s re la ting to .
Is .
A ra b ic, Persia n , a nd Turk ish Book s , printed in the Ea st. Is.
A ssyri a a nd A ssy riology . ls.
B eng a l a nd the B e ng a l i L a ngua ge , Book s on . 1d .
Bra zil , A ncient a nd Mod ern Book s re la ting to. 23. 6d .
BritishMuse um,Pub lica tions of Truste es of the . 1d .
Burma a nd the Burme se , Book s on . 1 d .
Cey lon a nd i ts Prod ucts , Book s on . 1d .
Chi na a nd Ja pan , Book s on. 1d .
D ictiona rie s a nd G ramma rs of Princip a l L a ngua ge s and D ia le ctsof th e W orld . 5S .
D ravid i a n (Ca n a re se , Ma la y a lim, Tamil, Telugu ) L angua ges,B ook s on . 1d .
E d uca tiona l Work s (E urope a n L angua ge s ). 1d .
E gyp t a nd E gyptology . ls.
G erma n N e wsp a ers a nd Period ica ls. ls.
G ui d e Book s . hfG uj a ra ti a nd Ma ra thi L angua g es , Book s on . ld .
H ind i L a ngua g e ,Book s on . 1d .
H industani L a ngua g e , Book s on . ld .
Importa ntWork s , published by Trubuer Co. 2d .
In
dia a nd N e i ghbouring Coun triu ,
Book s of interest rela ting to.
2
Ja pan a nd th e Ja panese , Book s on . ld .
L ibra ry A ppli a nce s , H a ndbook s for L ib ra ria ns,&c. 1d.
L ingui stic and Orienta l Pub lica tions . 2d .
Maps , &c., of I nd i a a nd othe r pa rts of A sia . 1d.
Ma ra thi L a ngua g e , Book s on. 1d .
Med ica l , S urgica l , Chemica l , and D enta l Publica tions. 2d.
Mod ern G erman B ook s .
“
1d .
Monthly L ist of N ew Pub lica tions. Gra tis.
Pa li‘ Pra k rit , a nd Bud dhist L itera ture . ls.
Portugue se L angua g e , A ncient a nd Mod ern Book s in the . 6d.
S a nsk rit Book s . 23. 6d .
S cientific W ork s . 2d .
Tamil a n d Tel egu, Book s on. ld .
TRUBNER’
S
CO LLECTIO N OF SIMPL IFI ED GRAMMARSOF THE
PRI NCI PAL ASIATIC AND EURO PEAN LANGUAGES.
EDITED BY REINHOLD ROST, LL.D . ,PH D .
The obj ect of this Series is to provide the learner with a concise but
practica l Introduction to the various Languages, and a t the same time tofurnish Students ofCompara tive Philolog with a clear and comprehensiveview of their structure . The a ttempt to adapt the somewha t cq brouS
gramma tica l systemof the G ree k and La tin to every other tongue ha s introduced a grea t de a l of unnecessary d ifficulty into the study of La nguages.
Instead of a na lysing e x isting locutions and endeavouring to d iscover theprinciplea which regula te them,
wn'
ters of grammars have for the most pa rtconstructed a framework of rules on the old lines
,a nd tried to ma k e the
language of which they were trea ting fit into it. Where this proves impossible, the difliculty isme t by lists of e x ceptions and irregula r forms, thusburdening the pupil
'
smind with a mass of deta ils of which he can ma k eno.pra ctica l use .
In these G rammars the subj ect isviewed from a (lifl'
erent sta ndpoint ;
the structure of ea ch la nguage is ca refully e x amined,and the principles
which und erlie it a re ca refully e x pla ined ; while apparent d iscrepa ncies
and so-ca lled irregula rities a re shown to be only na tural euphonic and
other cha nges. A ll technica l terms are e x cluded unless the ir meaningand applica tion is self-evident ; no a rbi tra ry rules a re admitted the old
classifica tion into declensions, conjuga tions, &c.
,and even the.u.
~uul pa ra,
d igms a nd ta bles, a re omitted . Thfis reduced to the simplest principles,the A ccidence and Synta x can be thbroughly comprehended by the stud enton one perusa l, and a few hours
’diligent study Wi ll enable him to a na lyse
any sentence in the language .
For List of Volume s a lrea dy pub lish ed , see pa ge 69.
LONDON : TRUBNER Ct LUDGA TE HILL.
G
PRIN TED nvBA LL A h '
l fl-n RA N S G N AND cc.
[ D INBURCH A N D LON DON .
6
